Assembly and Operating Instructions: Cement Mill Filter Fan

Cement Mill Filter Fan
HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Assembly and Operating instructions

Type: HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Job-No.: 12298295 / 10
Customer: COLCONCRETOS S.A.
Project: VMR Sogamoso - CO
22.10.2015 2736
T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 1

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
CONTENTS
1 Fundamental safety instructions ...................................................................3

1.1 Special Safety Information ................................................................................4
1.2 Symbols ............................................................................................................4
2 General Requirements ....................................................................................5
3 Area of Application and Correct Use.............................................................6
4 Design and Method .........................................................................................7
5 Transport .........................................................................................................8
5.1 Storage .............................................................................................................8
6 Installation .......................................................................................................9
6.1 Electrical Connection ...................................................................................... 10
7 Commissioning ............................................................................................. 11
7.1 Checklist for maintenance, servicing and commissioning ............................... 13
8 Operation ....................................................................................................... 15
8.1 Switching the fan on ........................................................................................ 15
8.2 Switching off the fan ........................................................................................ 15
9 Servicing ........................................................................................................ 18
9.1 Maintenance and Care .................................................................................... 18
9.2 Inspection and Maintenance List ..................................................................... 22
10 What to do first if a malfunction occurs ...................................................... 23
11 Technical Data ............................................................................................... 25
11.1 Speed torque curve ......................................................................................... 27
11.2 Electrical Values.............................................................................................. 28
12 Stocking of Spare Parts ................................................................................ 29
12.1 Diagram and Spare Parts List ......................................................................... 30
13 Appendix
13.1 Declaration of incorporation as defined by EC machinery directive
13.2 Operating instructions for louver damper
13.3 Operating instructions for actuator
13.4 Operating instructions for coupling
13.5 Operating instructions for temperature sensor
13.6 Operating instructions for vibrocontrol
13.7 Erection drawing

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
1 Fundamental safety instructions

The instruction manual contains important information on how to operate the machine/plant safely, properly and
most efficiently. Observing these instructions helps to avoid danger, to reduce repair costs and downtimes and
to increase the reliability and life of the machine/plant.
The instruction manual is to be supplemented by the respective national rules and regulations for accident
prevention and environmental protection.
The operating instructions must always be available wherever the machine/plant is in use.
These operating instructions must be read and applied by any person in charge of carrying out work with and on
the machine/plant, such as
 operation including setting up, troubleshooting in the course of work, evacuation of production waste, care
and disposal of fuels and consumables.
 maintenance (servicing, inspection, repair) and/or
 transport.
In addition to the operating instructions and to the mandatory rules and regulations for accident prevention and
environmental protection in the country and place of use of the machine/plant, the generally recognized
technical rules for safe and proper working must also be observed.
The machine/plant has been built in accordance with state-of-the-art standards and the recognized safety rules.
Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to life and limb of the user or of third parties, or cause damage to the
machine and to other material property.
The machine/plant must only be used in technically perfect condition in accordance with its designated use and
the instructions set out in the operating manual, and only by safety-conscious persons who are fully aware of
the risks involved in operating the machine/plant. Any functional disorders, especially those affecting the safety
of the machine/plant, should therefore be rectified immediately.
Assembly, operation, maintenance and repairs to the equipment must be carried out by specialist personnel
with the appropriate qualifications. In this case the Accident Prevention Regulations must be observed.
Repair, assembly and maintenance work may only be carried out if the equipment or the plant are not in
operation. It must also be impossible to switch on the equipment by a remote switch.
Easily accessible inlet and discharge openings on plant and equipment must be fitted with a wire mesh guard if
they represent a direct or indirect hazard.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage of any kind which results from misuse of the equipment or plant or
through non-observance of the technical documentation.
Our supply is limited by the text of the quotation or order confirmation. If additional protection measures are
necessary, these must be provided and assembled by the operator of the equipment or plant.
When dealing with hazardous material the maintenance and operating personnel must be specially trained.
Independent of the safety hints contained in these instructions, the local safety regulations apply in any case for
the operation of the plant.
The operator is responsible for seeing that they are enforced.
If further information than is available in this documentation, is required on the equipment / plant, please contact
the customer service department of the manufacturer.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
1.1 Special Safety Information

The rotating drive elements between the motor and the impeller are secured with guards in compliance with
DIN EN ISO 12100, DIN EN ISO 13857 and DIN EN ISO 12499.
The guards may only be removed when the mains supply is switched off for the duration of maintenance work.
Caution, hot surfaces!

Certain parts of the fan can cause skin burns if touched.
Protect yourself by suitable measures such as allowing the machine to cool before starting
maintenance work or by wearing protective clothing.
1.2 Symbols
Warning of danger. Be sure to read and observe this information first.
General danger warning Warning of danger to persons which you must observe
Useful information and supplementary information

Note / hint
which you should observe
Transport information
Attention! Electrical voltage
Attention! Automatic start of rotating parts
Attention! Hot surfaces
Secure against reactivation during repair

work.
Information on explosion protection.
Observe the operating instructions!

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
2 General Requirements
The agreed guarantee can only be undertaken by us if following requirements are fulfilled.
 correct and expert assembly, commissioning and operation using the documentation provided
 proof that the stated maintenance frequency has been maintained
 operation of the equipment or of the plant only within the permitted operating range
 immediate reporting of damage to the manufacturer
 the equipment or plant is only used for the purpose for which it is intended according to the technical
documentation
 an alteration of the conditions of use is only permissible after consultation with the manufacturer
 the operator is responsible for an environmentally friendly removal and disposal of the residual material and
of exchanged spare parts and wear parts
 only original spare parts from the manufacturer are used
 the technical documentation must be read, understood and observed by the operating personnel
 we reserve the right to make technical alterations which are necessary for the improvement of the
equipment or plants.
The fans may be stored only where they are not subjected to vibrations in dry and frost-free rooms. Large
variations in temperature should be avoided as far as possible during storage.
Ensure that no load or pressure force is applied by the connected ducting to the
connecting flange.
Pay particular attention to possible alterations in duct length as a result of
variations in temperature and settling.
© Ventilatorenfabrik Oelde
Copies, even of parts of this text, may only be made with our approval.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
3 Area of Application and Correct Use

The fan is to be used exclusively to handle clean air or air containing dust, gas or vapour which
are not flammable or explosive.
The fan must not be installed or operated in an area subject to explosion hazards.
Any other use is not its usage as prescribed.
Restriction of the permissible service environment

When the temperature is extremely low, the materials change their strength characteristics
and grease loses its lubricity.
The fan may only be operated when the temperature of the ambient air is at least - °C!
Limitation of the permissible rotating speed range
Operation in some rotating speed ranges is prohibited or only permitted over a short period of
time so as to avoid damage to the fan.
Rotating speed range Limitation

0-- Continuous operation is prohibited. This range must be quickly passed through
during start-up and run-down.
> 1192 The maximum rotating speed must not be exceeded.
--- Continuous operation is prohibited. This range must be quickly passed through
during acceleration and slowing down.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
4 Design and Method
The centrifugal fan possesses an impeller which deflects the axial-flow air to a
centrifugal flow. In the impeller, which is equipped with backward inclined blades,
the air flow is accelerated and therefore has a higher velocity energy. When it
leaves the impeller, the air flow reaches the scroll with parallel side plates. Here the
velocity energy is transformed to a large part into pressure energy.
Construction "K" With construction type "K", the impeller is mounted on a shaft running in two
bearings. Power transmission from the motor to the shaft is through a flexible
coupling.
Impeller The impeller of the fan is made from steel plate. It is electrodynamically balanced in
two planes. The balancing quality shall be to G 2,5, according to DIN ISO 1940.
Casing
The split casing simplifies the assembly of large impellers and shafts and the
transport of large fans.
An inlet box deflects the air by 90° into the shaped inlet.
Casing Insulation The fan casing and the connecting spigots are provided with a noise- and heat-
reducing insulation, made from mineral fibre sheets. The cover plates are flexibly
fitted to the casing.
Shaft/Bearing The pedestal bearing equipped with roller bearings permits a compact support of
the shaft. The bearing is fitted with circulating oil lubrication. A conveying ring lifts
the oil out of the lower part of the housing and inject it into two collecting pans.
From here the oil flows downwards through the roller bearings. Combined with a
large housing surface this effects a good removal of warmth.
Shaft Seal Sealing between casing and shaft is with a "Novapress-Multi" seal. The disc in
plastic material encloses the shaft and is held onto the casing wall with a steel
pressure ring.
Drive Motor
A thermoelectric element incorporated into the motor winding, protects against
overheating.
Power Transmission The fan is driven by the motor through a flexible shaft coupling. The coupling has a
vibration- and shock-absorbing effect and compensates for slight disalignment of
the shaft.
Expansion Joint Elastic compensation component for the connection of ventilator and pipework. It
avoids the transmission of oscillations. Thermic extensions and assembly
impreciseness can be only compensated to a minor degree.
Regulating Damper Adjustable flaps, arranged in a fan-like shape, diagonally to the flow direction,
directly in front of the inlet opening, modify the initial torque with which the handled
medium flows towards the impeller. By means of this type of regulation the energy
consumption adapts to alterations in performance with only small losses.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
5 Transport
The fan must be fastened only to designated crane lugs.
Please observe the accident prevention regulations!
Use only hoists with adequate lifting capacity!

The slings used must comply with the safety regulations.
Eyebolts (for example, in bearing housings and motors) must be tightened up firmly before use.
5.1 Storage
Use only hoists with adequate lifting capacity!
The slings used must comply with the safety regulations.
Eyebolts (for example, in bearing housings and motors) must be tightened up firmly before use.
General storage conditions for machines and machine parts

The following must be noted when putting machines and their individual parts into storage:
 Check the delivery for any damage. Please contact your supplier if there is any damage, or in cases where
you are not sure.
 Check the packing and rust-proofing before putting the items into storage.
 Put the items into storage in closed, dry, vibration-free rooms that are protected against rain, snow and
flooding.
 Protected against dust
 Frost-free
 Avoid extreme variations of temperature (do not go below the dew point) and the associated formation of
condensation.
 Low relative humidity, max. 65%
 Protection against dampness from the ground
 You can see from the drawing and the shipping papers the amount of space required for the machine parts.
 Protect the items that have been delivered against vandalism and theft.
 Covers or tarpaulins for protection against the weather must not touch the surfaces of the items in storage.
Ensure an adequate circulation of air by putting wooden spacers between the items.
 Plastics and painted parts must be protected against mechanical damage, direct sunlight, ozone and
aggressive media.
 Avoid mechanical vibration.
 The substrate must be level so that no tensions or deformations arise.
 Do not stack the components.
 Unpainted parts are treated at the factory with protection against corrosion. The protection against corrosion
must be renewed and applied again twice a year.
 Under certain circumstances information regarding storage is given on the packed items with requirements
going beyond the ones stated above. These are to complied with accordingly.
 If packing, packaging or cartons need to be opened during transport, then the desiccant is to be replaced as
necessary and the packing and packaging then closed up again properly.
 The period of warranty is neither interrupted nor postponed as a result of the time in storage.
 Inlet and discharge nozzles are protected at the factory to prevent the entry of foreign bodies. This covering
must remain intact until immediately before connection of the pipe and may only be removed for a short
time.
 Provide a certificate or log of correct storage.
In order to avoid bearing damages by corrosion the impeller has to be turned manually once
a week until commissioning. This guarantees a continuous wetting of the antifriction bearing
parts with lubricant.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
6 Installation
 Check the place of installation for

 smoothness and
 cleanness
 Please only unpack those components which are required for the assembly work which is actually being
carried out. This will help to avoid damage during assembly and as a result of incorrect storage.
Danger of injury!
Observe the operating instructions for the lifting gear which is used.
The components must only be lifted on the crane lugs provided.
Observe the Accident Prevention Regulations
Danger of injury!
During assembly do not reach between the components. You are
assembling/dismantling heavy components (baseframe and casing bottom
half).
The result can be squashed and broken fingers.
 Concrete foundations must be dry and set. They must be in a position to take up the static and dynamic
forces. Comply also with the assembly drawing when doing this.
Rotate the impeller several times by hand.

This must be repeated at least once a month until commissioning.
Locking- and regulating flap
 Tighten the flanged screws evenly in order to avoid stresses.
 Inlet and discharge pipework must be mounted so that they are stress-free.
Carefully apply the packing. Tighten the bolts evenly all the way round.
When mounting flexible joints with air baffle plates, please observe the
direction of flow. The connecting pipework should be precisely aligned
with the fan connection. If necessary, the pipework must be readjusted.
Flexible joints are not meant to compensate for lack of exactness
during assembly. Stresses lead to early wear.
 So that vibrations are not transmitted, the inlet or outlet pipework must not be fixed to or supported on the
fan or the base-frame.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
6.1 Electrical Connection
Mains Current!
Connection may only be carried out when there is not current passing through.
When connecting the electric components, please observe the following:
 Regulations according to VDE (Association of German Electro-Engineers) Guidelines 0100.

 The valid national electrical regulations.
 This work must be carried out by an authorized specialist and in accordance with the instructions of the
motor manufacturer.
 The available mains voltage and mains frequency must be the same as the values stated on the motor
nameplate.
 The mains supply cable must be protected against damage and dimensioned appropriately to the power
consumption.
 In the first place, the wiring diagrammes in the motor connection box and the additional information from
the motor manufacturer are applicable.
 The supply of cooling air must not be hindered. The distance of the ventilator hood to adjacent objects must
be at least 1/4 of the diameter of the ventilator hood collar.
When connecting the direct current motor, the instructions of the motor manufacturer must be observed.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
7 Commissioning
Before the test run all rotating parts must be guarded against accidental contact in accordance
with the Accident Prevention Regulations.
We recommend that one of our specialists carry out an assembly inspection and the initial start-
up. Please contact our service department.
 Please check:
 assembly dimensions of impeller and shaft.
 drive tension of belts or alignment of coupling
 that all fixing screws are well tightened
 Are following threaded connections tightened?
- Motor fixing
- Bearing fixing
- Impeller fixing
- Anchor bolts
 that the fan casing and connecting pipework are airtight
Are all access doors closed and locked?
 the direction of rotation of the fan. For this purpose, switch on the motor for a moment. You can check
the correct direction of rotation against the arrow on the volute casing of the fan. Repeat this
procedure each time the fan is re-connected (change of position).
 that the lubrication supply is ensured. You will find information about the lubricant amounts in the
section „Maintenance“.
 Make sure that no loose parts, such as dust, tools or assembly material have been left in the fan
casing.
 All guards and safety devices must have been installed and be functional.
 Protect the motor and the bearings from any radiated heat (scroll casing, direct sunshine, furnaces, etc.).
 The supply of cooling air to the drive motors must not be interrupted. In order to ensure sufficient cooling of
the motor, the ambient temperature must not exceed 40 °C.
Attention!
Do not operate the fan above the rotating speed specified in the chapter „Technical Data“. You
will thus avoid inadmissable operating conditions which could damage and destroy the fan.
 Check the earth connection of the casing. Flexible joints which are not electrically conductive must be
jumpered with earthing cables.
 During the acceptance test, you should carry out a vibration check of the bearing points. Criterion for this
will be DIN ISO 10816.
For further information see Section "Servicing".
 The bearings shall not be commissioned in a non-lubricated state.
Check, before starting up, whether the oil level is between the min./max. marks. The oil level generally
decreases a little after starting up. We recommend making a further mark: "Oil level during operation", so
that oil losses can be easily determined.
 The dip-ring may fail at temperatures below 10 °C, depending on the viscosity of the oil. At ambient
temperatures of below 10 °C, the oil must be set during start-up to its maximum level so as to ensure that
the lowest rolling element is completely coated with oil.
 Monitor the behaviour of the bearing during the run-in period.
After removing the closing screw a thermometer can be fitted. Malfunction in the bearing can be recognized
by the quick rise in temperature and the rough running noises.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
 The first oil change must be made after 300 to 500 hours of operation. During this oil change the, despite
thorough cleaning, inevitable impurities are flushed away.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
7.1 Checklist for maintenance, servicing and commissioning

Cement Mill Filter Fan Type: HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 Job No.: 12298295
ST 360
Legend: √ = checked and correct; / = N/A; f = fault (action necessary) 

Visual check for damage or faults
No loose foreign bodies in casing and connected ducts/pipework
Access doors properly closed
All guards firmly mounted
Bearings sufficiently greased
Bearing seals
Area around the fan closed off to personal
Vibration monitor
Temperature monitor
Tightening torque for fixing bolts
bearing housing, anchor bolts, connecting flanges, guards
Shaft seal
After all reparations of bearing, box and axle and all transport of the whole ventilator, the position of the
rotor and the joint fissure are to be checked.
Enter the dimensions here at the
inflow ring

Nominal Value Actual
Value
a = 35 mm
h = 5 mm
A-237284-4
Bearing temperature measured on the bearing outside ring:

Time
Non-locating bearing °C °C °C °C °C
Locating bearing °C °C °C °C °C
Vibration measurements on the bearings

Measure vibrations on the bearings veff[mm/s]
horizontally and vertically bearing vertical horizontal
1 locating bearing *
*) See layout plan
2 non-locating bearing *

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Remarks:
___________ ____________________________
Date Signature

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
8 Operation
8.1 Switching the fan on

The fan does not possess a device to switch it on or off. This function is generally performed by a higher-level
control. This control must ensure that it is not possible to accidentally switch on the fan which could result in
serious injury or death.
Notes for operation under partial load - operation with louvre damper or vane control
Δp
Continuous operation with very strong throttling
(damper opening angles of more than 60°) lead to
increased machine vibration and must be avoided.
Throttling by the system mechanisms can likewise

put the fan at risk.
! 60
0
V
If the fan is started up with the damper closed, the amount of current drawn and the loading on the drive motor
can be reduced.
After the startup phase the damper (vane control) must be opened at once. Continuous operation is not
permitted over the damper setting range from 60° to 90° (0° = open, 90° = closed).
8.2 Switching off the fan

The closed damper reduces the volume flow and thus extends the spin-out phase of the fan.
If the draft in the ducting system drives the fan when it is switched off, this can cause problems.
Problem Solution
The backwards flowing gas drives the fan in the
Use of a frequency-controlled
opposite direction. When it is switched on again it can
drive motor with speed buffer.
cause overloading of the drive motor.
If the draft is very strong, the fan can possibly be
accelerated above the rated speed when in no-load
operation.
Forwards flowing gas drives the rotor and increases Installation of a brake or an air-tight shut-off valve.
the slowing down time when the fan is switched off.
Oil-lubricated bearings are not being sufficiently
supplied with lubricant and may be damaged.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
If hot or cold gases are flowing through the fan when it

is in no-load operation, the rotor can be unevenly
warmed up. This causes a shifting of the point of
gravity. Installation of an idling drive.
The shaft can become deformed by uneven warming The idling provides for an even temperature
or cooling. distribution.
When the fan is switched on, unbalance vibrations can

be caused..
The effect of temperature

High Temperatures often indicate that the bearing is acting abnormally. High temperatures can be detrimental to
the bearing lubricant. Overheating can sometimes be attributed to the bearing lubricant. Running for extended
periods at temperatures in excess of 125 °C (260 °F) can reduce bearing life. Causes of high bearing
temperatures include insufficient or excessive lubrication, impurities in the lubricant, overloading, bearing
damage, insufficient clearance, pinching and high friction in the seals.
It is therefore necessary to check the temperature continually, both at the bearing itself and at other vital
components. Any change in temperature can be an indication of malfunction if the running conditions have not
been altered
On the housing cap there is a blind-end bore with thread M10 x 1, which is closed off by a plastic stop. If
required, a thermometer or the feeler of a remote thermometer or of another type of temperature monitoring
device can be inserted.
The bore reaches close to the outer ring of the roller bearing so that the temperature can be measured very
close to its source. Variations in temperature can therefore be indicated with only a slight delay.
With a bearing temperature monitor we recommend following settings:
1st. warning temperature 1st alarm contact 90 °C
2nd warning temperature 2nd alarm contact 105 °C
The operator must decide whether the machine should be switched off when the 2nd alarm contact is reached.
In any case the reason for the limit temperature must be determind.
Mechanical vibrations
Fans with a fast rotating mass form a relatively complex vibration system and are classified as machines which
tend to vibrate. Although they are dynamically balanced during fabrication, these machines can change their
vibration properties during operation, depending on their application.
The vibrations on the fan can have following causes:

Unbalance
Unbalance is caused by displacement of the mass center of gravity of a rotor system (impeller and shaft). This
mass-related unbalance is caused by wear, caking, corrosion and thermal influences.
 Resonances
There is a resonance if the frequency of the operated fan system itself is identical with the excitation
frequency of an interference force from the fan itself or being a periodical interference force effective from
outside.
 Aerodynamic effects
Changing operation conditions are often generated within a process plant (temperature alterations,
switching over to different volume flows, inlet vane or damper adjustment, etc.). These produce additional
changing forces in the gas stream (pulsation) which can cause parts of the fan assembly to mechanically
vibrate.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Increased care is required when:
 the permissible bearing temperature is exceeded,

 unacceptable vibrations occur,
 unusual noises or smells occur on the bearings and
 the monitoring plant is activated.
Evaluation of the vibrations / limit values for roller bearing

Evaluation of the vibrations on machines by measurements on non-rotating components according to DIN ISO
10816-3.
Measurements are taken directly on the bearings in horizontal and vertical direction, whereby the higher value is
relevant.
shaft output > 300 kW
applied standard ISO 10816-3
fan-application category Group 1
min. balance quality grade for rigid rotors/impeller, tested at manufacturer G 2,5
maximum permissible value of vibration velocity veff [mm/s] rigid installation flexible installation
Delivery status / balancing at the manufacturer 2,3 3,5
Status at commissioning 4,5 7,1
Status after the commissioning / Alarm limit 5,6 8,9

operation Limit for shut-down 8,9 11*
*) Venti Oelde recommends a maximum of 11 mm / s.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
9 Servicing
The Accident Prevention Regulations must be observed.
During servicing the usual engineering principles must be observed.

Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by appropriately qualified personnel.
Electrical work may only be carried by a qualified electrician. All applicable safety regulations and guidelines
(DIN VDE 0105) must be observed.
Only lifting gear with sufficient bearing capacity may be used.
The fixing attachment must correspond with the safety regulations.
Eyebolts (e.g. in bearing housings and motors) must be tightened before use.
Before commencing work:
 Obtain information about

 Type and scope of the work
 Dangers and any safety measures which must be taken
 Ambient hazards, e.g. gases, lack of oxygen
 Measures to take in an emergency
 Switch off plant
 Wait until plant is at a standstill
 Secure so that plant cannot be switched on again
 Ensure that there can be no movement as the result of residual energy
 Shut off the work area
Before restarting plant:
 Re-fix guards
 Check that the guards are correctly functioning
 Ensure that plant is in an operational state
 Remove personnel from hazardous area
Observe the process described in the section „Commissioning“
9.1 Maintenance and Care

The smoothness of the fan must occasionally be checked when the motor is switched on. If the fan is not
running smoothly, then the impeller must be cleaned and, if necessary, re-balanced.
Before the fan casing is opened, any flanged connection loosened or protection guard removed,
the fan must be switched off and the possibility of switching it back on prevented. Make sure that
the impeller is at a standstill. Accident Prevention Regulations must be observed. All safety
devices must again be firmly fixed before the fan is switched on again.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Impeller
During the yearly inspection of the impeller, it must be cleaned and checked for tension cracks. Fine cracks can
be found by the dye penetration process.
If material erosion or damage to the impeller are noticed, please report back to the manufacturer.
The impeller can be cleaned by washing or by careful scraping. You may not knock off deposits (possible
damage to impeller).
If necessary, the rotor can be re-balanced in situ by our service technician.
Shaft Seal
During inspection of the fan the sealing must be checked.
Shaft seal
The disc seal does not require maintenance.
Assembly / Dismantling
 Loosen the fixing clamps

 Pull back the steel disc
 Bend the seal disc apart and pull it away from the shaft. If there is not sufficient space between fan casing
and bearing housing or motor, then the impeller must be dismantled and the shaft pulled back.
 If the seal is a multi-disc type, the other seal discs must be removed in the same way.
When re-assembling, make sure that the sealing discs and the steel discs are arranged alternately
(labyrinth seal). The slits in the sealing disc must not lie directly next to one another, but must be radially
displaced.
 Bend the seal disc apart at the notch and push it onto the shaft.
 Align the steel discs on the outside diameter of the seal discs and fix them with the fixing clamps.
Drive motor
Observe the motor manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance and care of the motor.
If it becomes necessary to replace the motor, then the replacement motor must be at least equivalent to the
original one. This applies particularly to explosion protection.
Bearing arrangement
All work on the bearings, such as assembly, dismantling, cleaning, setting and
aligning must be carried out by an appropriately trained and instructed expert!
Many lubricants can cause skin irritations and inflammation of the eyes. Follow the
manufacturer’s safety instructions.
Locating bearing
Application of bearing
Non-locating bearing

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Bearing lubrication
Always wear protective gloves, if possible, because allergies may be caused by

regular contact with oil products.
Observe the directions for use provided by the lubricant manufacturer. Your supplier
will advise you about oil waste disposal.
Lubricants for roller bearings

In principle any brand-name oil with a low tendency to foam formation and with good ageing properties.
Viscosity ISO VG 68is specified.
In fan building following sorts of oil have proved successful for lubrication:
For normal temperatures up to 80 °C For higher temperatures
80 - 110 °C
ISO Viscosity classification
VG 46 VG 68 VG 100
1. ARAL Aral Motanol HK 46 Aral Motanol HK 68 Aral Motanol HK 100
2. FUCHS Renolin DTA 15 Renolin 207, Renolin DTA 20 Renolin 208, Renolin 104
3. BP BP Energol CS 46 BP Energol CS 68 BP Energol CS 100
4. MOBIL Mobil DTE Oil Medium Mobil DTE Oil Heavy Medium Mobil Vactra Oil Heavy
5. FINA Fina Cirkan 46 Fina Cirkan 68 Fina Cirkan 100
6. SHELL Shell Tellus Oil C46 Shell Tellus Oil C68 Shell Tellus Oil C100
7. ESSO Teresso 46, Nuto H 46 Teresso 68, Nuto H 68 Nuray 100, Nuto H 100
8. TEXACO Rando Oil 46 Rando Oil 68 Rando Oil 100
Plummer block
Non-locating
bearing Locating bearing
Filling volume max.: 1,9 3,5 Liter
Oil level max.: 70 70 mm
Oil level min.: 50 55 mm
With oil bath lubrication it is generally sufficient to renew the oil once a year as long as the bearing temperature
does not exceed +80° C. Higher temperatures or excessive contamination of the oil mean that the oil must be
replaced more frequently. A bearing temperature which is 10° C higher will halve the useful life, so that when
the bearing temperature is +100° C a useful life of only 3 months may be expected.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
The frequency with which the oil should be changed cannot be determined in advance. It must be adapted to
the operating conditions. The best method of control is to monitor the appearance of the oil and to check it
occasionally for impurities and to ensure that it is not excessively oxidised.
The neutralization number of the oil must not exceed 1 mg KOH/g (milligrammes potassium hydroxide per
gramme).
Steps of Oil Change

1. Create suitable preconditions for collecting all the lubricant (see above filling volume).
2. If possible drain the lubricant under hot running condition. By doing so impurities and sump tailings are
rinsed out as well. Filter the oil so that the residues can be better judged.
If the lubricant contains residues or it has changed noticeably look for the reasons. If
necessary carry out an inspection of bearings.
3. Screw in tightly the oil drainage screw possibly with a new sealing.
4. Fill the bearing casing with the lubricant mentioned above.
5. When the maximum oil level is reached again the bearing is ready for operation.
Coupling
Regularly check the wear on the synthetic buffers.
They can be replaced without moving the motor and fan
axially.The insertion of new synthetic buffers is made easier by
painting them with glycerine.
If the fan is not running smoothly, this can be caused by a
disalignment of the shaft.
Coupling size () Pitch S [mm] Angular displacement f Radial displacement y

[mm] [mm]
360 3-6 0,37 0,37
The total of both displacements must not exceed the figure of 0,37 mm.
Check regularly torsional tolerance of both coupling halves.
Casing
The threaded connections on the casing (flanged threaded connections must be checked regularly. Please
observe the Inspection and Maintenance List.
The casing can be cleaned with high-pressure cleaning equipment.
Electrical connection boxes must not be directly subjected to the cleaning jet.
Flexible Joint
During the optical inspection, check particularly for
 Discoloration of the outer coating

 Blistering
 Brittleness
 Extreme folds
 Deformation
 Deposits of dust, sand, etc.
 Chafe marks.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
 Deposits between flexible joint and baffle plate

 Tension-free installation
Condensation Drain
During cleaning of the impeller and as a result of condensation, water collects in the lower part of the fan casing.
This water can be run off through the condensation drain.
Louver Damper
Please adhere to the instruction manual in annexe.
9.2 Inspection and Maintenance List
before commissioning
every 3 month
every 6 month
after 1 month
after 24 h
monthly
weekly
yearly
daily
check airtightness X X
coupling X X X X
check supply of cooling air X X X
retighten screws X X X
check bearing temperature X X
check smooth running X X
inspect casing for tension cracks X
inspect impeller for signs of wear X
clean fan X
remove rust X
Grease bearings See servicing instructions

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
10 What to do first if a malfunction occurs

Please go through this check list of what to do if a malfunction occurs. If the equipment or plant is still not
working properly, please contact our Maintenance Service.
Operating Malfunction Possible Causes Remedial Action
Fan flow volume insufficient Impeller with incorrect direction of Reverse direction of rotation (see
rotation Chapter "Commissioning")
Damper equipment is not or only Check opening position on
partially opened equipment
Inlet or outlet pipework blocked Remove obstruction
Guide plates for the flexible joints Assemble flexible joint according to
have been mounted in reverse the direction of flow and to the given
position. Fabric of flexible joint is dimensions.
making the opening of the pipework
too narrow.
Sudden decrease in performance Inlet or discharge duct not airtight Seal
Fabric of flexible joint defect Replace flexible joint fabric
Fan is not reaching its rated Electrical switching devices are Check setting of motor protection
speed incorrectly set device and if necessary re-adjust.
Motor winding defect Please contact manufacturer
Drive motor has been incorrectly Please contact manufacturer for the
sized purpose of checking the starting
torque.
Motor is switched off by overload Plant resistance is too low Check that plant is airtight Increase
protection switch the plant resistance by damping the
fan until the current consumption lies
about 5 % below the rated current.
Fan is not running true Impeller is unbalanced Re-balancing by specialist
Deposits on impeller Carefully wash off deposits. If
necessary re-balancing by specialist.
Material disintegration on impeller Report to manufacturer
as result of aggressive medium.
Material erosion as a result of Report to manufacturer.
abrasive medium.
Impeller deformed as result of Please contact manufacturer.
overheating or foreign bodies
Dust egress or leakages at shaft Sealing disc or shaft sleeve worn. Replace sealing disc or shaft sleeve
passage through fan casing
Seal not suitable for this application Please report back to manufacturer
Dust egress or leakages at Flexible joint defect Replace flexible joint
flexible joints
Clamping flange or clamping ring Retighten the screws of the clamping
are not properly tightened flange or clamping ring
Noises of friction during operation Inlet pipe mounted under stress Loosen inlet pipework and re-align
or when fan is running down

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Fan is not running true Coupling has too much play. Replace the plastic washers in the
claw coupling.
Coupling has not been correctly Align coupling. (See section
aligned. maintenance)
Temperature increase in the roller The type of oil is unsuitable for the Select the correct lubrication as
bearings, running noises or operating conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
increased vibrations.
Oil level too low. Fill the oil up to the “max” mark.
Oil level is too high. This results in Reduce the oil level to the “max”
increased friction losses through mark.
splashing movements.
The bearing clearance is too small Check whether the clearance of the
when the bearing is subject to hot bearing corresponds to the
additional warmth from the shaft. original specification. If so, mount a
The inner ring expands too far. bearing with a larger bearing
clearance.
Oil return bore-holes are blocked. Clear out the bore-holes. Drain off
the old oil and refill with the correct
amount of fresh oil.
Machine vibrations Check the balance of the rotating
parts. Re-balance the fan.
Flattening of the roll bodies as a Sight check the roll bodies and
result of sliding movements replace the bearings.
(caused by fast start-up)
Ingress of impurities, such as dirt, Clean the bearing housings. Drain off
sand, etc. into the bearing housing the old oil and refill with the correct
Chips, dirt, etc. were not removed Clean the parts carefully. Drain off
before the bearing was mounted. the old oil and refill with the correct
The complete rotor and pillow block Correctly align the rotor and pillow
housing have not been correctly block housings with shims.
aligned. Completely support the housing foot.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
11 Technical Data
Fan Type HRV 40X-1000/K Venti- Job Number 12298295

Customer COLCONCRETOS S.A. Person responsible VAL
Remarks Cement Mill Filter Fan Date 08.07.15
Project VMR Sogamoso - CO Year of construction 2015
operating point Design

Volume flow, normal condition Vnorm 59.657 Nm³/h
Volume flow at fan inlet V1 121.000 m³/h
Volume flow at fan inlet Ve 121.000 m³/h
Mass flow m 76.972 kg/h
Mass flow dust mst 0,0 kg/h
Air pressure Δpb 74.000 Pa
Pressure increase (1-2) , static Δp1-2 7.600 Pa
Stat. press (inlet side) Δpe -7.600 Pa
Stat. press (outlet side) Δpa 0 Pa
Internal losses at fan inlet Δpie 0 Pa
Internal losses at fan outlet Δpia 0 Pa
Dynamic pressure (at fan inlet) Δpde 348 Pa
Dynamic pressure (at fan outlet) Δpda 512 Pa
Inlet velocity ce 33,07 m/s
Outlet velocity ca 38,70 m/s
Temperature (at fan inlet) te 90,00 °C
Gas constant R 287,43 Nm/kg K
Spec. flow work Yt 11.727 Nm/kg
Total pressure Δpt 7.764 Pa
Total pressure (1.205) Δpt1,205 14.707 Pa
Density (at inlet) ρ1 0,636 kg/m³
Density (at inlet) ρe 0,636 kg/m³
Density (at outlet) ρa 0,684 kg/m³
Fan speed nv 1.192 1/min
Impeller diameter D2 2,258 m
Efficiency tw 81,33 %
Useful power Pn 250,73 kW
Drive power fan shaft Pw 308,28 kW
Tip speed u2 140,86 m/s
Temperature (at fan outlet) ta 104,33 °C
Coefficient of flow φ 0,0596 -
Coefficient of pressure ψ 1,1821 -
The characteristic data will be determined according to DIN 24163.

The accuracy classes acc. to DIN 24166 apply to the limiting deviations.
10060014-11174197-0001 Internal: e. HRV (2-seitig gelagert - SK abgesetzt); Drehzahlregelung SK1 - VW4,60 VS0,966 LD0,15

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Fan Type HRV 40X-1000/K Venti Job Number 12298295

Customer COLCONCRETOS S.A. Person responsible VAL
Remarks Cement Mill Filter Fan Date
Project VMR Sogamoso - CO Year of construction 2015

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Sound data without/with silencing measures

A-weighted sound pressure level under free inlet and outlet duct outlet duct connected inlet duct connected
field conditions (DIN 45635) connected
distance of 1 m from fan distance of 1 m at angle of distance of 1 m at angle of
45° from the open inlet side 45° from the open outlet side
Operating point
dB(A) dB(A) dB(A)
Design 83 98 104
11.1 Speed torque curve
100% A
90
80
70
60
50
M/MN
40
30
20
10
PW
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100% M N  9550
nL
n/nL
Volume flow at fan inlet V1 121.000 m³/h
Temperature (at fan inlet) te 90,00 °C
Total pressure (E - A) Δpt 7.764 Pa
Fan speed nv =nL 1.192 1/min
Basic torque at ρe = 0,636 kg/m³ and te = 90,00 °C MN 2.470,48 Nm
Mass moment of inertia of the rotor J 870 kg m²
Required power PW 308,28 kW
Recommended motor nominal power PM 400 kW
Motor basic speed nM 1192 1/min

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
11.2 Electrical Values

The fan is designed for these standard motor values.
If the motor is not included in our scope of supply, then we must be consulted before another drive may be
used.
Motor output 400 kW

Motor speed 1190 U/min
Mains voltage 440 V
Frequency 60 Hz
Enclosure -
Mounting arrangement B3
Insulation class F

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
12 Stocking of Spare Parts

Having the most important spare and wear parts available where the plant is installed, is an important pre-
requisite for the continued function and readiness of the plant.
We undertake a guarantee only for the original spare parts supplied by us.
We must state expressly that spare parts and accessories which have not been supplied by us, have also not
been examined and approved by us. The installation and/or use of such products can therefore in certain
circumstances have a negative influence on the construction properties of the equipment or plant and therefore
effect negatively the active and/or passive security of the plant.
Any liability or warranty on the part of manufacturer for damage which is caused by the use of non-original spare
parts and accessories, is totally excluded.
Please observe that there are often special manufacturing and supply specifications for our own parts and those
supplied by our suppliers, and that we always offer spare parts in accordance with the most recent technical
developments and the latest laws.
When placing an order for spare parts, please let us have the following information:
 Description and type of equipment/plant

 Serial number
 Description of spare part
 Article number
 Quantity required.
We make every endeavour to fulfil your wishes for spare parts as promptly as possible.
Please contact:
Ventilatorenfabrik Oelde GmbH Telephone +49 2522 75-0
After sales service Fax +49 2522 75-250
P.O.B. 3709 _ D-59286 Oelde E-Mail info@venti-oelde.de
Robert-Schuman-Ring 21 Internet www.venti-oelde.de
D-59302 Oelde

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
12.1 Diagram and Spare Parts List
Article No. No. Item Description

K_HRV_LAUFRAD_3HH 1 1 Impeller complete
T_G_FLACHDICHT_0E4 4 2 Shaft sealing
T_V_LAGGEHOEL_0UW 1 3 Pedestal bearing
7550 1 3a Bearing inset
K_N_WELLEFL_1Y3 1 4 Shaft
T_V_LAGGEHOEL_0UX 1 5 Pedestal bearing
2978 1 5a Bearing inset
T_G_KUPPLELAS_1NQ 1 6 Coupling
48712 10 6a flexibles for coupling (set)
- - 7 Drive motor
- - * 11 Vibraton damper
- - * 12 Flexible joint fabric, inlet side
- - * 13 Flexible joint fabric, outlet side
- - * 14 Transition piece
T_V_ESDSSEIG_0YA 1 * 15 Inlet nozzle
47974 1 * 16 Cooling vane
- - * Inlet vane control damper
*) special accessories

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13 Appendix
13.1 Declaration of incorporation as defined by EC machinery directive
T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Declaration of incorporation
in accordance with EU Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex IIB
Manufacturer and representative Ventilatorenfabrik Oelde GmbH

for Technical Documentation Robert-Schuman-Ring 21
D-59302 Oelde
Telephone: +49 2522 75-0
Telefax: +49 2522 75-250
www.venti-oelde.de
Designation: Cement Mill Filter Fan

Type: HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Job No. / Item: 12298295 / 10
We hereby declare that the a.m. product is an incomplete machine as defined by the Machinery Directive,
Article 2g. The product is exclusively designed for incorporation in a machine or an incomplete machine and
does not, therefore, yet fulfil all requirements of the Machinery directive.
Not all essential health and safety requirements in accordance with Annex 1 of this Directive are applied and
were fulfilled. These are listed in the attachment to this declaration.
The special technical documents in accordance with Annex VII B were prepared and will be forwarded to the
responsible national authorities on demand (documents sent by postal mail).
This incomplete machine conforms with the conditions of the following EU Directives:
EU Machinery Directive 2006/42 EC
EU low voltage guideline 2006/95/EU,
EU guideline electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EU
Following harmonized standards (or parts of these standards) were used:
EN ISO 12100 ; EN ISO 12499; EN ISO 13857; EN 349+A1; EN 60204-Part 1
This incomplete machine must not be put into operation until it has been determined that the machine in which
this incomplete machine is to be incorporated, complies with the conditions of the machinery directive.
Oelde, 26.10.2015
Date Peter Herrmann, Technical Manager GBV

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Annex to Declaration of Incorporation

Designation: Cement Mill Filter Fan
Type: HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Job No. / Item: 12298295 / 10
Description of the essential health and safety requirements in accordance with 2006/42/EC, Annex 1, which are
implemented and were complied with.
Designation Remarks
applicable
complied
entirety /
ANNEX I
Number
1.1.1. Definitions
1.1.2. Principles of safety integration
1.1.3. Materials and products
1.1.4. Lighting
1.1.5. Design of machinery to facilitate its handling
1.1.6. Ergonomics
1.1.7. Operating positions
1.1.8. Seating
1.2.1. Safety and reliability of control systems
1.2.2. Control devices
1.2.3. Starting
1.2.4. Stopping
1.2.4.1. Normal stop
1.2.4.2. Operational stop
1.2.4.3. Emergency stop
1.2.4.4. Assembly of machinery
1.2.5. Selection of control or operating modes
1.2.6. Failure of the power supply
1.3. Protection against mechanical hazards
1.3.1. Risk of loss of stability
1.3.2. Risk of break-up during operation
1.3.3. Risks due to falling or ejected objects
1.3.4. Risks due to surfaces, edges or angles
1.3.5. Risks related to combined machinery
1.3.6. Risks related to variations in operating conditions
1.3.7. Risks related to moving parts
1.3.8. Choice of protection against risks arising from
moving parts
1.3.8.1. Moving transmission parts
1.3.8.2. Moving parts involved in the process
1.3.9. Risks of uncontrolled movements
1.4. Required characteristics of guards and protective
devices

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Designation Remarks
applicable
complied
entirety /
ANNEX I
Number
1.4.1. General requirements

1.4.2. Special requirements for guards
1.4.2.1. Fixed guards
1.4.2.2. Interlocking movable guards
1.4.2.3. Adjustable guards restricting access
1.4.3. Special requirements for protective devices
1.5. Risks due to other hazards
1.5.1. Electricity supply
1.5.2. Static electricity
1.5.3. Energy supply other than electricity
1.5.4. Errors of fitting
1.5.5. Extreme temperatures
1.5.6. Fire
1.5.7. Explosion
1.5.8. Noise
1.5.9. Vibrations
1.5.10. Radiation
1.5.11. External radiation
1.5.12. Laser radiation
1.5.13. Emissions of hazardous materials and substances
1.5.14. Risk of being trapped in a machine
1.5.15. Risk of slipping, tripping or falling
1.5.16. Lightning
1.6. Servicing
1.6.1. Machinery maintenance
1.6.2. Access to operating positions and servicing points
1.6.3. Isolation of energy sources
1.6.4. Operator intervention
1.6.5. Cleaning of internal parts
1.7. Information
1.7.1. Information and warnings on the machinery
1.7.1.1. Information and information devices
1.7.1.2. Warning devices
1.7.2. Warning of residual risks
1.7.3. Marking of machinery
1.7.4. Operating Instructions
1.7.4.1. General principles for the drafting of instructions
1.7.4.2. Contents of the instructions
1.7.4.3. Sales literature

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13.2 Operating instructions for louver damper
Transport and Assembly

Risk of injury!
Strictly observe the operating instructions for the lifting gear used.
The components must only be lifted on the crane lugs provided.
Observe the Accident Prevention Regulations
Risk of injury!
Do not insert your hand between components during installation. You are
assembling/dismantling heavy components (baseframe and casing bottom half).
Fingers/hands can be caught and crushed.
General assembly
During the loading and assembly operations the louver damper should be raised uniformly on at least two
anchoring points to prevent warping of the frame. For this purpose please use the eye-bolts which you should fix
at the flange.
There must be no tension cables attached to the valves or the displacement linkage!
Final assembly
 Clean the flange sealing surfaces of the channel duct and louver dampers carefully.
 Remove unevenness
 Before the assembly prepare the flange with sealing (see figure 1). Here please ensure that the sealing is
placed as close to the holes for the screws as possible to seal the louver damper effectively.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
1. Flange
2. Seal
1 2
The seal can be glued to the flange to prevent it from slipping.
 When fitting the louver damping, there must be no recognisable offset. It must be fitted tension-free in the
specified mounting position and flow direction (make sure that the counter flange is straight).
 Tighten the bolts evenly.
 Perform a functional test by opening and closing the valve several times.
Assembly with double-flow fans
 First align both the louver dampers, adjust

and bring into the „closed“ position
 Connect both the louver dampers with the
universal shaft and pin the shaft-hub
connections twice each.
Initial Operation
Before initial operation, tools, assembly parts and other objects must be removed from the
rotation range of the dampers.
During initial operation of the accessories, such as drives and limit switches, the manufacturer's instructions
must always be observed.
Installation notes
The louver damper can be used for the following operating conditions:
Temperatures: - to 120 °C
Max. Pressure 10000 Pa
difference p:
Readjusting the louver damper
Seal situation:
2
The sealing strip must lie on the
neighbouring damper blade. If this is not the
case, it must be readjusted.
1. Sealing strip
2. Flap wing
3. Fin 1 3

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
The louver damper is adjusted and tested at the factory. When properly stored and assembled, readjustment
should not be necessary before initial operation. During the initial operation, only the setting of the travel switch
and torque switch of the actuator must be tested.
1. Connecting rod
2. Counter nut
1 2
Different positions of the damper blades with each other can be adjusted by turning the connecting rod (1). To
do this, the counter nuts (2) are first loosened. The connecting rod is lengthened or shortened by turning. This
changes the damper angle. Afterwards, tighten the counter nuts again.
Maintenance
Louver dampers are practically maintenance-free. The maintenance instructions of the respective manufacturer
apply for the built-on drives and other accessories. Depending on operating conditions and long downtime
periods, the seal should be checked from time to time for possible damage and deposits.
Inspect twice a year if the damper leaves are running synchronously. To do this close the louver into the
position „up“and subsequently again to down position. If the louver leaves, especially the one behind the power
train, deviate by several degrees, this may have different causes.
Cause Remedy
The connection louver shaft adjusting lever has Tighten the screws at the lever
clearance
Louver connection shaft has clearance Check the shaft-hub connection
Ball joint is worn out Replace the ball joint and adjust the louver afresh
Jumpy sequence of the movement of the individual drive elements indicated a clearance in the
connections.
Two times in a year check for wear at the louver leaves.

Readjusting gland bearings or glands
It is especially important to ensure that the glands are readjusted evenly after approx. 70 operating hours (from
assumption of operation involving temperature).
If no sealing could be achieved after long operational time and several readjustments, the pressure ring (3) must
be removed to insert or replace new packing rings. Provide the bearing with heat-resistant lubricating grease.
If the initial tension is too great it may block the shaft so that the louver can no longer move.
After doing the adjustment check for freedom of movement and secure the screw connection
with counter nut.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
Gland nut with shaft drive side Stopfbuchse mit Welle Gegenseite
1. Packing ring
2. Gland bearing
3. Pressure ring

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13.3 Operating instructions for actuator

Part-turn gearboxes
Worm gearboxes
GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Certificate Registration No.

Operation instructions
12 100/104 4269
Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3 Operation instructions
Scope of these instructions: These operation instructions are valid for worm gearboxes of the type range
GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 with primary reduction gearings VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3. and
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 with primary reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – 250.3.
Table of contents Page

1. Safety instructions 3
1.1 Range of application 3
1.2 Maintenance 3
1.3 Warnings and notes 3
2. Technical data 4
3. Transport, storage and packaging 7
3.1 Transport 7
3.2 Storage 7
3.3 Packaging 7
4. Fitting of handwheel 7
5. Mounting positions of the different versions 8
6. Mounting of multi-turn actuators SA/SAR 9
7. Mounting to valve 11
8. Setting the end stops for manual operation 12
8.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves 12
8.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves 13
9. Setting the end stops with mounted multi-turn actuator 13
9.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves 13
9.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves 14
10. Changing the swing angle 16
10.1 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 (option) 16
10.2 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 17
11. Enclosure protection IP 68 18
12. Maintenance 19
12.1 General notes 19
12.2 Grease change for worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and primary reduction gearing
VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3 20
12.2.1 Worm gearboxes 20
12.2.2 Primary reduction gearing 20
VZ 160.3 – VZ 250.3 21
12.3.1 Worm gearboxes 21
12.3.2 Single-stage reductions gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1 and 8:1) 21
12.3.3 Double-stage primary reduction gearing GZ 200.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratio 16:1) 22
12.4 After maintenance 22
13. Disposal and recycling 23
14. Service 23
15. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and reduction gearing VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3 24
16. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 26
17. Spare parts list reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1, 8:1 and 16:1) 28
18. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation 30
Index 31
Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives 32
2
Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3 are used for the operation of
valves (e.g. butterfly valves and ball valves).
They are designed for manual operation as well as motor operation in
conjunction with electric actuators.
For other applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for
any possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated appli-
cations. Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the
gearboxes’ designated use.
1.2 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 19) must be observed, other-
wise a safe operation of the worm gearbox is no longer guaranteed.
1.3 Warnings and notes Non-observance of the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damage. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings
and notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting and installation, as well as
careful commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe oper-
ation.
The following references draw special attention to safety-relevant proce-
dures in these operation instructions. Each is marked by the appropriate
pictograph.
This pictograph means: Note!

“Note” marks activities or procedures which have major influence on the
correct operation. Non-observance of these notes may lead to consequen-
tial damage.
This pictograph means: Warning!

“Warning” marks activities or procedures which, if not carried out correctly,
can affect the safety of persons or material.
3
2. Technical data
Features and functions
Version Standard: clockwise rotation RR, counterclockwise rotation LL, option: RL or LR
Housing material Standard: cast iron (GJL-250), Option: spheroidal cast iron (GJS-400-15)
Self-locking The gearboxes are self-locking when at stand-still under normal service conditions; strong
vibrations may cancel the self-locking effect. While in motion, safe breaking is not
guaranteed. If this is required, a separate brake must be used.
Output torques Type Output torques

100 % 140 % 175 %1) 200 %1) Modulating torque2)
max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm
GS 50.3 250 350 – 500 125
GS 63.3 500 700 – 1,000 250
GS 80.3 1,000 1,400 – 2,000 500
GS 100.3 2,000 2,800 – 4,000 1,000
GS 125.3 4,000 5,600 – 8,000 2,000
GS 160.3 8,000 11,250 14,000 – 4,000
GS 200.3 16,000 22,500 28,000 – 8,000
GS 250.3 32,000 45,000 56,000 – 16,000
End stops Positive for both end positions by travelling nut, sensitive adjustment
Strength of end stop Guaranteed strength of end stop (in Nm) for input side operation
Type GS 50.3 GS 63.3 GS 80.3 GS 100.3 GS 125.3
Reduction gearing – – – VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
Nm 250 450 450 500 250 500 250
Type GS 160.3 GS 200.3 GS 250.3

Reduction gearing GZ 160.3 GZ 200.3 GZ 250.3
Reduction ratio 4:1 8:1 4:1 8:1 16:1 4:1 8:1 16:1
Nm 500 450 500 500
Swing angle Standard: Fixed swing angle up to max. 100°; set in the factory to 92° unless ordered
GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 otherwise.
Options: Adjustable in steps of:
10°– 35°, 35° – 60°, 60° – 80°, 80° – 100°, 100° – 125°, 125° – 150°,
150° – 170°, 170° – 190°
For version with worm wheel made of bronze: swing angle > 190°,
Multi-turn version without end stops, version GSD
Swing angle Standard: Adjustable 80° - 100°; set in the factory to 92° unless ordered otherwise.
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 Options: Adjustable in steps of: 20° – 40°, 40° – 60°, 60° – 80°,
For version with worm wheel made of bronze: swing angle > 100°,
‘ Multi-turn version without end stops, version GSD
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Pointer cover for continuous position indication
Options: Sealed pointer cover for horizontal outdoor installation3)
Protection cover for buried service instead of pointer cover
Input shaft Cylindrical with parallel key according to DIN 6885.1
Operation
Motor operation With electric multi-turn actuator, directly or through primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ
Flanges for mounting of actuator, refer also to separate Technical data sheets.
Type of duty According to actuator
Manual operation Via handwheel, directly or through primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ
Available handwheel diameters, selection according to the max. output torque:
Type GS 50.3 GS 63.3 GS 80.3 GS 100.3 GS 125.3
Reduction gearing – – – – VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 – VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
Handwheel Ø 160 250 315 400 315 315 250 500 400 400 315
mm 200 315 400 500 400 400 315 630 500 500 400
250 800
Type GS 160.3 GS 200.3 GS 250.3

Reduction gearing – GZ 160.3 – GZ 200.3 – GZ 250.3
Handwheel Ø 630 400 315 – 500 400 315 – 800 500 400
mm 800 630 630
1) With worm wheel made of spheroidal cast iron

2) Requires worm wheel made of bronze
3) For gas applications with sealed pointer cover, an air vent in the pointer cover or venting grooves in the valve mounting flange must be provided
4
Primary reduction gearing

Primary reduction gearing Planetary gear with various reduction ratios for reducing the input torques
Valve attachment
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Standard: GS 50.3 – GS 125.3: without spigot
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3: with spigot
Options: GS 50.3 – GS 125.3: with spigot
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3: without spigot
Splined coupling for connection Standard: without bore or pilot bore from GS 160.3
to the valve shaft Worm gearbox can be repositioned 4 x 90° on coupling
Options: Machined with bore and keyway, square bore or bore with two-flats
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 5294) Options5): IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
IP 68-10, dust and water tight up to max. 10 m head of water
IP 68-20, dust and water tight up to max. 20 m head of water
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants
with a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere
with high humidity and high pollutant concentration
Paint Standard: GS 50.3 – GS 125.3: Two-component iron-mica combination
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3: Primer coating
Option: GS 160.3 – GS 250.3: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: Grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 40 °C to + 60 °C (low temperature), version L
– 60 °C to + 60 °C (extreme low temperature), version EL
– 0 °C to + 120 °C (high temperature), version H
Lifetime Open-close duty: The lifetime is based on a load profile typical for part-turn valves
Type Operating cycles (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN)
for swivel movements of 90° (max. 100°)
and a maximum output torque of
100 % 140 % 175 %6) 200 %6)
GS 50.3 15 000 5 000 – 1 000
GS 63.3 15 000 5 000 – 1 000
GS 80.3 15 000 5 000 – 1 000
GS 100.3 15 000 5 000 – 1 000
GS 125.3 15 000 5 000 – 1 000
GS 160.3 15 000 5 000 1 000 –
GS 200.3 15 000 5 000 1 000 –
GS 250.3 10 000 3 000 750 –
Modulating duty: min. 2.5 million operations7)
4) Refer to clause enclosure protection IP 68

5) Not available for GS 50.3
6) With worm wheel made of spheroidal cast iron
7) The lifetime for modulating duty depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the modulating accuracy. To reach
the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operation time, the number of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process
5
Accessories
Valve position indicators Valve position indicator WSG for the signalisation of intermediate and end positions for
precise and low-backlash feedback for swing angles ranging from 82° – 98°
(refer to separate data sheet)
Valve position indicator WGD for signalisation of intermediate and end positions for swing
angles > 180° (refer to separate data sheet)
Limit switching Limit switching WSH for manually operated valves. For the signalisation of intermediate and
end positions (refer to separate data sheet)
Special features for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Explosion protection II2G c IIC T4 according to ATEX 94/9/EC
Type of duty Short-time duty S2 - 15 min., max. 3 cycles (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN) 90°, then cool-down
to ambient temperature
Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % up to the maximum modulating torque
Swing angle Swing angle > 90° on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 20 °C to + 40 °C
Options: – 40 °C to + 40 °C (low temperature)
– 20 °C to + 60 °C
– 40 °C to + 60 °C (low temperature)
– 50 °C to + 60 °C (extreme low temperature)
– 60 °C to + 60 °C (extreme low temperature)
Combinations with actuators SA(R)ExC at ambient temperatures > 40 °C with special sizing
Further information
Reference documents Product description Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3 / GS 315 – GS 500
Dimension sheets GS 50.3 – GS 125.3, GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Technical data GS 50.3 – GS 125.3, GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Technical data SA, SAR, WSG, WGD, WSH
Lever gearboxes See separate documents
6
3. Transport, storage and packaging
3.1 Transport .. Transport to place of installation in sturdy packing.

If mounted together with actuator:
Attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting by hoist only to the
gearbox and not to the actuator.
3.2 Storage .. Store in well-ventilated, dry room.
..
Protect against floor dampness by storage on a shelf or on a
wooden pallet.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bare surfaces.
In case worm gearboxes are to be stored for a long period
.
(more than 6 months), the following points must be observed additionally:
.
Prior to storage: Protect bare surfaces, in particular the output drive parts
and mounting surface, with long-term corrosion protection agent.
Check for corrosion approximately every 6 months. If first signs of corro-
sion show, apply new corrosion protection.
3.3 Packaging Our products are protected by special packaging for the transport ex works.
The packaging consists of environmentally friendly materials which can
easily be separated and recycled.
For the disposal of the packaging material, we recommend recycling and
collection centres.
We use the following packaging materials:
Wooden material boards (OSB)/ cardboard/ paper/ PE film
4. Fitting the handwheel For worm gearboxes designed for manual operation the handwheel is
supplied separately. Fitting is done on site according to figure 1.
Figure 1: Handwheel
Ball handle
Spacer (option)
(may be required)
Spacer
Circlip (may be required)
Circlip
Worm shaft gearbox Handwheel
7
5. Mounting positions of the different versions
RR LL RL LR
Description of the 4 versions (viewed at the pointer cover):
Code Direction of rotation at input shaft Position of worm shaft Direction of rotation at output drive
RR clockwise Right side clockwise
LL clockwise Left side counterclockwise
RL clockwise Right side counterclockwise
LR clockwise Left side clockwise
Mounting positions of AUMA multi-turn actuator with AUMA worm gearbox (please indicate when ordering)
GS versions RR / RL
RR RR RR RR
RL RL RL RL
A B C D
GS versions LL / LR
LL LL LL LL
LR LR LR LR
A B C D
Mounting positions can easily be changed at a later date.
Limitation: For SA/ SAR 14.1/ 14.5 with GS 125.3, mounting position “C” in version RR/ RL and “A” in version LL/ LR
is only possible for a handwheel diameter up to 315 mm.
Up to size GS 125.3, the actuator-gearbox combination is delivered in the ordered mounting position. For packing
reasons, actuator and gearbox will be delivered separately from size GS 160.3.
8
6. Mounting multi-turn actuators SA/SAR

When gearboxes and multi-turn actuators are supplied together, the
mounting has been done in the factory up to gearbox size GS 125.3. For
sizes GS 160.3 and larger, the mounting of gearboxes is performed as
follows.
.
In case flange for actuator is not attached to gearbox or
reduction gearing:
..
Thoroughly degrease the mounting faces of the gearbox or reduction
gearing as well as the flange for actuator.
Fit flange for actuator and fasten with bolts and lock washers.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Figure 2: Mounting multi-turn actuator to worm gearbox
Flange for actuator
Bearing flange
Flange for actuator
Primary reduction
gearing
Bearing flange
.
Mounting the multi-turn actuator:
.
Thoroughly degrease the faces of the flange for actuator at the gearbox or
reduction gearing as well as the actuator’s bearing flange.
Place the multi-turn actuator on the worm gearbox or reduction gearing.
.
The multi-turn actuator can be mounted on the valve at every 90°
(see page 8, mounting positions).
.
Ensure that the spigot mates uniformly in the recess and that the
mounting faces are in complete contact.
.
Fasten actuator with bolts and lock washers (see table 1) at the flange of
the worm gearbox.
Do not attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting the

actuator by hoist to the handwheel. If multi-turn actuator is
mounted on gearbox, attach ropes or hooks for the purpose
of lifting by hoist to gearbox and not to multi-turn actuator.
9
Table 1: Bolts for mounting AUMA actuators to worm gearboxes/ primary reduction gearing
(strength class min. 8.8)
Worm gearbox/ SA(R) 07.1-F07 SA(R) 07.1-F10/G0 SA(R) 07.5-F07 SA(R) 07.5-F10/G0
primary Lock
reduction gearing Lock Lock Lock
Bolt Pcs. Bolt Pcs. Bolt washe Pcs. Bolt Pcs.
washer washer washer
r
GS 50.3 M 8 x 20 B8 4 M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 63.3 M 8 x 20 B8 4 M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 8 x 20 B8 4 M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 80.3 M 8 x 20 B8 4 M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 100.3
GS 100.3/VZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 125.3
GS 125.3/VZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 160.3
GS 160.3/GZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 200.3
GS 200.3/GZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4
Worm gearbox/ SA(R) 10.1-F10/G0 SA(R) 14.1-F14/G½ SA(R) 14.5-F14/G½ SA(R) 16.1-F16/G3
primary Lock Lock Lock Lock
reduction gearing Bolt Pcs. Bolt Pcs. Bolt Pcs. Bolt Pcs.
washer washer washer washer
GS 63.3 M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 80.3 M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 100.3 M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GS 100.3/VZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4
GS 125.3 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GS 125.3/VZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GS 160.3 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 20 x 50 B 20 4
GS 160.3/GZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GS 200.3 M 20 x 50 B 20 4
GS 200.3/GZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GS 250.3
GS 250.3/GZ M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 20 x 50 B 20 4
Worm gearbox/ SA(R) 25.1-F25 SA(R) 30.1-F30

primary Lock Lock
reduction gearing Bolt Pcs. Bolt Pcs.
washer washer
GS 160.3
GS 160.3/GZ
GS 200.3 M 16 x 50 B 16 8
GS 200.3/GZ
GS 250.3 M 16 x 50 B 16 8 M 20 x 50 B 20 8
GS 250.3/GZ
10
7. Mounting to valve AUMA worm gearboxes GS and primary reduction gearings VZ/ GZ can be
.
operated in any mounting position.
For butterfly valves, the recommended mounting position is end position
CLOSED
.
(Prior to mounting, bring the gearbox to the mechanical end stop
CLOSED by turning the handwheel clockwise).
For ball valves, the recommended mounting position is end position
OPEN
(Prior to mounting, bring the gearbox to the mechanical end stop OPEN
..
by turning the handwheel counterclockwise).
Thoroughly degrease mounting faces of gearbox and valve.
..
Place coupling sleeve onto valve shaft and secure (refer to figure 3, detail A
or B), ensure that dimensions X, Y, and Z are observed (refer to table 2).
Apply non-acidic grease at splines of coupling.
..
Mount gearbox on valve. Ensure that the spigot (if provided) mates
uniformly in the recess and that the mounting faces are in complete contact.
Fasten gearbox with bolts (quality min. 8.8) and lock washers.
Figure 3
A B
Coupling
Grub screw
Z
X Y
Valve
Table 2: Fastening torques for bolts with different strength classes

Gearbox Dimensions Bolts Strength class Strength class Strength class
8.8 A2-70/A4-70 A2-80/A4-80
Flange type X max Y max Z max Qty. x threads Fastening torque TA [Nm]
GS 50.3-F05 6 5 65 4xM 6 11 8 10
GS 50.3-F07 14 5 61 4xM 8 25 18 24
GS 50.3-F10 14 5 61 4 x M 10 51 36 48
GS 63.3-F10 7 18 73 4 x M 10 51 36 48
GS 63.3-F12 10 13 76 4 x M 12 87 61 82
GS 80.3-F12 13 18 78 4 x M 12 87 61 82
GS 80.3-F14 23 5 88 4 x M 16 214 150 200
GS 100.3-F14 22 13 123 4 x M 16 214 150 200
GS 100.3-F16 22 8 123 4 x M 20 431 294 392
GS 125.3-F16 17 35 126 4 x M 20 431 294 392
GS 125.3-F25 17 27 126 8 x M 16 214 150 200
GS 160.3-F25 15 11 130 8 x M 16 214 150 200
GS 160.3-F30 30 0 140 8 x M 20 431 294 392
GS 200.3-F30 19 19 160 8 x M 20 431 294 392
GS 200.3-F35 44 0 190 8 x M 30 (1489) 564 –
GS 250.3-F35 8 8 220 8 x M 30 (1489) 564 –
GS 250.3-F40 13 0 230 8 x M 36 (2594) – –
Note:
Experience showed that it is very difficult to fasten bolts or nuts of M30 or
larger with the defined torques. The worm gearbox may be moved radially
against the valve flange by accident.
To improve adhesion between valve and gearbox, we recommend to apply
Loctite 243 (or similar products) on mounting faces.
11
8. Setting the end stops for manual operation

If worm gearboxes GS are supplied on a valve the end stops
are already set.
..
8.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves
Setting end position CLOSED Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (figures 4, 5).
. Turn valve manually to end position CLOSED.
.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it clockwise up to
the stop.
If the holes of limit stop housing (10) do not align with the threads of the
..
housing (1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace it in the
required position.
Fasten bolts (03) with lock washers (04).
Fasten bolts (see table 3) crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Table 3:
Gearbox End stops fastened Material Protective cap fas- Material
with tened with
bolts (03) bolts (054)
GS 50.3 M8 A2-80
GS 63.3 M8 A2-80
GS 80.3 M8 A2-80
GS 100.3 M12 A2-80
GS 125.3 M12 A2-80
GS 160.3 M10 A2-80 M6 A2-80
GS 200.3 M12 A2-80 M6 A2-80
GS 250.3 M16 A2-80 M6 A2-80
Figure 4: End stop up to GS 125.3 Figure 5: End stop from GS 160.3
03/04
03/04
.
10 1 10 1
If the position of the pointer cover does not correspond to the symbol
CLOSED, slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer
cover to the CLOSED symbol and fasten the screws again.
Setting end position OPEN The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set
in the factory.
If the swing angle does not match, refer to clause 10.
12
8.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves
In case end stops require adjustment, set end position

OPEN first. If the exact end position of the valve cannot be
seen through a position marking at the valve shaft, the
Setting end position OPEN .. setting may have to be done with the valve removed.
Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (10) (figures 4, 5).
.
Turn valve manually to end position OPEN.
.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it counterclockwise
up to the stop.
..
required position.
.
Fasten bolts (refer to table 3) crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
OPEN, slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer
cover to the OPEN symbol and fasten the screws again.
Setting end position CLOSED The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set
in the factory.
9. Setting the end stops with mounted multi-turn actuator

. If worm gearboxes GS and multi-turn actuators are sup-
plied on a valve, the end stops as well as limit and torque
. switching are already set.

If the limit and torque switching have not yet been set, they
have to be set according to the operation instructions SA/
. SAR and the specifications of the valve manufacturer.

The valve manufacturer states whether the valve should
be limit or torque seated.
9.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves
.
..
Determine the overrun of the multi-turn actuator for both directions, i. e. how
much does the valve move after the motor has been switched off?
Setting end position CLOSED Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (figures 4, 5).
.
Change actuator to manual drive and move the valve manually to end
position CLOSED.
.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it clockwise up to
the stop.
Turn limit stop housing (10) back counterclockwise by ½ turn. This
ensures that the mechanical end stop is not reached in electric operation
.
and thus the valve can close tightly, provided that torque seating has been
specified.
If the fixing holes of limit stop housing (10) do not align with the threads of
..
the housing (1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace it in
required position.
.
CLOSED, slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer
cover to the CLOSED symbol and fasten the screws again.
13
.
Limit seating in end position CLOSED
..
Turn back the valve from the end position by an amount equal to the
overrun.
Set limit switching according to the operation instructions SA/ SAR.
Check torque switching for end position CLOSED according to the opera-
tion instructions SA/ SAR, and, if necessary, set to the required value.
..
Torque seating in end position CLOSED
Turn handwheel counterclockwise by approx. 4 – 6 turns.
.
Set limit switching for the end position CLOSED according to the operation
instructions SA/ SAR (for signalisation).
Check torque switching for end position CLOSED or set to the required
value.
Setting end position OPEN The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set
.
in the factory.
Move gearbox to the end stop in position OPEN.
The last part of the travel has to be made manually.
. To turn the valve back manually from the end position by an amount equal
to the overrun, proceed as follows:
For actuators mounted directly:
by approx. 4 to 6 turns at the handwheel.
With mounted primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ:
by approx. 10 to 15 turns at the handwheel, according to the reduction
. ratio of the primary reduction gearing.

Set limit switching in actuator for the end position OPEN according to the
operation instructions SA/ SAR.
03/04
03/04
10 1 10 1
9.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves In case end stops need to be adjusted, set end position
OPEN first. If the exact end position of the valve cannot be
seen through a position marking at the valve shaft, the
setting may have to be done with the valve removed.
. Determine overrun of the actuator for both directions, i. e. how much does the
valve move after the motor has been switched off?
14
Setting end position OPEN .. Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (10) (figures 6, 7).
.
Change to manual drive and move the valve manually to end position
OPEN.
.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it counterclockwise
up to the stop.
.
Turn limit stop housing (10) back by ½ turn clockwise. This ensures that
the mechanical end stop is not reached in electric operation.
..
required position.
.
OPEN, slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer
.
cover to the OPEN symbol and fasten the screws again.
Switching off in end position Turn back the valve from the end position by an amount equal to the
OPEN
. overrun.
Set limit switching according to the operation instructions SA/ SAR.
Setting end position CLOSED The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set
.
in the factory.
Move gearbox to the end stop in position CLOSED.
The last part of the travel has to be made manually.
. To turn the valve back manually from the end position by an amount equal
to the overrun, proceed as follows:
For actuators mounted directly:
by approx. 4 to 6 turns at the handwheel.
With mounted primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ:
by approx. 10 to 15 turns at the handwheel, according to the reduction
. ratio of the primary reduction gearing.

Set limit switching in actuator for the end position CLOSED according to
the operation instructions SA/ SAR.
15
10. Changing the swing angle The adjustment is made in end position OPEN.
Optional for size GS 50.3 – GS 125.3
Standard for size GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Accuracy:
GS 50.3 – GS 125.3: 0.6°
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3: 0.11° to 0.14°
..
10.1 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 (option)
Unscrew protective cap (16) at limit stop housing (10) (figure 8).
Remove roll pin (020) with appropriate tool (available from AUMA).
.
Increasing the swing angle
Turn end stop nut (15) back counterclockwise.
When turning back the end stop nut (015), make sure the roll
pin (020) can still be tapped in within the oblong hole.
.. Move valve into the desired end position.

Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
..
Reducing the swing angle
Move valve into the desired end position.
The end stop nut (15) must entirely cover the roll pin (020).
082/083 03/04
058
16 34 15 054 056 10 7
16 020 15 08 10 7 055
. Tap in roll pin (020) with tool. If slot in end stop nut (15) does not align with
..
the hole in the worm shaft, turn end stop nut (15) slightly counterclockwise
until it is in alignment, then tap in roll pin.
.
Check O-ring (08) and replace, if damaged.
Replace protective cap (16).
If gearbox is mounted to a multi-turn actuator, set limit switching again for
the end position OPEN according to the operation instructions SA/ SAR.
Allow for overrun.
16
.
10.2 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
.
Remove all bolts (054) and pull off protective cap (16)
(figure 9).
Remove screw (082) with washer (058) and setting ring (34).
..
Increasing the swing angle
.
Turn end stop nut (15) back counterclockwise.
..
Reducing the swing angle
..
..
Place setting ring (34), secure with washer (058) and screw (082).
Check O-ring (056) and replace, if damaged.
.
Place protective cap (16), fasten bolts (054) with lock washers (055).
Fasten bolts (see table 3) crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
If gearbox is mounted to a multi-turn actuator, set limit switching again for
the end position OPEN according to the operation instructions SA/ SAR.
Allow for overrun.
17
11. Enclosure protection IP 68

Definition According to EN 60 529, the conditions for meeting the requirements of
enclosure protection IP 68 (requirements exceed those of IP 67) are to be
agreed between manufacturer and user. AUMA worm gearboxes and
primary reduction gearings in enclosure protection IP 68 meet the following
..
requirements according to AUMA:
..
IP 68-3, submersible in water up to 3 m head of water
For size GS 50.3, only enclosure protection IP 68-3 is available.
If submersed in other media, additional measures for corrosion protection

may be necessary; please consult AUMA. Submersion in aggressive media,
e.g. acids or alkaline solutions, is not permitted.
Review Gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68-3 were type tested in the factory.
Gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68-6, IP 68-10 and IP 68-20 undergo
a routine testing for tightness in the factory.
.
.
Note: The enclosure protection IP 68 refers to the interior of the gearboxes, but
not to the coupling compartment.
.
If the gearboxes are likely to be repeatedly submersed, a higher corrosion
protection KS or KX is required.
.
For gearboxes intended for buried service we strongly recommend to use
the higher corrosion protection KS or KX.
For horizontal outdoor installation of the gearboxes, a sealed pointer cover
should be used.
.
For gas applications with sealed pointer cover, an air vent in the pointer
cover or venting grooves in the valve mounting flange must be provided.
In case of permanent submersion of the gearboxes or for buried service, a
protection cover must be fitted instead of a pointer cover. This will be taken
..
into account in the factory if indicated on the purchase order. Subsequent
exchange of the pointer cover for the protection cover is possible.
Use suitable sealing material between valve flange and gearbox.
Water can enter into the coupling compartment along the valve shaft. This
would lead to corrosion of hub and coupling. Therefore a suitable
.
anticorrosive (or sticky grease) must be applied to the hub and coupling of
the gearbox before mounting.
With corrosion protection KX, the hub and coupling are provided with a
high quality corrosion protection as standard.
18
12. Maintenance
12.1 General notes After commissioning, check worm gearbox for damage to paint finish.
Do a thorough touch-up to prevent corrosion.
Original paint in small quantities can be supplied by AUMA.
AUMA worm gearboxes require only very little maintenance.

To ensure that the worm gearbox is always ready to operate, we recom-
mend for gearboxes operated less than 10 times per year, the following
.
measures:
Approximately six months after commissioning and every year after, check
..
bolts between multi-turn actuator, worm gearbox, and valve for tightness.
If required, tighten applying the torques given in table 2 (page 11).
Perform a test run every six months.
.
Perform a visual inspection for grease leakage on each gearbox every
2 years.
.
Carry out a detailed functional test for each gearbox every 5 years.
Record the results for future reference.
For gearboxes permanently exposed to ambient temperatures above
40 °C, maintenance must be performed at shorter intervals.
Seals:
Seals made of elastomeric materials are subject to ageing. The theoretical
usable lifetime of the seals made of NBR is 13.5 years from the date of
manufacture. These figures are based on an average ambient temperature
of 40 °C. Seal kits may be obtained from AUMA.
Grease:
..
A grease and seal change is recommended after the following operation
time:
.
if operated seldom after 10 – 12 years
if operated frequently, after 6 – 8 years
..
in modulating duty after 4 – 6 years
Only original AUMA grease must be used.
. For the grease type, refer to the name plate.

Lubricants should not be mixed.
Table 4: Grease quantities for worm gearboxes and primary reduction gearings
GS 50.3 63.3 80.3 100.3 125.3 160.3 200.3 250.3
Qty dm³ 0.1 0.3 0.4 1.0 1.3 3.3 6.6 12.2
Weight1) kg 0.09 0.27 0.36 0.9 1.17 3.0 6.0 11.0
Primary VZ GZ
reduction 2.3 3.3 4.3 160.3 200.3 250.3
gearing
4:1/8:1 16:1 4:1/8:1 16:1
Quantity dm² 0.35 0.35 0.35 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.2 2.8
Weight1) kg 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.9 1.4 1.8 2.0 2.25
1) for ρ = approx. 0.9 kg / dm3
The removed lubricant and the cleaning agent used must be

disposed of according to the relevant regulations.
19
..
12.2 Grease change for worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and primary reduction gearing VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3
For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator: Remove multi-turn actuator.

Remove gearbox from the valve:
During this time, the valve/ pipeline must not be under pres-
sure!
12.2.1 Worm gearboxes Refer to spare parts list GS 50.3 – GS 125.3, page 24.
.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 19, table 4.
.
Mark position of the gearbox on the valve, loosen connecting bolts to the
valve and remove the worm gearbox.
.
Remove fastening bolts with lock washers from the housing cover (518.0)
and take off housing cover.
Remove bolts with lock washers from the bearing cover (522.0). Lift worm
.
wheel carefully from the housing. For this, the worm shaft must be pulled
from the bearings and tilted slightly in the worm channel.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
.
and clean gear housing. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning
agent may be used.
.
Clean mounting faces at housing and housing cover (518.0). Replace
O-rings at the worm wheel (010, 011) by new ones.
..
Re-insert worm wheel carefully and bring worm shaft into correct position,
fasten bearing cover (522.0) at housing with bolts and lock washers.
Fill with new grease.
Place housing cover (518.0) on housing, while ensuring the proper posi-
tion of the O-rings (010, 011) at the worm wheel. Place bolts with lock
washers and fasten them evenly crosswise.
– Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at mounting flange.
– Apply non-acidic grease at splines of coupling
– Mount worm gearbox to valve, ensure correct position,
observe mark
.
– Fasten with bolts of minimum quality 8.8 using lock washers, fasten bolts
crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
.
Gearbox without primary reduction gearing: Continue with clause “After
maintenance”.
Gearbox with reduction gearings VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3: Perform grease change
at the reduction gearing according to the following subclause.
12.2.2 Primary reduction gearing Refer to spare parts list VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3., page 24.
.
.
Remove bolts with lock washers from housing cover (020.0) and pull off
housing cover (020.0) with the complete input drive shaft (021.0).
.
Take off plate with internal teeth (045.0) and planet carrier (022.0) with the
planet wheels.
.
and clean them. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning agent
may be used.
..
Clean mounting faces at housing (019.0), housing cover (020.0) and plate
with internal teeth (045.0). Replace O-rings by new ones.
.
Insert planet carrier (022.0) with planet wheels.
Place plate with internal teeth (045.0) and insert the input drive shaft
.
(021.0) completely. Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them
evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
Continue with clause “After maintenance”, page 22.
20
..
VZ 160.3 – VZ 250.3
For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator: Remove multi-turn actuator.

Remove gearbox from the valve:
During this time, the valve/ pipeline must not be under pres-
sure!
12.3.1 Worm gearboxes Refer to spare parts list GS 160.3 – GS 250.3, page 26.
.
Tools: Lock nut tool, can be obtained from AUMA.
.
Mark position of the gearbox on the valve, loosen connecting bolts to the
valve and remove the worm gearbox.
.
Remove bolts with lock washers from the housing cover (518.0) and take
off housing cover.
Remove bolts with lock washers from the bearing cover (522.0). Take off
bearing lock nut (537.0) by loosening the grub screw. Remove protective
cap (536.0), pull off snap ring from end nut (526.0). Remove end stop
(523.0). Lift worm wheel carefully from the housing. For this, the worm
shaft must be pulled from the bearings and tilted slightly in the worm
.
channel.
Pull out worm shaft from housing in direction of the housing input.
.
and clean gear-housing. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning
agent may be used.
.
Clean mounting faces at housing and housing cover (518.0). Replace
O-rings at the worm wheel (010, 011) by new ones.
Re-insert worm wheel carefully and bring worm shaft into correct position.
..
Screw in bearing lock nut (537.0) and secure with grub screw. Fasten
bearing cover (522.0) at the housing with bolts and lock nuts.
Place housing cover (518.0) on housing, while ensuring the proper posi-
tion of the O-rings (010, 011) at the worm wheel. Place bolts with lock
washers and fasten them evenly crosswise.
– Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at mounting flange and valve.
– Apply non-acidic grease at splines of coupling.
– Mount worm gearbox to valve, ensure correct position, observe mark.
.
– Fasten with bolts of minimum quality 8.8 using lock washers, fasten
bolts crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
.
Gearbox without primary reduction gearing: Continue with clause “After
maintenance”.
Gearbox with reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3: Perform grease
change at the reduction gearing according to the following clauses.
12.3.2 Single-stage reductions gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1 and 8:1)
Refer to spare parts list GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3, page 28.
.
Remove bolts with lock washers at housing cover (002.0) and pull off
.
housing cover (002.0) with the input drive shaft (003.0) and the plate with
internal teeth).
.
Remove screws from the plate with internal teeth and separate the plate
with internal teeth from the input drive shaft.
..
and clean them.
For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning agent may be used.
.
Clean mounting faces at housing (001.0), housing cover (002.0) and plate
with internal teeth. Replace O-rings by new ones.
Fill housing cover (002) with new grease.
21
.. Fix plate with internal teeth (006.0) with screws at housing cover.
Fill housing (001.0) with remaining grease and fit the complete housing
cover with input drive shaft (003.0). Screw in bolts with lock washers and
.
fasten them evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table
2, page 11.
Continue with clause “After maintenance”, page 22.
12.3.3 Double-stage primary reduction gearing GZ 200.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratio 16:1)
Refer to spare parts list GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3, page 28.
.
.
Remove bolts with lock washers from housing cover (002.0) and pull off
housing cover with the complete input drive shaft (003.0).
.
Take off screws with lock washers from housing frame (010.0) and remove
housing frame with planet carrier and hollow wheel.
.
Remove screws from the plate with internal teeth and separate the plate
with internal teeth from the input drive shaft (003.0).
.
Remove screws (021) from the second stage of the plate with internal
teeth and separate it from the pinion (011.1).
.
and clean them. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning agent
may be used.
..
Clean mounting faces at housing (001.0), housing frame, housing cover
(002.0) and hollow wheels. Replace O-rings by new ones.
.
Fill housing (001.0) with new grease.
Fix second stage of the plate with internal teeth on housing frame (010.0).
Replace complete housing frame. Screw in bolts with lock washers and
.
fasten them evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table
2, page 11.
..
Fill housing frame (010.0) and housing cover (002.0) with the remaining
grease.
Fix first stage of the plate with internal teeth on the housing cover (002.0).
Place complete housing cover with input drive shaft onto housing frame.
Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them evenly crosswise to the
appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
..
.
12.4 After maintenance If applicable, mount multi-turn actuator.
Reset the end stops.
For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator, check the setting of the limit
..
switching according to the operation instructions for multi-turn actuators; if
required, reset.
Perform test run to ensure the proper function.
Check worm gearbox for damage to paint finish. Do a thorough touch-up
to prevent corrosion. Original paint in small quantities can be supplied by
AUMA.
22
13. Disposal and recycling

AUMA gearboxes have an extremely long lifetime. However, they have to be
replaced at one point in time.
Our gearboxes have a modular design and may therefore easily be disas-
..
sembled, separated and sorted according to materials, i.e.:
.
various metals
plastics
greases and oils
.
The following generally applies:
.
Collect greases and oils during disassembly. As a rule, these substances
are hazardous to water and must not be released into the environment.
.
See disassembled material to a sound disposal or to separate recycling
according to materials.
Observe the national regulations for waste disposal.
14. Service AUMA offers extensive services such as maintenance and inspection for
gearboxes. Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives can be found on
page 32 and on the Internet (www.auma.com).
23
24
524.0
527.0 S1(011)
S1(073) 522.0
S1(009)
S1(017)
VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3
518.0 S1(012)
521.1
526.0
512.0
Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
S1(009) S1(017)
520.0
512.0
522.0
517.0 S1(009)
S1(010) S1(017)
523.0 520.0
519.1 512.0
S1(009)
S1(010)
534.0
520.0 021.0
525.0
S1(034)
045.0
022.0
019.0
020.0
S1(076)
15. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and reduction gearing
S1(033)
S1(033)
S1(009)
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original
AUMA spare parts should be used. Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation
in these instructions.
No. Designation Type

019.0 Housing VZ Sub-assembly
020.0 Housing cover VZ Sub-assembly
021.0 Input drive shaft VZ Sub-assembly
022.0 Planet carrier VZ Sub-assembly
045.0 Plate with internal teeth VZ Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
517.0 Housing Sub-assembly
518.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
519.1 Worm wheel Component
520.0 Worm shaft Sub-assembly
521.1 Travelling nut Component
522.0 Bearing cover Sub-assembly
523.0 Limit stop housing Sub-assembly
524.0 Pointer cover Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
526.0 End stop nut Sub-assembly
527.0 Protection cover Sub-assembly
534.0 Input shaft Sub-assembly
536.0 Cap Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit
25
26
524.0
527.0
S1(011)
S1(073)
Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
518.0 520.0
S1(012)
537.0
S1(009)
513.1 521.1
S1(056)
526.0
522.0
517.0
16. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
538.1
S1(009)
S1(010)
523.0
536.0
519.1
512.0
S1(017)
S1(010)
538.0
525.0
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original
AUMA spare parts should be used.
Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No. Designation Type

513.0 Grub screw Component
519.1 Worm wheel Component
520.0 Worm shaft Sub-assembly
521.1 Travelling nut Component
522.0 Bearing cover Sub-assembly
523.0 Limit stop housing Sub-assembly
524.0 Pointer cover Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
526.0 End stop nut Sub-assembly
527.0 Protection cover Sub-assembly
536.0 Cap Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit
27
17. Spare parts list reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1, 8:1 and 16:1)
S1(003)
006.0
S1(003)
GZ 160.1 – GZ 250.1
4:1 / 8:1
S1(004)
S1(009)
001.0
003.0
003.3
512.0
S1(014)
002.0
006.0 S1(003)
GZ 200.1 – GZ 250.1
S1(003)
16:1
003.0
S1(004)
S1(009)
S1(029)
001.0 003.3
S1(029)
S1(014)
512.0
002.0
011.1
013.0
010.0
28
Note:
Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA
spare parts should be used. Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No. Designation
003.3 Input drive shaft Sub-assembly
006.0 Planetary gear Sub-assembly
010.0 Housing frame Sub-assembly
011.1 Pinion Sub-assembly
013.0 Planetary gear 1st stage Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
29
18. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation
30
Index
B L S
Bolts for mounting actuators 10 Lubricant 20 Safety instructions 3
Service 23
C M
Setting the end stop
Changing the swing angle 16 Maintenance 3,19
with mounted
Corrosion protection 7 Manual operation 12
multi-turn actuator 13
Motor operation 13
D Setting the end stops
Mounting positions 8
Declaration of Conformity 30 for manual operation 12
Mounting the multi-turn actuators 9
Declaration of Incorporation 30 Spare parts list
Mounting to valve 11
Disposal and recycling 23 GS 160.3 - GS 250.3 26
P GS 50.3 - GS 125.3 24
E
Packaging 7 GZ 160.3 - GZ 250.3
Enclosure protection IP 68 18 (4:1/8:1/16:1) 28
R
F Storage 7
Range of application 3
Fitting the handwheel 7 T
H Technical data 4
Handwheel 7 Transport 7
Information also available Inspection records and further gearbox information can be downloaded
on the Internet: directly from the Internet by entering the order no. or comm. no.
(refer to name plate).
Visit us at: http://www.auma.com
31
IBEROPLAN S.A.
Europe ES-28027 Madrid
Suplibarca
VE- Maracaibo Estado, Zulia
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG Tel +34 91 3717130 Tel +58 261 7 555 667
Factory Müllheim iberoplan@iberoplan.com suplibarca@intercable.net.ve
DE-79373 Müllheim D. G. Bellos & Co. O.E.
Tel +49 7631 809 - 0 GR-13671 Acharnai Athens Asia
riester@auma.com Tel +30 210 2409485 AUMA Actuators (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.
www.auma.com info@dgbellos.gr CN-300457 Tianjin Teda District
Factory Ostfildern-Nellingen SIGURD SØRUM A. S. Tel +86 22 6625 1310
DE-73747 Ostfildern NO-1301 Sandvika mailbox@auma-china.com
Tel +49 711 34803 - 3000 Tel +47 67572600 www.auma-china.com
riester@wof.auma.com post@sigurd-sorum.no AUMA (INDIA) PRIVATE LIMITED
Service Centre Cologne INDUSTRA IN-560 058 Bangalore
DE-50858 Köln PT-2710-297 Sintra Tel +91 80 2839 4655
Tel +49 2234 20379 - 00 Tel +351 2 1910 95 00 info@auma.co.in
Service@sck.auma.com jpalhares@tyco-valves.com www.auma.co.in
Service Centre Magdeburg MEGA Endüstri Kontrol Sistemieri Tic. Ltd. Sti. AUMA JAPAN Co., Ltd.
DE-39167 Niederndodeleben TR-06460 Övecler Ankara JP-210-0848 Kawasaki-ku, Kawasaki-shi
Tel +49 39204 759 - 0 Tel +90 312 472 62 70 Kanagawa
Service@scm.auma.com megaendustri@megaendustri.com.tr Tel +81 44 329 1061
AUMA Armaturenantriebe GmbH CTS Control Limited Liability Company mailbox@auma.co.jp
AT-2512 Tribuswinkel UA-02099 Kiyiv AUMA ACTUATORS (Singapore) Pte Ltd.
Tel +43 2252 82540 Tel +38 044 566-9971, -8427 SG-569551 Singapore
office@auma.at v_polyakov@cts.com.ua Tel +65 6 4818750
www.auma.at sales@auma.com.sg
AUMA (Schweiz) AG Africa www.auma.com.sg
CH-8965 Berikon AUMA South Africa (Pty) Ltd. AUMA Middle East Rep. Office
Tel +41 566 400945 ZA-1560 Springs AE- Dubai
RettichP.ch@auma.com Tel +27 11 3632880 Tel +971 4 3682720
AUMA Servopohony spol. s.r.o. aumasa@mweb.co.za auma@emirates.net.ae
CZ-10200 Praha 10 A.T.E.C. PERFECT CONTROLS Ltd.
Tel +420 272 700056 EG- Cairo HK- Tsuen Wan, Kowloon
auma-s@auma.cz Tel +20 2 3599680 - 3590861 Tel +852 2493 7726
www.auma.cz atec@intouch.com joeip@perfectcontrols.com.hk
OY AUMATOR AB DW Controls Co., Ltd.
FI-02270 Espoo America KR-153-803 Seoul Korea
Tel +35 895 84022 AUMA ACTUATORS INC. Tel +82 2 2113 1100
auma@aumator.fi US-PA 15317 Canonsburg sichoi@actuatorbank.com
AUMA France Tel +1 724-743-AUMA (2862) www.actuatorbank.com
FR-95157 Taverny Cédex mailbox@auma-usa.com AL-ARFAJ Eng. Company W. L. L.
Tel +33 1 39327272 www.auma-usa.com KW-22004 Salmiyah
stephanie.vatin@auma.fr AUMA Chile Respresentative Office Tel +965 4817448
www.auma.fr CL- Buin arfaj@qualitynet.net
AUMA ACTUATORS Ltd. Tel +56 2 821 4108 BEHZAD Trading Enterprises
GB- Clevedon North Somerset BS21 6QH aumachile@adsl.tie.cl QA- Doha
Tel +44 1275 871141 LOOP S. A. Tel +974 4433 236
mail@auma.co.uk AR-C1140ABP Buenos Aires behzad@qatar.net.qa
www.auma.co.uk Tel +54 11 4307 2141 Sunny Valves and Intertrade Corp. Ltd.
AUMA ITALIANA S.R.L. contacto@loopsa.com.ar TH-10120 Yannawa Bangkok
IT-20023 Cerro Maggiore Milano Asvotec Termoindustrial Ltda. Tel +66 2 2400656
Tel +39 0331-51351 BR-13190-000 Monte Mor/ SP. sunnyvalves@inet.co.th
info@auma.it Tel +55 19 3879 8735 www.sunnyvalves.co.th/
www.auma.it atuador.auma@asvotec.com.br Top Advance Enterprises Ltd.
AUMA BENELUX B.V. TROY-ONTOR Inc. TW- Jhonghe City Taipei Hsien (235)
NL-2314 XT Leiden CA-L4N 5E9 Barrie Ontario Tel +886 2 2225 1718
Tel +31 71 581 40 40 Tel +1 705 721-8246 support@auma-taiwan.com.tw
office@benelux.auma.com troy-ontor@troy-ontor.ca www.auma-taiwan.com.tw
www.auma.nl
MAN Ferrostaal de Colombia Ltda.
AUMA Polska Sp. z o.o. CO- Bogotá D.C.
Australia
PL-41-310 Dabrowa Górnicza Tel +57 1 401 1300 BARRON GJM Pty. Ltd.
Tel +48 32 26156 68 dorian.hernandez@manferrostaal.com AU-NSW 1570 Artarmon
R.Ludzien@auma.com.pl www.manferrostaal.com Tel +61 294361088
www.auma.com.pl info@barron.com.au
PROCONTIC Procesos y Control Automático
OOO Priwody AUMA EC- Quito www.barron.com.au
RU-141400 Moscow region for mail: Tel +593 2 292 0431
124365 Moscow a/ya 11 info@procontic.com.ec
Tel +7 495 221 64 28
aumarussia@auma.ru IESS DE MEXICO S. A. de C. V.
www.auma.ru MX-C.P. 02900 Mexico D.F.
Tel +52 55 55 561 701
ERICHS ARMATUR AB informes@iess.com.mx
SE-20039 Malmö
Tel +46 40 311550 Corsusa S.A.C.
info@erichsarmatur.se PE- Miralflores - Lima
Tel 00511444-1200 / 0044 / 2321
www.erichsarmatur.se
corsusa@corsusa.com
GRØNBECH & SØNNER A/S www.corsusa.com
DK-2450 København SV
Tel +45 33 26 63 00 PASSCO Inc.
GS@g-s.dk PR-00936-4153 San Juan
Tel +18 09 78 77 20 87 85
www.g-s.dk
Passco@prtc.net
2006-04-20
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
P. O. Box 1362 P. O. Box 1151
D - 79373 Müllheim D - 73747 Ostfildern
Tel +49 (0)7631/809-0 Tel +49 (0)711 / 34803 0
Fax +49 (0)7631/809 1250 Fax +49 (0)711 / 34803 34
riester@auma.com riester@wof.auma.com Certificate Registration No.
12 100/104 4269
www.auma.com www.auma.com
For detailed information on AUMA products, refer to the Internet

www.auma.com Y003.822/003/en /1.06
Multi-turn actuators
SA 07.1 - SA 16.1
SAR 07.1 - SAR 16.1
AUMA MATIC
DIN ISO 9001/

EN 29001
Certificate Registration No.

12 100 4269
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 - SA 16.1 / SAR 07.1 - SAR 16.1
AUMA MATIC Operation instructions
Scope of these instructions: These instructions are valid for multi-turn actuators SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1
with controls AUMA MATIC.
These operation instructions are only valid for ”clockwise closing”, i.e. driven
shaft turns clockwise to close the valve.
Table of contents Page

1. Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 Range of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Short description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Commissioning (electrical connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.5 Warnings and notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.6 Further notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2. Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Multi-turn actuator SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Controls AUMA MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. Additional information to the legend for wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5. Mounting to valve/ gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6. Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7. Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7.1 Wiring diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7.2 Type of seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8. Setting of the limit switching: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
8.1 Setting for end position CLOSED (black section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
8.2 Setting for end position OPEN (white section). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9. Setting of the DUO-limit switching (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9.1 Setting for direction CLOSE (black section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9.2 Settings for direction OPEN (white section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
10. Setting of the torque switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
11. Test run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
12. Setting of mechanical position indicator (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
13. Setting of the potentiometer (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
14. Setting of the electronic position transmitter RWG (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
14.1 Setting for 2-wire system 4 - 20 mA and 3- /4-wire system 0 - 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
14.2 Setting for 3- / 4- wire system 4 - 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
15. Programming AUMA MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
15.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs on the interface board (standard version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
15.2 Programming of the logic board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
15.3 EMERGENCY-OPEN and EMERGENCY-CLOSE signal (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2
Operation instructions AUMA MATIC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
16. Electronic positioner (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
16.1 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
16.2 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
16.3 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (standard version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
16.4 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (standard version). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
16.5 Setting of the sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
16.6 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (inverse operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
16.7 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (inverse operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
16.8 Positioner in Split Range version (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
16.8.1 Split Range: description of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
16.8.2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
16.8.3 Positioner adjustment for Split Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
17. Timer (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
17.1 Function of the diagnosis LEDs (timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
17.2 Setting of the timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
18. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
19. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
20. Tester for AUMA MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
21. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3
1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA actuators are designed for the operation of industrial valves, e.g.
globe valves, gate valves, butterfly valves and ball valves.
For other applications, please consult us. AUMA is not liable for any possi-
ble damages resulting from use in other than the designated applications.
Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the ac-
tuator’s designated use.
1.2 Short description AUMA multi-turn actuators type SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16 have a modular de-
sign. Multi-turn actuators are driven by an electric motor and controlled with
the electronic controls AUMA MATIC, which are included in the scope of
supply. The limitation of travel is realised via limit switches in both end posi-
tions. Torque seating is also possible in both end positions. The type of
seating is stated by the valve manufacturer.
1.3 Commissioning During electrical operation certain parts inevitably carry lethal voltages.
(electrical connection) Work on the electrical system or equipment must only be carried out by a
skilled electrician himself or by specially instructed personnel under the con-
trol and supervision of such an electrician and in accordance with the appli-
cable electrical engineering rules.
1.4 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 30) must be observed, other-
wise a safe operation of the actuator is no longer guaranteed.
1.5 Warnings and notes Non-observance of the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damages. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings
and notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting and installation, as well as care-
ful commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe operation.
The following references draw special attention to safety-relevant proce-
dures in these operation instructions. Each is marked by the appropriate
pictograph.
This pictograph means: Note!

”Note” marks activities or procedures which have major influence on the
correct operation. Non-observance of these notes may lead to consequen-
tial damage.
This pictograph means: Electrostatically endangered parts!

If this pictograph is attached to a printed circuit board, it contains parts
which may be damaged or destroyed by electrostatic discharges. If the
boards need to be touched during setting, measurement or for exchange, it
must be assured that immediately before a discharge through contact with
an earthed metallic surface (e.g. the housing) has taken place.
This pictograph means: Warning!

”Warning” marks activities or procedures which, if not carried out correctly,
can affect the safety of persons or material.
1.6 Further notes This pictograph means: Procedure may have been performed by
MOV
valve manufacturer!
If actuators are delivered mounted to a valve, this step has been done in the
M valve manufacturer’s plant.
Setting must be checked during commissioning!
4
2. Technical data
2.1 Multi-turn actuator SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1
Type of duty: SA: Standard: Short-time duty S2 - 15 min
(according to IEC 34-1/ VDE 0530) Option: Short-time duty S2 - 30 min
SAR: Standard: Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % ED. Permissible
number of starts see Technical data sheet for SAR
Limit switching: Counter gear mechanism for end positions CLOSED / OPEN
Torque switching: Adjustable torque switching for closing and opening direction
Speeds: see Technical data sheets for SA and SAR
Heater in switch compartment: approx. 5 W, 24 V, internally supplied
Motors: 3-phase AC motor or 1-phase AC motor
Motor protection: Standard: 3 Thermoswitches
Option: 3 PTC thermistors + PTC tripping device
Electrical connection: Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector 100 with screw cable terminations.
Wiring diagram: Refer to name plate on AUMA MATIC
Ambient temperature: SA: −25 °C to + 70 °C
SAR: −25 °C to + 60 °C
Enclosure protection: Standard: IP 67
(according to EN 60 529) Option: IP 68
Finish coating: Standard: two-component iron-mica combination
2.2 Controls AUMA MATIC

Integral controls AUMA MATIC, type AM 01.1 and AM 02.1, for direct fitting to:
Multi-turn actuators AUMA NORM SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1
Voltage supply Refer to name plate
Motor controls Reversing contactors: Standard: mechanical, electrical, locked, max. 690V AC, max. 7,5 kW
Thyristors: Option: electronically locked, max. 460V AC, max. 1,5 kW
External control voltage 24V DC, galvanically isolated from internal voltage supply
Binary inputs Standard: OPEN-STOP-CLOSE
(input signals) Option: Switch-over AUTOMATIC-MANUAL1) for input signals OPEN-CLOSE
Galvanic isolation: Opto-isolators
Nominal voltage: 24 V DC, from internal power supply (max. 50 mA load) or from external source
Current input: 10 - 15 mA per input
Analogue inputs (option) see positioner
Relay outputs – Collective fault signal:
Phase failure/ motor protection tripped/ torque fault:
Torque switch operated in mid-travel (can be separated, see table 3, page 20)
– 4 output relays:
End position OPEN / End position CLOSED/ selector switch LOCAL / selector
switch REMOTE
Monitor relay (diagnosis LEDs) – Phase failure, motor protection tripped
– Torque fault: Torque switch operated in mid-travel
Analogue output (option) Position actual value (galvanically isolated) E2 = 0/4 - 20 mA
Positioner (option) – Input range (position nominal value) E1 = 0/4 - 20 mA
Input resistance 250 Ohm
– Feedback E2 (position actual value): 0/4 - 20 mA
Emergency operation (EMERGENCY) Effective in selector switch position LOCAL and REMOTE:
(option) – End position OPEN
– End position CLOSED
Timer (option) Parameters: Stepping time/ pause time independently adjustable (1-30 seconds)
Local controls Standard: Selector switch LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, lockable
Push-buttons OPEN-STOP-CLOSE
Option: Indication lights for end position OPEN, FAULT, end position CLOSED
Enclosure protection Standard: IP 67
Option: IP 68
Temperature range SA: −25 °C to + 70 °C
SAR: −25 °C to + 60 °C
Electrical connection see clause 7, page 10
1) Only in conjunction with the positioner
5
3. Additional information to the legend for wiring diagrams

Information A: A running indication is possible with blinker transmitter (S5) installed (open-
ing and closing of contacts)
Direction CLOSE: Connections XK 6 - XK 7
Direction OPEN: Connections XK 6 - XK 8
The contacts remain closed in the end positions.
When connected to an external PLC the blinking signal can be switched off
via the DIP-switches (table 3, page 20).
Information B: The type of seating in the end positions is determined by the valve manu-
facturer through setting the programming switches S1-2 and S3-2 (see sub-
clause 15.2, page 20). The tripping of a torque switch in an intermediate po-
sition switches off the actuator and gives a fault signal.
The limit switches serve for signalisation when switching off by torque seat-
ing. They need to be set so that the appropriate switch is tripped shortly be-
fore reaching the end position. If the torque switch trips before the limit
switch, the actuator is switched off and a fault signal is given.
For further programming possibilities, e.g. self-retaining in operation mode
REMOTE, see table 3, page 20.
Information D: The following faults are registered and can be transmitted to the control
room as a potential-free collective fault signal:
- Power failure
- Phase failure
- Motor protection tripped
- Torque switch tripped in mid-travel.
This signal can be switched off in the programming, refer to
table 3, page 20.
Information E: Input signals according to DIN 19 240.

The nominal current of the inputs XK 2; XK 3 and XK 4 is 10-15 mA. If internal
voltage 24 V DC is used for remote control, it must only be connected via
potential-free contacts.
Information F: In case of wrong phase sequence the rotating field is automatically cor-
rected. In case of a phase failure the actuator stops. This fault is indicated
at LED V14 on the interface board. For collective fault signal see informa-
tion D.
Information G: Potential-free contacts are available for signals . The internal control voltage
(XK 11 / + 24 V and XK 5 / – 24V) must not be used for external lamps, re-
lays etc.
6
4. Transport and storage .. Transport to place of installation in sturdy packing.
.
Do not attach ropes or hooks to the handwheel for the purpose of lifting
by hoist.
..
If multi-turn actuator is mounted on valve, attach ropes or hooks for the
purpose of lifting by hoist to valve and not to multi-turn actuator.
Store in well-ventilated, dry room.
..
Protect against floor dampness by storage on a shelf or on a wooden
pallet.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bright surfaces.
If multi-turn actuators are to be stored for a long time (more than 6 months),
.
the following points must be observed additionally:
.
Prior to storage: Protect bright surfaces, especially of output drive parts
and mounting surface, with long-term corrosion protection agent.
Check for corrosion approximately every 6 months. If first signs of
corrosion show, apply new corrosion protection.
After mounting, connect actuator immediately to electrical system, so that

condensation is prevented by the heater.
.
5. Mounting to valve/ gearbox
.
MOV Prior to mounting the multi-turn actuator must be checked
for damage.
M Damaged parts must be replaced by original spare parts.
Mounting is most easily done with the valve shaft / gearbox shaft pointing
vertically upward. But mounting is also possible in any other position.
The multi-turn actuator is delivered ex works in position CLOSED (limit
.
switch CLOSED tripped).
Check if mounting flange fits the valve/gearbox.
Spigot at flanges should be loose fit!
The output drive types B1, B2, B3 or B4 (figure A) are delivered with bore
and keyway (usually according to ISO 5210).
Figure A
Output drive type B 1 / B 2 Output drive type B 3 / B 4

plug sleeve bore with keyway
7
For output drive type A (figure B), thread must match the thread of the valve
stem. If not ordered explicitly with thread, the stem nut is unbored or with pi-
..
lot bore when delivered. Finish machining of stem nut see below.
Check whether bore and keyway match the input shaft of valve/gearbox.
..
Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at multi-turn actuator and valve /
gearbox.
Apply a small quantity of grease to input shaft of valve / gearbox.
Place actuator on valve / gearbox and fasten. Fasten bolts (at least quality
8.8, refer to table 1) evenly crosswise.
Table 1
8.8 TA (Nm)
M 6 10
M 8 25
M 10 50
M 12 87
M 16 220
Finish machining of stem nut (output drive type A):
Figure B
Output drive type A
stem nut
80.3
80.01/ 80.02
80.2
.
The output drive flange does not have to be removed from the actuator.
.
Remove spigot ring (80.2, figure B) with the help of a wrench or similar
tool from the mounting flange.
..
Take off stem nut (80.3) together with thrust bearing (80.01) and thrust
bearing races (80.02).
Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing races from stem nut.
..
Drill and bore stem nut and cut thread
When fixing in the chuck, make sure stem nut runs true!
Clean the machined stem nut.
.
Apply ball bearing grease to thrust bearing and races, then place them on
stem nut.
..
Re-insert stem nut with thrust bearings into the mounting flange. Ensure
that dogs are placed correctly in the slots of the hollow shaft.
Screw in spigot ring until it is firm against the shoulder.
Press a few squirts of grease into the grease nipple with a grease gun.
.
Protection tube for rising valve stem
..
For protection tubes supplied separately, wire round the thread with hemp
or teflon band.
..
Screw protection tube into thread and tighten it firmly.
For corrosion protection KS/ KX, push down the seal to the housing.
Touch-up possible defects in painting.
Check whether cap is available and not damaged.
8
6. Manual operation Manual operation should only be engaged when motor is

not running. Switching over while motor is running may lead
to damage at multi-turn actuator (figure C)!
. Lift change-over lever in the center of the handwheel up to max. 85°,

while slightly turning the handwheel back and forth until manual drive
engages (figure D).
Figure C Figure D
Manual force is sufficient for operating the change-over

lever. The use of an extension is neither necessary nor
permitted. Excessive force may damage the change-over
mechanism.
. Release change-over lever (should snap back into initial position by

spring action). If change-over lever does not snap back, assist with hand
to assure that the lever comes to the initial position
(figure E).
Figure E Figure F
. Manual operation remains engaged until motor is started again. Then
.
motor operation is engaged automatically.
Turn handwheel into desired direction (figure F).
Only operate manually when change-over lever is in its

initial position!
. Manual operation is automatically disengaged when motor is started
9
7. Electrical connection Work on the electrical system or equipment must only be

carried out by a skilled electrician himself or by specially
instructed personnel under the control and supervision of
such an electrician and in accordance with the applicable
Figure G electrical engineering rules.
AUMA plug/socket connector Name plate AUMA actuators SA(R) are operated via the electronic
(customer connection XK) AUMA MATIC controls AUMA MATIC. The controls may either be
mounted directly to the actuator or to a separate wall
bracket.
The electrical connection to the power supply is made

at a plug / socket connector with screw cable
AUMA MATIC terminations as standard.
Multi-turn
actuator SA When installing the AUMA MATIC on a wall bracket,
observe the following points:
Switch 1) For position feedback an electronic position

compartment cover transmitter (RWG) must be used.
2) For the connection of actuator and AUMA MATIC on
Name plate actuator wall bracket, use additionally suitable flexible and
screened connecting cables.
.
..
Check if type of current, supply voltage and frequency correspond to
motor data (refer to name plate at motor and AUMA MATIC).
.
Remove plug cover (AUMA plug / socket connector) (figure G).
Loosen screws and remove socket carrier from plug cover.
.
Insert cable glands suitable for connecting cables.
.
Enclosure protection IP 67 or IP 68 is only ensured if
suitable cable glands are used.
Seal cable entries which are not used with suitable plugs.
7.1 Wiring diagram . Connect cables according to order related wiring diagram MSP. . . KMS
TP . . . . The wiring diagram applicable to the actuator is attached to the
handwheel in a weather-proof bag, together with the operation
instructions. In case the wiring diagram is not available, it can be obtained
from AUMA (state commission no., refer to name plate) or downloaded
directly from the internet (see page 34).
Additional notes to the references mentioned in the wiring diagram,
e.g. >Information A< see clause 3, page 6
.
2
cross sections: control cables max. 2,5 mm ,
2
power cables max. 6 mm .
.
Heater for prevention of condensation is internally supplied, unless
ordered differently.
Only the same potential can be switched on the two circuits of the
switches. Different potentials require tandem switches.
.
Switches with gold plated contacts (option) may only be loaded with low
voltage (< 50 V DC / 400 mA).
For the connection of position transmitters (potentiometers, RWG)
.
screened cables must be used
7.2 Type of seating MOV The valve manufacturer specifies whether switching off in the end
positions should be by limit switch (limit seating) or torque switch (torque
M seating). In case type of seating is to be changed, see programming
.
AUMA MATIC, subclause 15.2, page 20.
Fit and fasten socket carrier in plug cover.
10
. Clean sealing faces at plug cover (AUMA plug/socket connector) and
..
check whether O-ring is o.k. Apply a thin film of non-acidic grease (e.g.
Vaseline) to the sealing faces.
Replace cover and fasten 4 bolts evenly crosswise.
Fasten cable glands firmly to ensure enclosure protection IP 67 or IP 68.
8. Setting of the limit switching

The following instructions are only valid for ”clockwise closing”, i.e. driven
Figure H1 shaft turns clockwise to close the valve.
Indicator disc (option) Cover
. Engage manual operation as described under clause 6
.
on page 9.
Remove switch compartment cover and, if provided, pull

Mark off indicator disc (figure H1). Open end spanner
(ca. 10 mm) may be used as lever.
..
8.1 Setting for end position CLOSED (black section)
MOV Turn handwheel clockwise until valve is closed.
Press down and turn setting spindle A (figure H2) with screw driver
M (5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer B. While a ratched is
felt and heard, the pointer B moves 90° every time.
When pointer B is 90° from mark C, continue turning slowly. When pointer
B has reached the mark C, stop turning and release setting spindle. In
case of having turned too far, continue turning and approach the mark C
anew.
Figure H2
11
.
8.2 Setting for end position OPEN (white section)
.
MOV Turn handwheel counter-clockwise until valve is open, then turn back
approximately 1/2 a turn.
M Press down and turn setting spindle D (figure H3) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer E. While a ratched is
felt and heard, the pointer E moves 90° every time.
When pointer E is 90° from mark F, continue turning slowly. When pointer
E has reached the mark F, stop turning and release setting spindle. In
case of having turned too far, continue turning and approach the mark F
anew.
Red test buttons T and P (figure H2) serve for operating the microswitches
of torque and limit switching.
9. Setting of the DUO-limit switching (Option)

MOV For setting, the switching point (intermediate position) must
be approached from the same direction as afterwards in
M electrical operation.
Any application can be switched on or off via the two
intermediate position switches. The switch-on / switch-off
function is realised through the connection of the appropriate
.
NC and NO contacts.
Move valve to desired intermediate position.
.
9.1 Setting for direction CLOSE (black section)
Turn setting spindle G (figure H3) with screw driver (5 mm) in direction of
arrow, thereby observe pointer H. While a ratched is felt and heard, the
pointer H moves 90° every time.
When pointer H is 90° from mark C, continue turning slowly. When pointer
H has reached the mark C, stop turning and release setting spindle. In
case of having turned too far, continue turning and approach the mark C
anew.
.
9.2 Settings for direction OPEN (white section)
Turn setting spindle K (figure H3) with screw driver (5 mm) in direction of
arrow, thereby observe pointer L. While a ratched is felt and heard, the
pointer L moves 90° every time.
When pointer L is 90° from mark F, continue turning slowly. When pointer
L has reached the mark F, stop turning and release setting spindle. In
case of having turned too far, continue turning and approach the mark F
anew.
12
Figure H3
*) Option
10. Setting of the torque switching
MOV .. Set torque must suit the valve!
.
When multi-turn actuator is delivered by a valve
M manufacturer, setting was made during testing.
This setting should only be changed with the consent of
the valve manufacturer!
Figure J
Setting CLOSED Setting OPEN
..
O P O P
Loosen both lock screws O at the torque dial (figure J).
Turn torque dial P to set it to the required torque (1 da Nm = 10 Nm).
Example:
Figure J shows the following setting:
.
3,5 da Nm = 35 Nm for direction CLOSE
.
3,5 da Nm = 35 Nm for direction OPEN
Tighten lock screws O again
The torque switches can also be operated in manual
operation. With appropriate electrical controls, the tripping
.
of a torque switch is stored and thus a re-starting in a
specific direction prevented.
The torque switching acts as overload protection over full
.
travel, also when stopping in the end positions by limit
switch.
.
If applicable, press indicator disc on shaft and perform setting as
described under clause 12, page 14.
.
Clean sealing faces at cover and housing; check whether O-ring is in
good condition. Apply a thin film of non-acidic grease to the sealing faces.
Replace cover on switch compartment and fasten hex. bolts evenly
crosswise.
13
11. Test run ..

..
Set selector switch to position OFF (0) (figure K).
Switch on supply voltage.
.
Engage manual operation as described under clause 6 on page 9.
Move actuator manually into both end positions of the valve.
Check whether limit switching is set correctly. Hereby observe that the
appropriate switch is tripped in each end position and released again after
the direction of rotation is changed. If this is not the case, the limit
switching must first be set, as described under clause 8 on page 11.
.
When limit switching is set correctly:
Perform test run at local controls with selector switch in position LOCAL (I)
via push-buttons (figure K).
Red test buttons T and P (figure M) serve for operating the microswitches of
torque and limit switching.
Figure K
Push-buttons Indication lights (option):
OPEN OPEN
STOP Fault
CLOSE CLOSED
Selector switch position

0: OFF
I: Operation by local controls
II: Operation by remote controls
12. Setting of mechanical position indicator (option)

MOV Indicator disc rotates approximately 180° at full travel from OPEN to CLOSE
or vice versa.
M A suitable reduction gearing was installed in our works. If the turns per
stroke are changed at a later date, the reduction gearing may have to be ex-
..
changed, too.
Move valve to end position CLOSED.
..
Turn lower indicator disc until symbol CLOSED is in alignment with the
mark on the cover (figure L).
Move actuator to end position OPEN.
Hold lower indicator disc in position and turn upper disc with symbol
OPEN until it is in alignment with the mark on the cover.
14
Figure L
Indicator disc Cover
Mark
13. Setting of the potentiometer (option)

.. Move valve to end position CLOSED.
.
Remove switch compartment cover and, if provided, pull off indicator disc
as described under clause 8, page 11.
Turn potentiometer (R2) clockwise to initial position.
End position CLOSED corresponds to 0 %, end position OPEN to 100 %.
Due to the ratio of the reduction gearings for the position

transmitter the complete resistance range is not always
utilized for the whole travel. Therefore an external possibility
..
for adjustment (setting potentiometer) must be provided.
Perform fine-tuning of the zero point at external setting potentiometer.
.
described under clause 12.
.
Clean sealing face, check O-Ring, apply a thin film of non-acidic grease to
sealing face.
Fit and fasten switch compartment cover.
Figure M
Cover
plate
R2
DSR DOL
T P
WSR WOL
WDR WDL
15
14. Setting of the electronic position transmitter RWG (option)
– For a remote indication or external control –
The electronic position transmitter is set in the factory according to the sig-
nal range stated in the purchase order. Perform a subsequent adjustment
according to subclauses 14.1 or 14.2.
After mounting the actuator to the valve, check setting by measuring the
output current at the designated measuring points (see subclause 14.1 or
14.2) and re-adjust, if necessary.
Table 2
Technical
RWG 4020
data
Wiring MSP... KMS TP . . 4 / . . . MSP... KMS TP . 4 . / . . .
diagrams (requires 2 external wires) MSP... KMS TP . 5 . / . . .
3-/ 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current I 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA
internal supply external supply
Supply
Uv 24 V DC 14 V DC + (I x RB),
voltage
max. 30 V
Max. input I 24 mA at 20 mA 20 mA
current output current
Max. load RB 600 Ω (Uv - 14 V) / 20 mA
Figure N: Position transmitter board

max
(0/4 mA) (20 mA)
N R2 M
3- and 4- wire system Measuring Measuring-

point 1 point 2
2- wire system
+ -
0/4 - 20 mA
For change-over wiring also needs to be changed
For inverse operation interchange the connections 7 (red/RD) and 5

(black/BK) at position transmitter board (figure N).
16
..
14.1 Setting for 2-wire system 4 - 20 mA and 3- /4-wire system 0 - 20 mA
.
Connect voltage to AUMA MATIC.
.
Remove switch compartment cover and, if provided, pull off
indicator disc as described under clause 8, page 11.
.
For actuators with measuring points not accessible, remove
cover plate (figure O1).
Connect ammeter for 0 - 20 mA to measuring points (figure N,
page 16 or figure O1).
In end position CLOSED of 3- or 4-wire system, the value
must be 0 mA, for 2-wire system it must be 4 mA after setting.
The circuit (external load) must be connected (observe

max. ext. resistance RB), or the appropriate poles at the
AUMA plug/socket connector must be linked (refer to
wiring diagram MSP...KMS TP...), otherwise it is not
.
possible to measure a value.
.
Turn potentiometer (R2) whilst decreasing output signal until stop is felt.
.
Turn trimmer potentiometer (N) clockwise until output current starts to
increase.
Turn back trimmer potentiometer (N) until a residual current of
..
approx. 0,1 mA (or 4,1 mA in case of 2-wire system) is reached. This
ensures that the signal remains above the dead and live zero point.
.
Move valve to end position OPEN.
Set to end value 20 mA with trimmer potentiometer (M).
..
Approach end position CLOSED anew and check minimum value (0 mA
or 4 mA). If necessary, correct the setting.
In case cover plate (figure O1) has been removed, fit anew.
.
.
sealing face.
If the maximum value can not be reached, the selection of

the reduction gearing must be checked.
Figure O1
N (0/4 mA) M (20 mA)
R2
Cover plate
Measuring Measuring
point 1 (+) point 2 (–)
0/4 - 20 mA 0/4 - 20 mA
17
14.2 Setting for 3- / 4- wire system 4 - 20 mA

..
.
Connect voltage to AUMA MATIC.
.
Remove switch compartment cover and, if provided, pull off
indicator disc as described under clause 8, page 11.
.
For actuators with measuring points not accessible, remove
cover plate (figure O2).
Connect ammeter for 0 - 20 mA to measuring points (figure N,
page 16 or figure O2).
The circuit (external load) must be connected (observe

max. ext. resistance RB), or the appropriate poles at the
AUMA plug/socket connector must be linked (refer to
wiring diagram MSP...KMS TP...), otherwise it is not
.
possible to measure a value.
.
Turn potentiometer (R2) whilst decreasing output signal until stop is felt.
.
Turn trimmer potentiometer (N) clockwise, until output current starts to
increase.
..
Turn back potentiometer (N), until a rest current of approx. 0,1 mA
is reached.
..
Move valve to end position OPEN.
Set to end value 16 mA with trimmer potentiometer (M).
Set potentiometer (N) from 0,1 mA to initial value 4 mA.
.
This results in a simultaneous shift of the end value by 4 mA, so that the
range is now 4 - 20 mA.
..
Approach both end positions anew and check setting. If necessary,
correct the setting.
In case cover plate (figure O2) has been removed, fit anew.
.
.
sealing face.
If the maximum value can not be reached, the selection of

the reduction gearing must be checked.
Figure O2
N (0/4 mA) M (20 mA)
R2
Cover plate
Measuring Measuring
point 1 (+) point 2 (–)
0/4 - 20 mA 0/4 - 20 mA
18
15. Programming AUMA MATIC

Figure P: AUMA MATIC standard version
Cover plate
Interface board
Logic board
Local controls
Electrical connection
with AUMA plug/socket
connector
Power supply unit
Reversing contactors
Signal and control board
Plug/socket connector
to actuator
15.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs on the interface board (standard version)
V14 is illuminated: Phase failure, motor protection tripped,
V15 is illuminated: Torque fault: torque switch operated in mid-travel
Figure Q1: Cover plate above interface board
Th
T
Z023.910A
LEDs STOP, CLOSE, OPEN
indicate available remote control commands.
19
15.2 Programming of the logic board
MOV
The type of seating - limit or torque seating - (switch S1-2 and switch S3-2,
M figure Q2) must be determined by the valve manufacturer.
Figure Q2: Logic board A2

Position 1:
S3-2 limit seating
in end position
OPEN
Position 2:
torque seating
(OPEN) S3-2 S3-2 in end position
OPEN
S2-2
Position 1:
S1-2 limit seating
(CLOSED) S1-2
in end position
CLOSED
Position 2:
torque seating
S1-2 in end position
CLOSED
. Set desired programming according to table 3 at the switch S2-2.
Tabelle 3
DIP switch S2-2 Programming

(ON = pushed down)
Direction CLOSE Direction OPEN
OFF OFF
Self-retaining REMOTE ON ON
1234 56 1234 56
OFF OFF
Push-to-run operation REMOTE ON ON
1234 56 1234 56
OFF OFF
Self-retaining LOCAL ON ON
1234 56 1234 56
OFF OFF
Push-to-run operation LOCAL ON ON
1234 56 1234 56
activated deactivated
OFF OFF
Blinker transmitter ON ON
1234 56 1234 56
included not included

OFF OFF
Torque switch operated in mid- ON ON
travel within collective fault signal 1234 56 1234 56
20
15.3 EMERGENCY-OPEN and EMERGENCY-CLOSE signal (option)

(5. digit in wiring diagram MSP ... C, D or P)
When an EMERGENCY run command is given the actuator operates the
.
valve to the predetermined end position.
.
The input at terminal XK 1 (refer to wiring diagram) must be connected to
an NC-contact (closed circuit principle) at + 24 V DC.
If EMERGENCY-OPEN or EMERGENCY-CLOSE signal is generally not
desired:
Disconnect links B1 (for EMERGENCY-CLOSE) and B2 (for
EMERGENCY-OPEN).
Figure R: Cover plate for option EMERGENCY-OPEN or

EMERGENCY-CLOSE
Links: B1 (EMERGENCY-OPEN) LED for EMERGENCY
B2 (EMERGENCY-CLOSE) run command
Th
Z023.910A
16. Electronic positioner (option)
16.1 Technical data Command signal (input signal E1, nom. value) 0/4 - 20 mA (option 0 - 5 V)
Feedback (input signal E2, actual value) 0/4 - 20 mA (option 0 - 5 V)
Sensitivity (dead band) ∆E (P9) 0,5 % - 2,5 %
Fine adjustment sensitivity ”Sens” (P7) min 0,25 %
(only useful for output speeds <16 1/min)
Time delay ”toff ”(P10) 0,5 - 10 s
Input resistance 250 Ohm
Operation in stepping mode:
Running time „ton” (P8) 0,5 - 15 s
effective until error variable ≤25 %; then set
value automatically reduces by factor 3.
16.2 Setting The positioner in the AUMA MATIC is programmed according to the order
details and is set together with the actuator prior to delivery.
Due to pecularities of the regulating system not known beforehand, a read-
justment may become necessary. Before adjusting the positioner, the pro-
.
gramming of the positioner should be checked.
.
Remove 4 screws at cover AUMA MATIC (figure P, page 19) and take off
cover.
Check programming of the logic board according to subclause 15.2.
Self-retaining REMOTE must be switched off with positioner.
21
. Take off cover plate (figure S2) and carry out required programming at
positioner board (figure S1) according to table 4. For values of command
signal E1 and feedback E2, see sticker on cover plate (figure S2). The
behaviour of the actuator in case of loss of the command signal E1 and /
or the feedback signal E2 can be set on the positioner board by
DIP-switches. The complete range of choices, however, is only available
with signals 4 -20 mA.
Prior setting it must be ensured that the circuit for the

position feedback E2 (see wiring diagram MSP... KMS TP...)
is closed (measuring device or link). In case of missing
signal E2 the LED V10 ”E1/E2 < 4 mA” (figure S2) is on and
the positioner does not respond.
Figure S1: Positioner board A7 Figure S2: Cover plate positioner

P9 ( E)D
P7 (Sens) S2-7
P3 (0) Sticker with signal details
P4 (max) (here example: E1 = 4-20 mA, E2 = 4-20 mA)
OFF
ON
V28
V27
V18
t-off
E1/E2
MP4(–) V10 < 4 mA V10 (red)
MP3(+)
P10
t-off
P10
MP2(+) E1 4-20mA
MP1(–) E2 4-20mA
P8 t-on
ON
OFF
S1-7
Table 4: Recommended settings
Actuator behaviour on loss of signal Condition Programming

(Figure S1)
Command signal Feedback signal S1-7 S2-7
E1 and/ or E2
nominal value E 1 Actual value E 21) (type of signal) (behaviour)
12345 12345
fail as is, i.e. actuator stops immediately and remains in
this position 4 - 20 mA3) 4) 4 - 20 mA3) 4)
12345 12345
fail close, i.e. actuator moves the valve to the end
4 - 20 mA 4) 4 - 20 mA 4)
position CLOSED
12345 12345
fail open, i.e. actuator moves the valve to the end
4 - 20 mA 4) 4 - 20 mA 4)
position OPEN
12345 12345
Stepping mode
other programming see above
Split Range version (option) 12345 12345

other programming see above
1) 3) 4) refer to table 5
22
Table 5: Further possible settings
Different actuator behaviour Condition Programming

on loss of signal (Figure S1)
Command signal Feedback signal S1-7 S2-7
E1 E2
nominal value E 1 Actual value E 21) (type of signal) (behaviour)
12345 12345
fail as is fail open 4 - 20 mA4) 0 - 5 V 2) 4)
12345 12345
0 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA 4)
fail as is 12345 12345
0 - 10 V 4 - 20 mA 4)
12345 12345
0 - 20 mA 0 - 20 mA
12345 12345
0 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA 4)
12345 12345
0 - 20 mA 0 - 5 V 2)
fail close fail open 12345 12345
4 - 20 mA 4) 0 - 5 V 2)
12345 12345
0 - 5 V 2) 0 - 5 V 2)
12345 12345
0 - 10 V 0 - 5 V 2)
12345 12345
0 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA 4)
12345 12345
0 - 5 V 2) 4 - 20 mA 4)
12345 12345
4 - 20 mA 0 - 20 mA
fail open 12345 12345
4 - 20 mA 4) 0 - 5 V 2)
1) Internal feedback signals: 0/4 - 20 mA from electronic position transmitter

or 0 - 5 V from precision potentiometer 5 k Ω
2) On loss of E 1 or E 2 there may be a misinterpretation, since E 1 or E 2 can also be functional
(without fault) with signal < 4 mA (end position CLOSED = 0 V or 0 mA).
3) For version with external change-over analogue/binary (option): additional emergency operation command for
both directions possible (see page 21, subclause 15.3)
4) Only with Life-Zero signal (e.g. 4 - 20 mA)
Values are not valid for inverse operation or for feedback of E2.
16.3 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (standard version)

Prior to the positioner setting it has to be ensured that the
limit and torque switching of the actuator (clauses 8-10,
..
pages 11-13) as well as the position feedback (clauses
13-14, pages 15-18) have been set.
Set selector switch (local controls) to position LOCAL.
..
Run multi-turn actuator by pressing push-button to end position
CLOSED .
Supply nominal value E1 of 0 or 4 mA (see wiring diagram).
Turn potentiometer P10 (toff) counter-clockwise to the stop
(figure S2).
Missing signals E1/E2 or wrong polarity are indicated by

LED V10 ”E1/E2 < 4 mA” (figure S2)
23
. Connect Voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 (figure S3) for
measuring the nominal value (0 - 5 V) .
For a nominal value E1 of 0 mA the Voltmeter shows 0 V.
.
In case nominal value (0 V or 1 V) is not correct:
Correct nominal value signal in control room.
Connect Voltmeter to measuring points MP2 and MP1 for measuring the
actual value signal. For an actual value E2 of 0 mA the Voltmeter shows
0 V. For an actual value E2 of 4 mA the Voltmeter shows 1 V.
If measured value is not correct:
Adjust position feedback signal according to clauses 13 and 14.
Possible LED indication: Required setting in end position CLOSED

(refer to figures S3 and S4) (refer to figures S3 and S4)
LEDs are not illuminated Turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) slightly clockwise until
LED (V27 yellow) lights up.
Then
LED (V28 green) is Turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) slightly clockwise until LED
illuminated (V28 green) goes out and LED (V27 yellow) lights up.
If
LED (V27 yellow) is Turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) counter-clockwise until LED (V27
illuminated yellow) goes out.
Then turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) slightly clockwise until LED
(V27 yellow) lights up again.
.
16.4 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (standard version)
.
Run multi-turn actuator by ressing push-button (local controls) to
end position OPEN.
Connect Voltmeter to measuring points MP2 and MP1 for measuring of
the actual value E2. When position feedback is set correctly the Voltmeter
shows 5 V.
..
Adjust position feedback signal according to clauses 13 and 14 and
continue with page 23, subclause 16.3.
Connect max. command signal (nominal value E1) = 20 mA.
nominal value E1.For a nominal value of 20 mA the Voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not 5 V:
Check the externally supplied command signal E1.
LED indication: Required setting in end position OPEN:

LEDs are not illuminated Turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) slightly counter-clockwise until
LED (V28 green) lights up.
Then
LED (V28 green) is Turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) clockwise until LED (V28
illuminated green) goes out.
If
Then turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) slightly counter-clockwise until

LED (V28 green) lights up again.
LED (V27 yellow) is Turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) slightly counter-clockwise until
illuminated LED (V27 ) goes out and LED (V28 green) lights up.
24
.
.
16.5 Setting of the sensitivity Set selector switch at local controls (figure P, page 19) to position
REMOTE.
Set command signal E1 according to sticker on cover plate
.
(see figure S4). The sensitivity (∆E / dead band) is set to maximum value
(2,5 %) in the factory.
The sensitivity can be improved or the dead band reduced by turning
potentiometer ∆E (P9) counter-clockwise. For a precise setting of the
.
sensitivity, a set point device with accuracy in the 0,1 mA range is
required.
-1
For actuators with n < 16 min a better sensitivity (∆Emin= 0,25 %) can be
achieved by turning the potentiometer P7 (sens) clockwise.
When setting E the following must be observed:

If the number of starts is too high, this will lead to
unnecessary wear at the valve and actuator. Therefore the
maximum possible dead band acceptable for the process
.
must be set.
To prevent exceeding the max. permissible number of starts (refer to

Technical data sheet SAR) in extreme cases, a time delay between 0,5 s
(left stop) and 10s (right stop) may be set with potentiometer t-off (P10).
Figure S3: Positioner board A7 Figure S4: Cover plate positioner

P9 ( E)D
P7 (Sens) S2-7
P3 (0) S3-7 Sticker with signal details
P4 (max) (here example: E1 = 4-20 mA, E2 = 4-20 mA)
V28 (green)
OFF
ON
V28
V27 V27 (yellow)
V18
MP4(–) V10
t-off V18 (red)
Measuring E1 MP3(+)
E1/E2
< 4 mA V10 (red)
P10
points MP2(+)
E2 t-off P10
MP1(–) P8
ON E1 4-20mA
OFF E2 4-20mA t-on P8
S1-7
16.6 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (inverse operation)
.
In standard version the maximum input signal (E1 = 20 mA) results in oper-
ation to end position OPEN.
.
By switching the code switch S3-7 (figure S3) to position ”1” an inversion
of this signal definition (inverse operation) can be achieved.
Additionally, the connections 7 (red/RD) and 5 (black/BK) at the position
transmitter board (internal position feedback) in the actuator (figure N,
page 16) must be interchanged.
Prior to the positioner setting it has to be ensured that the

limit and torque switching of the actuator (clauses 8-10,
pages 11-13) as well as the position feedback (clauses
..
13-14, pages 15-18) have been set.
.
Set selector switch (local controls) to position LOCAL.
Run actuator with push-button to end position OPEN .
Supply nominal value E1 of 0 or 4 mA (see wiring diagram).
25
. Turn potentiometer P10 (toff) counter-clockwise up to the stop (figure S4).
Missing signals E1/ E2 or wrong polarity are indicated by
.
LED V10 ”E1/E2 < 4 mA” (figure S4)
Connect Voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 (figure S3) for
measuring the nominal value (0 - 5 V) .
.
In case nominal value (0 V or 1 V) is not correct:
Correct nominal value signal in control room.
actual value signal.
For an actual value E2 of 0 mA the Voltmeter shows 0 V.
For an actual value E2 of 4 mA the Voltmeter shows 1 V.
If measured value is not correct: Adjust position feedback according to
clauses 13 and 14.
Possible LED indications: Required setting in end position OPEN:

LEDs are not illuminated Turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) slightly clockwise until
LED (V28 green) lights up
Then
LED (V27 yellow) is Turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) slightly clockwise until LED
illuminated (V27 yellow) goes out and LED (V28 green) lights up.
If
LED (V28 green) is Turn potentiometer ”0” (P3) counter-clockwise until LED
illuminated (V28 green) goes out.
Then turn potentiometer ”0" (P3) slightly clockwise until LED
(V28 green) lights up again.
.
16.7 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (inverse operation)
.
Run actuator with push-button (local controls) to end position
CLOSED.
Connect Voltmeter to measuring points MP2 and MP1 for measuring of
the actual value E2. When position feedback is set correctly the Voltmeter
shows 5 V.
..
Adjust position feedback signal according to clauses 13 and 14.
Connect max. command signal (nominal value E1) = 20 mA.
nominal value E1.For a nominal value of 20 mA the Voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not 5 V:
Check the externally supplied command signal E1.
LED indication: Required setting in end position OPEN:

LEDs are not illuminated Turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) slightly counter-clockwise until
LED (V27 yellow) lights up.
Then
LED (V27 yellow) is Turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) clockwise until LED (V27
illuminated yellow) goes out.
If
Then turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) slightly counter-clockwise until

LED (V27 yellow) lights up again.
LED (V28 green) is Turn potentiometer ”max” (P4) slightly counter-clockwise until
illuminated LED (V28 green) goes out and LED (V27 yellow) lights up.
26
16.8 Positioner in Split Range version (option)

For Split Range a modified version of the positioner is used. The standard
version is not suitable for Split Range operation.
16.8.1 Split Range: description of functions
Split Range allows the adaptation of the positioner to nominal value ranges
which are for example necessary to individually control several actuators
(up to 4 actuators) with the same nominal value signal. Typical values for 2
actuators are 0 - 10 mA and 10 - 20 mA or 4 - 12 mA and 12 - 20 mA. But
all other values between 0/4 - 20 mA can also be set and adjusted.
16.8.2 Programming
Programming of the positioner at the code switches S1-7, S2-7, S3-7 can,
with one exception, be performed in the same manner as for normal opera-
tion.
Switch S1-7 DIP 5 at code switch S1-7 must always be in

position ON for Split Range version.
.
16.8.3 Positioner adjustment for Split Range
(See also example on page 28)
Supply the specified minimum input signal (nominal value E1) for the
.
positioner and check by measuring with Voltmeter at the measuring points
MP3 and MP4 (figure T).
Connect voltmeter to measuring points M3 and MP1.
Calculate setting value:
.
Initial value = E 1min [in Ampere] x 250 Ohm
Set initial value with potentiometer P5.
.
Supply specified maximum command signal (nominal value E1) and
check by measuring at the measuring points MP3 and MP4.
.
Connect voltmeter between measuring point M9 and measuring point
MP1. Set 5 V with potentiometer P6 .
Supply input signal E1 from minimum to maximum value and check the
.
set range 0 - 5 V at measuring point M9. If necessary, readjust with P5 or
P6.
.
Apply the same procedure to the second actuator’s positioner and set
according to the specified nominal value E1.
After setting for Split Range operation, perform further readjustment as
described in subclause 16.3, page 23.
Figure T: Positioner board A7, Split Range version

D
P9 ( E)
P7 (Sens)
P3 (0)
S2-7
P4 (max)
P6 S3-7
P5
Measuring
points
V28 (green)
OFF
ON
V27 (yellow)
V18 (red)
MP4(–) V10 (red)
Meas. E1 MP3(+) P10
points MP2(+)
E2 MP1(–) P8
ON
OFF
S1-7
27
Example:
Two actuators are to be operated in Split Range version. Actuator 1 must be
in position CLOSED with a nominal value signal E1 of 0 mA, and in position
OPEN with a signal of 10 mA.
Actuator 2 must be in position CLOSED with a nominal value signal of
.
10 mA, and in position OPEN with a signal of 20 mA.
Positioner actuator 1:
.
Supply E1 = 0 mA, set with P5 = 0 V at M3, supply E1 = 10 mA, set with
P6 = 5V at M9.
Positioner actuator 2:
.
Supply E1 = 10 mA, set with P5 = 2,5 V at M3, supply E1 = 20 mA, set
with P6 = 5V at M9.
Perform adjustments and settings for E2 etc. Afterwards the nominal value
E1 can be transmitted through both actuators (can be connected in
series). When operating within range E1 = 0 - 10 mA the actuator 1
moves, actuator 2 remains in end position CLOSED. When operating
within range E1 = 10 - 20 mA the actuator 2 moves, actuator 1 remains in
end position OPEN.
17. Timer (option) With the timer board the operating time can be increased for the entire or
any portion of the valve travel.
Example:
In order to avoid water hammer in long pipelines, stepping mode can be
.
chosen for each part of the travel.
.
The timer is installed in the AUMA MATIC instead of the interface board
(figure P, page 19).
Electronic timer is not possible in combination with positioner.
17.1 Function of the diagnosis LEDs (timer)
V14 is illuminated: Phase failure and/ or motor protection tripped,

V15 is illuminated: Torque fault: Torque switch operated in mid-travel
V21 is illuminated: Stepping mode in direction CLOSE switched on
V22 is illuminated: Stepping mode in direction OPEN switched on
28
Figure U: Cover plate timer A1.6

R10 R12
R11 R13
Z008.301A
.
17.2 Setting of the timer Start and end of stepping mode can be set via:
.
Intermediate position switches of the DUO limit switching,
(clause 9, page 12)
or external switch (use potential-free contacts)
ON and OFF times can be set independently of each other between 1 - 30

seconds at the 4 potentiometers R10 to R 13.
Clockwise rotation: Time extension

Counter-clockwise rotation: Time reduction
R10 (t-off) : OFF time in direction OPEN
R11 (t-on) : Running time in direction OPEN
R12 (t-off) : OFF time in direction CLOSE
R13 (t-on) : Running time in direction CLOSE
29
18. Fuses
Disconnect actuator from the mains before changing the
fuses.
Fuses (figure V) are accessible after removal of the local

control cover.
Figure V
Secondary fuses (F3; F4)

on power supply unit
F3 F4
Local controls:
Push-buttons and
indication lights (option)
Selector switch
Primary fuses
(F1; F2) on push-button
relay board
Fuses: (figure V) F1/F2 F3 F4

Size 6,3 x 32 mm 5 x 20 mm 5 x 20 mm
with reversing
contactors
1 A T; 250 V 500 mA T 1,6 A T
with thyristors 16 A FF; 250 V 500 mA T 1,6 A T
19. Maintenance After commissioning, check for damages on paint of multi-turn actuator. Do
a thorough touch-up to prevent corrosion. Original paint in small quantities
can be supplied by AUMA.
AUMA multi-turn actuators require very little maintenance.

Precondition for reliable service is correct commissioning.
Seals made of elastomers are subject to aging and must therefore regularly
be checked and, if necessary, exchanged.
It is also very important that the O-rings at the covers are placed correctly
and cable glands fastened firmly to prevent ingress of dirt or water.
30
.
We recommend:
.
If operated seldom, perform a test run about every 6 months. This
ensures that the actuator is always ready to operate.
Approximately six months after commissioning and then every year check
.
bolts between actuator and valve/gearbox for tightness. If required,
re-tighten applying the torques given in table 1, page 8.
For multi-turn actuators with output drive type A: at intervals of approx. 6
months press in several squirts of ball bearing grease at the lubrication
nipple with grease gun.
We recommend to use original AUMA lubricants
The gear housing is filled with lubricant in the factory.
..
A grease change is recommended after the following operation time:
If operated seldom after 10 - 12 years

If operated frequently after 6 - 8 years
Lubrication of the valve stem must be done separately.
20. Tester for AUMA MATIC
The tester MT 01.1 (article no.: Z008.748) can be used for commissioning
and for trouble-shooting.
The tester is not included in the scope of supply of the AUMA MATIC.
Figure W: Tester MT 01.1
..
.
Switch off supply voltage.
Remove cover of AUMA MATIC.
Completely remove interface board and/or position transmitter or
positioner board with cover plate (figure P, page 19).
31
.. Plug tester plug into socket X5 on logic board (figure X).

Switch on supply voltage.
Figure X: Connection tester MT 01.1 on logic board

Logic board Z013.718A
S3-2
S2-2 S1-2
Diodes are illuminated if:
Internal voltage 12V is available 1) _______________________________

Selector switch is in position LOCAL _____________________________
Selector switch is in position REMOTE ___________________________
LOCAL control command OPEN is available _______________________
LOCAL control command CLOSE is available _____________________ S 20
Limit switch closing (clockwise rotation) has tripped _________________
Torque switch closing (clockwise rotation) has tripped 2)_______________
Limit switch opening (counter-clockwise rotation) has tripped __________ S 21
2)
Torque switch opening (counter-clockwise rotation) has tripped _______
Thermoswitch has tripped______________________________________
All phases are connected and push-button S 22 is pushed 3) ___________
S 22
Actuator is driven in closing direction by push-button S 20 ____________
Actuator is driven in opening direction by push-button S 21____________
1) If internal voltage 12 V is missing, check fuses in AUMA MATIC,

refer to clause 18, page 30.
2) If LEDs ”DSR” and ”DÖL” are illuminated, check the setting of the torque switching according to
clause 10, page 13.
3) For old logic board (delivery before March 2000): phase sequence correct
32
21. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation
33
Index
A I R
Ambient temperature 5 Indicator disc 11 Remote indication 16
Interface board 19 Running time 21,29
B
Intermittent duty 5
Blinker transmitter 20 S
Inverse operation 16,25
Safety instructions 4
C L Selector switch 14
Collective fault signal 5,20 Limit switching 5,11,12 Self-retaining 20
Command signal 21,22,23 Local controls 5,14 Sensitivity 25
Corrosion 7 Loss of signal 22,23 Short-time duty 5
D Signals 6
M
Split Range Version 22,27
Declaration of Conformity 33 Maintenance 4,30 Stepping mode
Declaration of Incorporation 33 Manual operation 9 Operating time 28
DUO-limit switching 12 Mechanical position indicator 14 Pause time 5,29
E Motor controls 5 Storage 7
Motor protection 5,19
Electrical connection 10 Mounting to valve/ gearbox 7 T
Electronic position Tandem switches 10
transmitter RWG 16 N
Technical data 5
2-wire system 16,17 Name plate 10 Test run 14
3-/4-wire system 16,17 Tester 31
Electronic positioner 21 O
Thermoswitches 5
Emergency operation 5 Output drive types 7 Thyristors 5
EMERGENCY-Signal 21 Output relays 5 Torque switching 13
External control voltage 5 Transport 7
P
F Pause time 21,29 Type of duty 5
Fuses 30 Position actual value 5 Type of seating 20
Position transmitter RWG 16 W
H
Potentiometer 15 Wall bracket 10
Handwheel 9 Power cables 10
Heater 5 Wiring diagram 6,10
Programming AUMA MATIC 19
Protection tube 8
PTC thermistor 5
Push-to-run operation 20
Information also available Wiring diagram, inspection records and further actuator information
in the internet: can be downloaded directly from the internet by entering the order no. or
COMM NO. (refer to name plate).
Our homepage: http://www.auma.com
34
Deutschland / Germany
WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG
Industriegebiet West Service-Center Bayern Büro West Büro Württemberg
Postfach 13 62 Robert-Bosch-Strasse 14 Rathausplatz 7 Postfach 11 51
D 79373 Müllheim/Baden D 85748 Garching-Hochbrück D 45549 Sprockhövel D 73747 Ostfildern
Tel +49 76 31 809-0 Tel 0 89 / 32 98 85-17 Tel +49 23 39 92 12-0 Tel +49 71 13 48 03 80
Fax +49 76 31 13 218 Fax 0 89 / 32 98 85-18 Fax +49 23 39 92 12 15 Fax +49 71 13 48 03 81
e-mail: Riester@auma.com e-mail: Riester@scb.auma.com e-mail: KettnerM@auma.com e-mail: KoeglerS@wof.auma.com
SuchhardtP@auma.com
WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG
Postfach 11 51 Büro Nord WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG Büro Bayern
D 73747 Ostfildern Krelingen 150 Büro Süd-West Kagerberg 12
Tel +49 71 13 48 03-0 D 29664 Walsrode Mozartstr. 4 D 93356 Teugn/Niederbayern
Fax +49 71 13 48 03 34 Tel +49 51 67 504 D 69488 Birkenau Tel +49 94 05 94 10 24
e-mail: Riester@wof.auma.com Fax +49 51 67 565 Tel +49 62 01 37 31 49 Fax +49 94 05 94 10 25
e-mail: HandwerkerE@auma.com Fax +49 62 01 37 31 50 e-mail: JochumM@auma.com
WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG e-mail: WagnerD@auma.com
Service-Center Köln WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG
Mathias-Brüggen-Str. 164 Büro Nord WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG Büro Ost
D 50829 Köln Bereich Schiffbau Büro Baden Am Stadtberg 1
Tel +49 22 15 97 72-0 Tempowerkring 1 Postfach 13 62 D 39167 Niederndodeleben
Fax +49 22 15 97 72-19 D 21079 Hamburg D 79373 Müllheim/Baden Tel +49 39 20 47 59 80
e-mail: Service@sck.auma.com Tel +49 40 79 14 02 85 Tel +49 76 31 80 91 93 Fax +49 39 20 47 59 89
Fax +49 40 79 14 02 86 Fax +49 76 31 80 92 94 e-mail: ZanderC@scm.auma.com
WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG e-mail: DierksS@auma.com e-mail: HenselR@auma.com
Service-Center Magdeburg
Am Stadtberg 1
D 39167 Niederndodeleben
Tel +49 39 20 47 59-0
Fax +49 39 20 47 59-19
e-mail: Service@scm.auma.com
Europa / Europe
AUMA Armaturenantriebe AUMA ACTUATORS Ltd. GROENBECH & SOENNER A/S ERICHS ARMATUR AB
Gesellschaft m.b.H. Britannia Way Scandiagade 25 Travbanegatan 8
Betriebsgebiet Traiskirchen Süd GB Clevedon DK 2450 Copenhagen SV Box 91 44
Handelsstr. 14 North Somerset BS21 6QH Tel +45 33 26 63 00 S 20039 Malmö
A 2512 Tribuswinkel Tel +44 12 75 87 11 41 Fax +45 33 26 63 01 Tel +46 40 31 15 50
Tel +43 22 52 82 540 Fax +44 12 75 87 54 92 e-mail: GS@groenbech-sons.dk Fax +46 40 94 55 15
Fax +43 22 52 82 54 050 e-mail: auma@auma.co.uk e-mail: Ulf.Elowsson@eriarm.se
e-mail: office@auma.at IBEROPLAN S.A.
AUMA ITALIANA S.r.l. Marques de Hoyos, 10 MEGA Endüstri Kontrol Sistemleri
AUMA (Schweiz) AG Via Don Luigi Sturzo, 29 E 28027 Madrid Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Chörrenmattstr. 43 I 20020 Lainate/Milano Tel +34 91 37 17 130 Cetin Emec Bulvari 6.CAD
CH 8965 Berikon Tel +39 02 93 17 911 Fax +34 91 74 27 126 78.SK. 17/ 18
Tel +41 56 64 00 945 Fax +39 02 93 74 387 e-mail: iberoplan@mad.servicom.es TR 06460 Övecler - Ankara
Fax +41 56 64 00 948 e-mail: info@auma.it Tel +90 31 24 78 08 13
e-mail: RettichP.ch@auma.com D.G. Bellos & Co O.E. Fax +90 31 24 78 08 31
AUMA BENELUX B.V. 64, Maisonos str. e-mail: megaltd@escortnet.com
AUMA Servopohony spol. s.r.o. Le Pooleweg 9 GR 10438 Athens
Kazanská 121 NL 2314 XT Leiden Tel +30 15 22 38 48
CZ 10200 Praha 10 Tel +31 71 58 14 040 Fax +30 15 23 22 46
Tel +420 2 72 70 00 56 Fax +31 71 58 14 049 e-mail: dgb@eexi.gr
Fax +420 2 72 70 41 25 e-mail: office@benelux.auma.com
e-mail: auma-s@auma.cz SIGURD SOERUM A.S.
AUMA Polska Sp. zo. o. Jongsasveien 3
AUMA France Ul. Pukowca 15 Postboks 85
10 - 16 Rue Constantin Pecqueur PL 40-816 Katowice N 1301 Sandvika
Z.A.C. Les Châtaigniers III Tel +48 32 25 05 412 Tel +47 67 57 26 00
F 95157 Taverny Cédex Fax +48 32 25 05 412 Fax +47 67 57 26 10
Tel +33 13 93 27 272 e-mail: R.Ludzien@auma.com.pll e-mail: post@sigurd-sorum.no
Fax +33 13 93 21 755
e-mail: servocom@auma.fr AUMA Moscow INDUSTRA Comércio de
Representative Office Equipamentos Industrias, Lda.
OY AUMATOR AB 8/9, 1-y Tverskoy-Yamskoy pereulok, Estrada de Albarraque 5°
Pl 21 / Hyljekuja 5 RUS Moscow, 125047, Post Box 220 Centro Empresarial Sintra-Estoril
FIN 02271 Espoo 27 Tel: +7 095 973 29 43 Bloco A3-Linh 2710-297 Sintra
Tel +358 95 84 022 Fax: +7 095 973 35 28 Tel +351 2 19 10 95 00
Fax +358 95 84 02 300 e-mail: georgeip@aha.ru Fax +351 2 19 10 95 95
e-mail: auma@aumator.fi e-mail: Industra@mail.telepac.pt
Asien / Asia
AUMA (INDIA) Ltd. AUMA Middle East PERFECT CONTROLS Ltd. Top Advance Enterprises Ltd.
Plot No. 39-B, II Phase Representative Office Suite 202, Block 1, 2nd Fl., No.32, Lane 308, Section 3,
Peenya Industrial Area Sponsorship: Euro Mechanical Hofai Commercial Centre Ho-Ping East Road
IND Bangalore 560 058 P.O. Box 46153 218 Sai Lau Kok Road RC Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel +91 80 83 94 655 Tourist Club Street HK Tsuen Wan, Kowloon, Hongkong Tel +886 2 2733 3530
Tlx 08 45 50 63 auma in UAE Abu Dhabi Tel +852 24 93 77 26 Fax +886 2 2736 5526
Fax +91 80 83 92 809 Tel +971 26 44 92 43 Fax +852 24 16 37 63 e-mail: kycl3530@ms6.hinet.net
Fax +971 26 44 85 61 e-mail: pcltd@netvigator.com
AUMA JAPAN Co., Ltd. e-mail: auma@emirates.net.ae DONG WOO Valve Control Co.,
596-4 Futago-Cho AL-ARFAJ Eng. Company W.L.L. Ltd.
273-0034 Funabashi-Shi AUMA ACTUATORS P.O. Box 391 Youi do
J Chiba (Singapore) Pte Ltd. KWT Salmiyah 22004 P.O.Box 293
Tel +81 47 30 29 551 32, Ang Mo Kio Industrial Park 2 Tel +965 48 17 448 ROK Seoul, Korea
Fax +81 47 30 29 555 #01 - 02, Sing Industrial Complex Fax +965 48 17 442 Tel +82 27 61 62 33
e-mail: auma.jp@oregano.ocn.ne.jp SGP Singapore 569510 e-mail: arfaj@qualitynet.net Fax +82 27 61 12 78
Tel +65 48 18 750 e-mail: dw7994@users.unitel.co.kr
AUMA Beijing Representative Office Fax +65 48 18 269 BEHZAD Trading
Room 602, Yuanchenxin Building e-mail: P.O. Box 11 23 Sunny Valves and Intertrade
12 Yumin Road, Madian aumasing@mbox5singnet.com.sg Rayyan Road Corp. Ltd.
Chaoyang District Q Doha, Qatar 232/ 13 Yen-A-Kart Soi 2
PRC 100029 Beijing Tel +974 43 32 36 T Yannawa, Bangkok 10120
Tel +86 10 62 02 24 91 Fax +974 43 32 37 Tel +66 22 40 06 56
Fax +86 10 62 02 24 97 Fax +66 22 40 10 95
e-mail: AUMABS@ihw.com.cn e-mail: swvong@mozart.inet.co.th
Nord- und Südamerika / North and South America

AUMA ACTUATORS INC. TROY-ONTOR Inc. Asvotec Termoindustrial Ltda. DIN INSTRUMENTO Ind. Ltda.
4 Zesta Drive 230 Bayview Drive Unit 1A Rod. Cônego Cyriaco Scaranello Avda.Holanda 2023
USA Pittsburgh, PA 15 205 CDN Barrie, Ontario L4N 5E9 Pires, Km 01 C.P.6651631 Casilla 335
Tel +1 41 27 87 13 40 Tel +1 41 66 14 12 10 BR Monte Mor-Sp, CEP 13190-000 RCH Santiago de Chile
Fax +1 41 27 87 12 23 Fax +1 41 70 57 21 58 51 Tel: +55 19 3879-87 35 Tel +562 20 50 100
e-mail: mailbox@auma-usa.com Fax: +55 19 3879 87 38 Fax +562 222 58 139
e-mail: adm@asvotec.com.br e-mail: valvulas@dininstrumentos. cl
Australien / Australia Afrika / Africa

BARRON GJM Pty.Ltd. AUMA South Africa (Pty) Ltd. A.T.E.C.
P.O.Box 792 P.O.Box 12 83 5, Road No. 101 Maadi
AUS Artarmon - NSW 1570 ZA Springs 1560 ET Cairo - Egypt
Tel +61 29 43 61 088 Tel +27 11 36 32 880 Tel +20 2 35 99 680
Fax +61 29 43 93 413 Fax +27 11 81 85 248 Fax +20 2 35 90 681
e-mail: info@barron.com.au e-mail: auma-sa@cis.co.za e-mail: ATEC@INTOUCH.com
35
Multi-turn actuators
SA 07.1 - SA 16.1 / SA 25.1 - SA 48.1
Torques from 10 to 32 000 Nm
Output speeds from 4 to 180 min-1
Controls AUMA MATIC

with multi-turn actuators SA/ SAR
Speeds from 4 to 180 min-1
Part-turn actuators
SG 05.1 – SG 12.1
Operating times for 90° from 4 to 180 s
Linear thrust units LE Part-turn actuators
with multi-turn actuators SA AS 6 – AS 50
Thrusts from 4 kN to 217 kN Torques from 25 to 500 Nm
Strokes up to 500 mm Operating times for 90° from 4 to 90 s
Linear speeds
from 20 to 360 mm/min
Bevel gearboxes
GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Worm gearboxes Torques up to 16 000 Nm
GS 40.3 – GS 125.3
GS 160 – GS 500
Torques up to 360 000 Nm
Worm gearboxes with base and lever

GF 50.3 – GF 125.3 Spur gearboxes
GF 160 – GF 250 GST 10.1 - GST 40.1
Torques up to 32 000 Nm Torques up to 16 000 Nm
WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG WERNER RIESTER GmbH & Co. KG
Armaturen- und Maschinenantriebe Armaturen- und Maschinenantriebe DIN ISO 9001/
P.O.Box 1362 D - 79373 Müllheim P.O. Box 1151 D - 73747 Ostfildern EN 29001
Tel 07631/809-0 Fax 07631/13218 Tel 0711/34803-0 Fax 0711/34803-34 Certificate Registration No.
e-mail riester@auma.com e-mail riester@wof.auma.com 12 100 4269
http://www.auma.com DO 01.05.021GB /1.01
HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13.4 Operating instructions for coupling
Coupling type RUPEX
Coupling size () 360

FLENDER RUPEX®
couplings
Types RWN, RWS, RWB, RBS
and RFN, RFS
Operating instructions
BA 3600 en 02/2012
FLENDER couplings
Technical data 1
FLENDER RUPEX® 2
Notes
couplings
Fitting 3
Types RWN, RWS, RWB, RBS Start-up

and RFN, RFS and operation 4
Faults, causes
and remedy 5
Operating instructions
Maintenance
Translation of the original operating instructions and repair 6
Stocking spare parts 7
Declarations 8
BA 3600 en 02/2012
2 / 28
Notes and symbols in these operating instructions
Note: The term "operating instructions" will in the following also be shortened to "instructions" or "manual".
Legal notes
Warning-note concept
This manual comprises notes which must be observed for your personal safety and for preventing material damage.
Notes for your personal safety are marked with a warning triangle or an "Ex" symbol (when applying
Directive 94/9/EC), those only for preventing material damage with a "STOP" sign.
WARNING! Imminent explosion!
The notes indicated by this symbol are given to prevent explosion damage.
Disregarding these notes may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING! Imminent personal injury!
The notes indicated by this symbol are given to prevent personal injury.
Disregarding these notes may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING! Imminent damage to the product!
The notes indicated by this symbol are given to prevent damage to the product.
Disregarding these notes may result in material damage.
NOTE!
The notes indicated by this symbol must be treated as general operating information.
Disregarding these notes may result in undesirable results or conditions.
WARNING! Hot surfaces!
The notes indicated by this symbol are made to prevent risk of burns due to hot surfaces
and must always be observed.
Disregarding these notes may result in light or serious injury.
Where there is more than one hazard, the warning note for whichever hazard is the most serious is always used.
If in a warning note a warning triangle is used to warn of possible personal injury, a warning of material damage may
be added to the same warning note.
Qualified personnel
The product or system to which these instructions relate may be handled only by persons qualified for the work
concerned and in accordance with the instructions relating to the work concerned, particularly the safety and
warning notes contained in those instructions. Qualified personnel must be specially trained and have the
experience necessary to recognise risks associated with these products or systems and to avoid possible hazards.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
3 / 28
Intended use of Siemens products
Observe also the following:
Siemens products must be used only for the applications provided for in the catalogue and the relevant
technical documentation. If products and components of other makes are used, they must be
recommended or approved by Siemens. The faultfree, safe operation of the products calls for proper
transport, proper storage, erection, assembly, installation, startup, operation and maintenance. The
permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to. Notes in the relevant documentations must be
observed.
Trademarks
All designations indicated with the registered industrial property mark ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
Other designations used in these instructions may be trademarks the use of which by third parties for their own
purposes may infringe holders’ rights.
Exclusion of liability
We have checked the content of the instructions for compliance with the hard and software described.
Nevertheless, variances may occur, and so we can offer no warranty for complete agreement. The information
given in these instructions is regularly checked, and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Note on the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

Siemens couplings in the "FLENDER couplings" product range must be treated as "components" in the sense
of the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Therefore, Siemens needs not issue a declaration of incorporation.
Information on safe fitting, safe startup and safe operation can be found in this instructions manual; in addition
the "warningnote concept" therein must be observed.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
4 / 28
Contents
1. Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1 Speeds, geometric data and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 Buffers (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2. Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1 Safety instructions and general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Marking of the coupling parts for use in potentially explosive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3 Service conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1 Machining the finished bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2 Machining the parallel keyway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3 Axial fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4 Balancing after machining the finished bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5 Placing the coupling parts with cylindrical and conical bore with parallel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.6 Fitting of coupling parts in case of a cylindrical and tapered interference fit set up
for removal by oilhydraulic shrinkingoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.7 Fitting the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.8 Possible misalignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.8.1 Axial misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.8.2 Angular misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.8.3 Radial misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.9 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.10 Shaftmisalignment values during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.11 Assignment of the tightening torques and wrench widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4. Startup and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5. Faults, causes and remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.1 Possible cause of fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2 Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2.1 Frequent faults when selecting the coupling and/or coupling size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2.2 Frequent faults when fitting the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.3 Frequent faults in maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6. Maintenance and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.1 Maintenance interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.2 Replacement of wearing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.2.1 Extracting the bolts in the case of coupling sizes 450 to 2000 with the demountijg box . . . . . . . . . 23
6.2.2 Extracting the bolts in the case of coupling sizes 450 to 2000 with grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.3 Demounting the coupling parts in case of shafthub connection with parallel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.4 Demounting the coupling parts in case of a cylindrical
and tapered interference fit set up for removal by oilhydraulic shrinkingoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7. Stocking spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.1 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8. Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8.1 EC declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BA 3600 en 02/2012
5 / 28
1. Technical data
The instructions describe the coupling in horizontal mounting position with shafthub connection by
cylindrical or conical bores with parallel key or with shrink fit. If a vertical or inclined arrangement or other
shafthub connections, such as splines to DIN 5480, are to be used, Siemens must be consulted.
The coupling described below may be used in potentially explosible areas. The couplings must have
a CE marking (for marking, see item 2.3).
Couplings which do not have a CE marking must not be used in potentially explosive
areas.
If a dimensioned drawing has been made out for the coupling, the data in this drawing must be given
priority. The dimensioned drawing including any other documents should be made available to the user
of the system.
For part numbers and part designations, see the corresponding spareparts drawing in section 7 or the
dimensioned drawing.
1.1 Speeds, geometric data and weights
U2
S
P U1
1 2
NL1 NL2
∅ND2
∅ND1
∅DA
∅D1
∅D2
Fig. 1: Types RWN and RWS
BA 3600 en 02/2012
6 / 28
Table 1: Types RWN and RWS
Speed Maximum bore 1) Weight 2)
NL1
nmax. D1 D2 D1 D2 DA ND1 ND2 ND1 ND2 NL2 P S U1 U2 m m
Size
RWN RWS RWN RWS RWN RWS RWN RWS
1/min 1/min mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg kg
105 7000 10000 32 38 32 38 105 53 59 53 59 45 30 2 ... 4 13 12 1.9 1.9
125 6000 9000 40 48 42 48 125 65 68 65 68 50 35 2 ... 4 16 15 3.2 3.2
144 5250 7800 45 55 50 60 144 76 84 76 84 55 35 2 ... 4 16 15 4.5 4.5
162 4650 6900 50 60 55 65 162 85 92 85 92 60 40 2 ... 5 20 18 6.7 6.7
178 4200 6300 60 70 70 75 178 102 108 102 108 70 40 2 ... 5 20 18 9.7 9.7
198 3750 5600 70 80 80 85 198 120 128 120 128 80 40 2 ... 5 20 18 12.9 12.9
228 3300 4900 80 90 85 95 228 129 140 129 140 90 50 2 ... 5 26 24 19 19
252 3000 4400 90 100 100 110 252 150 160 150 160 100 50 2 ... 5 26 24 26.3 26.3
285 2650 3900 100 110 110 120 285 164 175 164 175 110 60 3 ... 6 32 30 39 39
320 2350 3500 110 120 125 130 320 180 192 180 192 125 60 3 ... 6 32 30 53 53
360 2100 3100 120 130 135 140 360 200 210 200 210 140 75 3 ... 6 42 42 78 78
400 2050 2800 140 140 150 150 400 230 230 230 230 160 75 3 ... 6 42 42 105 110
450 1800 2500 160 160 170 170 450 260 260 260 260 180 90 4 ... 7 52 52 156 163
500 1600 2200 180 180 190 190 500 290 290 290 290 200 90 4 ... 7 52 52 200 217
140 140 165 165 250 250 250 250 280 274
560 1450 2000 180 180 200 200 560 300 300 300 300 220 120 4 ... 8 68 68 290 292
200 200 210 210 320 320 320 320 295 305
140 140 165 165 250 250 250 250 345 352
630 1280 1800 180 180 200 200 630 300 300 300 300 240 120 4 ... 8 68 68 370 370
220 220 235 235 355 355 355 355 400 400
160 160 190 190 290 290 290 290 510 507
710 1150 1600 200 200 220 220 710 330 330 330 330 260 140 5 ... 9 80 80 515 530
240 240 250 250 385 385 385 385 540 560
180 180 210 210 320 320 320 320 670 683
800 1000 1400 220 220 240 240 800 360 360 360 360 290 140 5 ... 9 80 80 690 715
260 260 280 280 420 420 420 420 730 762
210 210 320 320 907
220 220 360 360 940
240 240 360 360 933
900 900 1250 260 260 900 425 425 320 160 5...10 90 90 960
280 280 425 425 1000
290 290 465 465 1030
310 310 465 465 1025
230 230 355 355 1170
240 240 395 395 1200
260 260 395 395 1208
1000 810 1100 280 280 1000 460 460 350 160 5...10 90 90 1250
300 300 460 460 1290
320 320 515 515 1310
340 340 515 515 1343
200 200 240 240 360 360 360 360 1470 1560
250 250 270 270 410 410 410 410 1510 1660
1120 700 1000 1120 380 180 6...11 100 100
300 300 330 330 495 495 495 495 1600 1730
350 350 370 370 560 560 560 560 1690 1870
230 230 270 270 410 410 410 410 1850 2000
280 280 300 300 460 460 460 460 1900 2150
1250 650 900 1250 420 180 6...11 100 100
330 330 360 360 540 540 540 540 2025 2200
380 380 400 400 610 610 610 610 2210 2420
260 260 310 310 465 465 465 465 2820 3020
320 320 350 350 525 525 525 525 2900 3120
1400 570 800 1400 480 210 6...12 120 120
380 380 410 410 620 620 620 620 3180 3350
440 440 460 460 700 700 700 700 3260 3570
320 320 370 370 565 565 565 565 3780 3890
380 380 410 410 625 625 625 625 3870 4270
1600 500 700 1600 540 210 6...12 120 120
440 440 480 480 720 720 720 720 4150 4300
480 480 510 510 770 770 770 770 4290 4630
380 380 440 440 660 660 660 660 5550 6230
440 440 480 480 720 720 720 720 5630 6460
1800 450 600 1800 600 240 8...16 140 140
500 500 540 540 820 820 820 820 6000 6770
540 540 580 580 870 870 870 870 6250 7030
440 440 500 500 760 760 760 760 6800 8140
500 500 540 540 820 820 820 820 7000 8430
2000 400 550 2000 660 240 8...16 140 140
560 560 610 610 920 920 920 920 7350 8860
600 600 640 640 960 960 960 960 7620 9050
1) Maximum bore with keyway to DIN 6885/1.
2) Weights are valid for maximum bores.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
7 / 28
S BB
P U1
1 3
∅ND1
∅ND2
∅DB
∅D2
∅D1
∅DA
NL1 NL2
Fig. 2: Types RWB and RBS with brake drum to DIN 15431
Table 2: Types RWB and RBS with brake drum to DIN 15431
Speed Maximum bore 1) Weight 2)
BB
nmax. D1 D2 D1 D2 DA ND1 ND2 NL1 P S U1 DB NL2 m m
Size
RWB RBS RWB RBS RWB RBS
1/min 1/min mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg kg
144 3400 5000 45 55 50 60 144 76 84 55 35 2 ... 4 16 200 75 9.5 10
162 2750 5000 50 60 55 65 162 85 92 60 40 2 ... 5 20 250 95 17 18
2750 4900 250 95 20 22
178 60 70 70 75 178 102 108 70 40 2 ... 5 20
2150 4350 315 118 28 30
2750 4600 250 95 24 26
198 70 80 80 85 198 120 128 80 40 2 ... 5 20
2150 4350 315 118 32 35
228 1700 3400 80 90 85 95 228 129 140 90 50 2 ... 5 26 400 150 54 60
1700 3400 400 150 63 68
252 90 100 100 110 252 150 160 100 50 2 ... 5 26
1400 2750 500 190 93 103
1400 2750 500 190 104 115
285 100 110 110 120 285 164 175 110 60 3 ... 6 32
1100 2150 630 236 157 171
1100 2150 630 236 172 185
320 110 120 125 130 320 180 192 125 60 3 ... 6 32
950 1900 710 265 217 230
1100 2150 630 236 191 210
360 120 130 135 140 360 200 210 140 75 3 ... 6 42
950 1900 710 265 236 255

BA 3600 en 02/2012
8 / 28
1 S 20
P U1
L1
∅DFN
∅ND1
∅DFA
∅DFK
NL1
∅D1
∅DA
ZF x ∅DFB
FB
Fig. 3: Types RFN and RFS
Table 3: Types RFN and RFS

Maximum
Speed Weight 2)
bore 1)
Size nmax. D1 DA ND1 NL1 P S U1 DFA B FB DFN L1 DFK ZF DFB m m
RFN RFS RFN RFS H7 RFN RFS
1/min 1/min mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg kg
105 7000 10000 32 32 105 53 45 30 2 ... 4 13 158 23 10 142 6 9 2.3 2.3
125 6000 9000 40 42 125 65 50 35 2 ... 4 16 180 28 13 160 6 11 4.2 4.2
144 5250 7800 45 50 144 76 55 35 2 ... 4 16 200 28 13 180 7 11 5 5
162 4650 6900 50 55 162 85 60 40 2 ... 5 20 220 34 13 200 8 11 7.3 7.3
178 4200 6300 60 70 178 102 70 40 2 ... 5 20 248 34 16 224 8 14 10 10
198 3750 5600 70 80 198 120 80 40 2 ... 5 20 274 34 16 250 8 14 13 13
228 3300 4900 80 85 228 129 90 50 2 ... 5 26 314 42 20 282 8 18 20 20
252 3000 4400 90 100 252 150 100 50 2 ... 5 26 344 42 20 312 8 18 25 25
285 2650 3900 100 110 285 164 110 60 3 ... 6 32 380 51 22 348 9 18 38 38
320 2350 3500 110 125 320 180 125 60 3 ... 6 32 430 51 25 390 9 22 50 50
360 2100 3100 120 135 360 200 140 75 3 ... 6 42 480 66 25 440 10 22 76 76
400 2050 2800 140 150 400 230 160 75 3 ... 6 42 520 70 50 380 4 480 10 22 125 125
450 1800 2500 160 170 450 260 180 90 4 ... 7 52 575 80 45 428 6 528 12 26 170 175
500 1600 2200 180 190 500 290 200 90 4 ... 7 52 620 80 45 475 6 570 12 26 205 210
140 165 250 330 330
560 1450 2000 180 200 560 300 220 120 4 ... 8 68 700 100 65 532 8 650 16 26 330 340
200 210 320 340 340
140 165 250 390 390
630 1280 1800 180 200 630 300 240 120 4 ... 8 68 785 100 60 602 8 725 16 33 400 400
220 235 355 420 420
160 190 290 550 550
710 1150 1600 200 220 710 330 260 140 5 ... 9 80 875 120 80 675 10 815 18 33 550 560
240 250 385 570 580
180 210 320 680 690
800 1000 1400 220 240 800 360 290 140 5 ... 9 80 1000 120 70 765 10 930 16 39 690 710
260 280 420 710 730
BA 3600 en 02/2012
9 / 28
1.2 Buffers (5)
• Buffers may be stored for up to 5 years.
• Buffers must be protected against direct sunlight, artificial light with a high ultraviolet content and
extreme temperatures.
• Buffers must not come into contact with aggressive media.
• Buffers must not be heated up to impermissible temperatures during fitting work (see table 4).
• Buffers must be replaced in sets; only identical buffers may be used in one coupling.
Table 4: RUPEX buffer
Temperature
Material Hardness Hardness Mark
range
NBR 80 Shore A Standard black buffer - 30 °C to + 80 °C
Special, soft,
black buffer with
shift of rotary resonance
NBR 60 Shore A a green dot - 30 °C to + 80 °C
speed, nominal
on the end face
torque reduced
Special, hard, black buffer with
NBR 90 Shore A shift of rotary a magenta dot - 30 °C to + 80 °C
resonance speed on the end face
Special,
NBR 639 80 Shore A green buffer - 30 °C to + 80 °C
electrically insulating
black buffer with
Special,
NR 80 Shore A a white dot - 50 °C to + 50 °C
use at low temperature
on the end face
black buffer with
Special,
HNBR 80 Shore A a red dot - 10 °C to + 100 °C
use at high temperature
on the end face
Electrically insulating buffers (green) are approved for explosion groups IIA and IIB.
Hightemperature buffers (red marking) are not approved for use in potentially
explosive areas.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
10 / 28
2. Notes
2.1 Safety instructions and general notes

All persons involved in the installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the
coupling or clutch must have read and understood these instructions and must
comply with them at all times. Disregarding these instructions may cause damage to
the product and material and/or injury to persons. Damage caused by disregard of
these instructions will result in exclusion of liability.
During transport, installation, dismantling, operation and maintenance of the unit, the relevant safety and
environmental regulations must be complied with at all times.
Lifting gears and load equipment for handling the components must be suitable for the
weight of the coupling.
Depending on national regulations, coupling and clutch components may have to be disposed of
separately or separated for recycling.
The coupling must be stored in a dry environment. Adequate preservation must be carried out.
Operators and users must not make any changes to the coupling themselves over and above the treatment
specified in these instructions.
If there is any visible damage the coupling or clutch must not be fitted or put into
operation!
The coupling must not be operated unless housed in a suitable enclosure in accordance with the standards
applying. This also applies to test runs and when checking the direction of rotation.
All work on the coupling must be carried out only when it is at a standstill. Secure the drive unit to prevent
unintentional switchon! A notice should be attached to the ON switch stating clearly that work is in
progress.
In addition to any generally prescribed personal safety equipment (such as safety shoes, safety clothing,
helmet) suitable safety gloves and suitable safety glasses must be worn when handling the coupling
or clutch!
Only spare parts made by the manufacturer Siemens must be used.
Any enquiries should be addressed to:
Siemens AG
Schlavenhorst 100
46395 Bocholt
Tel.: +49 (0)2871 / 92-0

Fax: +49 (0)2871 / 92-2596
BA 3600 en 02/2012
11 / 28
2.2 Marking of the coupling parts for use in potentially explosive zones
Couplings which are ordered in Atex configuration, have the following marking on the outer circumference
of coupling part 1:
Siemens AG II 2G T4 / T5 / T6 D120 °C
46393 Bocholt ‐ Germany (- 50 °C) - 30 °C ≤ Ta ≤ + 80 °C / + 50 °C / + 40 °C
FLENDER couplings RUPEX <year built> I M2
Coupling part 2 bears the marking .

Coupling part 3 is manufactured without a marking. Coupling part 3 is part of the Brake module and must
be certified by the manufacturer of the brake.
The marking is in one or two lines.
If, in addition to the CE mark, the letter "U" together with the Siemens order number has been stamped
on, the coupling part has been delivered by Siemens un or prebored.
Siemens supplies unbored and prebored couplings with CE marking only under the
condition that the customer assumes the responsibility and liability for correct
refinishing in a declaration of exemption.
When using electrically insulating buffers, the marking of the explosion group IIA, IIB
is added.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
12 / 28
2.3 Service conditions
The coupling is suited for service conditions in accordance with Directive 94/9/EC:
• Equipment group II (use above ground) of categories 2 and 3 for areas where there are explosible gas,
vapour, mist, air mixtures as well as for areas where dust can form explosible atmospheres.
• The permissible temperature classes and/or maximum surface temperatures are assigned as
a function of the maximum ambient temperature occurring in the immediate vicinity of the coupling
(see table 5).
Table 5: Temperature classes
Ambient temperature Temperature class maximum surface temperature
maximum 80 °C T4 < 108 °C
• Equipment group I (underground applications) of the category M2.

• Explosion group IIA or IIB in case of electrically insulating flexible elements.
In the case of types with brake drum (RWB and RBS) the module supplier is
responsible for conformity of the brake drum and/or brake with applicable directives.
To be noted are, amongst other things, hazards from electrostatic charging and hot
surfaces.
If they are to be used below ground in potentially explosive areas the couplings must
only be used with drive motors, which can be switched off on occurring of an
explosible atmosphere.
The machines connected by the coupling must be earthed by an earth leakage

resistance < 106 Ω.
If coated couplings are used in potentially explosive areas, the requirements made of
the conductivity of the coating and the limitation on the thickness of the coat applied
must be observed in accordance with DIN EN 134631. Where coatings have a
thickness < 200 μm, no electrostatic charge is to be expected.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
13 / 28
3. Fitting
Coupling parts set up for removal by oilhydraulic shrinkingoff are delivered in a finishmachined state
according to the order,
3.1 Machining the finished bore
Remove bolt (4) and buffer (5)
Depreserve and clean coupling parts (1; 2; 3).
Clamp on surfaces marked with , and align.
Machine the finished bore, observe maximum bore described in section 1.
Check finished bore as described in section 4.
BB
IT6 A
A B
∅D1 / D2
IT6 IT6
∅DB
∅D2
3.2 3.2
1)
IT6 B
2)
Fig. 4: Machining the finished bore

1) Coupling part 1 and coupling part 2
2) Coupling part 3
Table 6: Fit recommendation for bores with parallelkey connection
Push fit Press fit Interference fit
Description
not suitable for reversing operation suitable for reversing operation
Shaft tolerance j6 h6 h6 k6 m6 n6 h6
Bore tolerance H7 J7 K7 H7 H7 H7 M7
The fit assignment m6 / H7 is particularly suitable for many applications.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in breakage of the coupling.
Danger from flying fragments!
The coupling then becomes an explosion hazard.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
14 / 28
3.2 Machining the parallel keyway
Arrangement of the parallel keyway centrally between buffer bores or bolt bores.
• Parallel keyway to DIN 6885/1 ISO JS9 with usual operating conditions.
• Width of parallel keyway ISO P9 with reversing operation.
• Width of parallel keyway ISO P9 with coupling part (3).
3.3 Axial fastening
Arrange set screw on the parallel keyway. Only in case of sizes 105 and 125 place the set screw offset 180°
to the parallel keyway.
Position of the set screw approximately in the middle of the hub, on coupling part 3 under angle of 25°
(see figure 8).
Use threaded studs to DIN 916 with cup points as set screws (setscrew size to table 7).
The set screw should fill out the screw thread as much as possible and must not project beyond the hub.
Alternatively use end plate; as regards recess contact Siemens.
Table 7: Setscrew assignment and tightening torques
Type RWN, RWB, RFN Type RWS, RBS, RFS
Bore range Set-screw Tightening Wrench Bore range Set-screw Tightening Wrench
size torque width size torque width
over up to d1 TA Hexagon over up to d1 TA Hexagon
socket socket
mm mm mm Nm mm mm mm mm Nm mm
8 30 M6 4 3 8 30 M6 4 3
30 38 M8 8 4 30 75 M8 8 4
38 65 M 10 15 5 75 95 M 12 25 6
65 95 M 12 25 6 95 110 M 16 70 8
95 110 M 16 70 8 110 150 M 20 130 10
110 150 M 20 130 10 150 230 M 24 230 12
150 230 M 24 230 12 230 640 M 30 470 14
230 600 M 30 470 14
Tightening torques apply to bolts with untreated surfaces which are not or only lightly oiled (coefficient of
friction μ = 0.14). The use of lubricant paint or lubricant, which affects the coefficient of friction "μ", is not
permitted.
The specified tightening torques TA must be complied with, applying DIN 25202 ScrewConnection
Class "C", with an outputtorque scatter of ± 5 %.
3.4 Balancing after machining the finished bore
The balancing quality is to be specified in accordance with the specific application (however at least G16
to DIN ISO 1940).
Balancing prescription to DIN ISO 8821 of the shaft must be observed.
Balancing bores must not affect the loadbearing capacity of the coupling parts.
The balancing bores must be applied on a large radius with sufficient distance to the buffer bores, bolt
bores and the outer circumference.
The flange must not be completely drilled through. The braking surface of the coupling
part (3) must not be damaged.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
15 / 28
3.5 Placing the coupling parts with cylindrical and conical bore with parallel key
Unscrew the set screw.
Clean the holes and shaft ends.
Coat the bores of the coupling parts (1; 2; 3) and the shafts with MoS2 mounting paste (e.g. Microgleit
LP 405).
Coupling parts (1; 2; 3) with tapered bore and parallelkey connection must be fitted
in cold condition and secured with suitable end plates, without drawing the coupling
parts (1; 2; 3) further onto the taper (fitting dimension = 0).
Place the coupling parts (1; 2; 3); in case of cylindrical bore, heat up to max. + 150 °C, if necessary. When
heating up observe the temperature range of the buffers (5) (see table 5); if necessary demount the buffers
(5).
Heated coupling parts form an explosion hazard, therefor there must not be an
explosible atmosphere when fitting the coupling parts.
Axial securing is effected by means of the set screw or end plate. When securing by set screw the shaft
must not project or be set back from the inner sides of the hub.
Fit the set screw or end plate (tightening torques of the set screw to table 7).
The coupling then becomes an explosion hazard.
3.6 Fitting of coupling parts in case of a cylindrical and tapered interference fit set up for removal by
oilhydraulic shrinkingoff
The information specified on the dimensioned drawing should be observed with
priority.
Unscrew screw plugs (101 / 201 / 301) from the coupling parts (1; 2; 3). Clean and dry holes and shaft ends.
The oil channels and oilcirculation grooves must also be free from dirt.
The machine shaft and the bore of the coupling part (1; 2; 3) must be absolutely clean
and free of grease and oil!
Demount buffers (5).

Protect seals for the input and output side against damage and heating to over + 80 °C.
(Use heat shields to protect against radiant heat.)
The coupling parts (1; 2; 3) must be fitted in hot condition and, depending on the shrink dimension, heated
to the temperature indicated on the dimensioned drawing.
Heating may be done inductively, in a stove or with a burner.
Burner an heated coupling parts form an explosion hazard, therefor there must not be
an explosible atmosphere when fitting the coupling parts.
Before fitting, the bore size of the heated coupling parts (1; 2; 3) must be checked, e.g. with a borehole
gauge.
The coupling parts (1; 2; 3) should be pushed smartly onto the shaft up to the position specified in the
dimensioned drawing.
The coupling parts (1; 2; 3) must be held in position on the shaft with the aid of
a suitable retaining device, until they cool down and seat firmly.
In case of tapered interference fit and non selflocking connection, the axial securing takes place by an end
plate.
After the coupling parts (1; 2; 3) have cooled down to ambient temperature the oil channels must be filled
with clean forcing oil, e.g. ISO VG 150, and resealed with the screw plugs (101 / 201 / 301)
(rust protection).
BA 3600 en 02/2012
16 / 28
3.7 Fitting the coupling
In the case of types RFN and RFS, bolt the coupling part 20 (20) to the counterpart (tightening torques in
accordance with table 10).
If necessary, fit buffer (5) and bolt (4). Observe the temperature range (see table 4).
Bolt and tapered bore must be absolutely clean and free of grease!
Compose balancing groups in accordance with the marking.
Tighten hexagon nuts (7) or bolts (11) using a torque wrench (tightening torques in accordance with
table 9) and secure them with threadlocking medium "mediumfirm" (e.g. Loctite 243). Apply just a small
quantity of Loctite to the bolt (11), otherwise there is a risk that the Loctite may seal the transverse bore.
Align the coupling as described in item 3.8.
3.8 Possible misalignments
Smax. Smax.
ΔKr
ΔKa
ΔKw
Smin. Smin.
1) 2) 3)
Fig. 5: Possible misalignments

1) Axial misalignment (ΔKa)
2) Angular misalignment (ΔKw)
3) Radial misalignment (ΔKr)
3.8.1 Axial misalignment

The gap dimension ΔKa should be set within the deviation permitted for the dimension "S" (see section 1).
3.8.2 Angular misalignment
The angular misalignment ΔKw can be measured as difference of the gap dimension (ΔS = Smax. – Smin.)
ΔSperm., see table 8.
If required, the permissible angular misalignment ΔKw can be calculated as follows:
ΔKwperm. in RAD = ΔSperm. / DA ΔSperm., see table 8.
ΔKwperm. in GRAD = ΔSperm. / DA x 180 / π "DA" in mm, see section 1.
3.8.3 Radial misalignment
The permissible radial misalignment ΔKrperm. can be found in table 8 (depending on the operating speed).
BA 3600 en 02/2012
17 / 28
3.9 Alignment
When aligning, the angular and radial misalignment should be kept as low as possible.
Misalignment values specified in table 8 are maximum permissible overall values in operation, resulting
from mispositioning through imprecision during alignment and misalignment through operation
(e.g. deformation through load, heat expansion).
Reduced misalignment in the coupling minimises expected wear on the flexible elements. Misalignment
in the coupling gives rise to restorative forces which may impose inadmissible stress on adjacent machine
parts (e.g. bearings).
3.10 Shaftmisalignment values during operation
The following maximum permissible misalignments must by no means be exceeded during
operation.
When aligning the angular and radial misalignment should be kept appreciably smaller
(tending towards zero).
Table 8: Shaft misalignment values ΔSperm. and ΔKrperm., maximum permissible during operation,
stated in mm (rounded)
Coupling speed in 1/min
Size
250 500 750 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000
105 0.5 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.1
125 0.55 0.4 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.1 0.1
144 0.6 0.4 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.15 0.1
162 0.65 0.45 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.15 0.15
178 0.7 0.5 0.4 0.35 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.15
198 0.75 0.5 0.4 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15
228 0.8 0.55 0.45 0.4 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.2
252 0.85 0.6 0.5 0.45 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2
285 0.95 0.65 0.55 0.45 0.4 0.3 0.25
320 1.05 0.75 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.35 0.3
360 1.15 0.8 0.65 0.55 0.45 0.4 0.3
400 1.25 0.85 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.45
450 1.35 0.95 0.8 0.7 0.55 0.45
500 1.5 1.05 0.85 0.75 0.6 0.5
560 1.65 1.15 0.95 0.8 0.65 0.55
630 1.85 1.3 1.05 0.9 0.75
710 2.05 1.45 1.15 1 0.8
800 2.25 1.6 1.3 1.1
900 2.5 1.75 1.45 1.25
1000 2.75 1.95 1.6 1.35
1120 3.05 2.15 1.75 1.5
1250 3.4 2.4 1.95
1400 3.75 2.65 2.15
1600 4.3 3
1800 4.8 3.4
2000 5.3 3.75
The numerical values of the table, as well as the intermediate values, can be calculated as follows:
ΔKrperm. = ΔSperm. = (0.1 + DA / 1000) x 40 / √n Coupling speed "n" in 1/min
"DA" in mm, see section 1.
Radial misalignment ΔKrperm. in mm
For speeds < 250 1/min the values in the colon "250 1/min" in table 8 apply.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
18 / 28
3.11 Assignment of the tightening torques and wrench widths
The use of an impact screwdriver is not permissible!
Tightening torques apply to bolts with untreated surfaces which are not or only lightly oiled (coefficient of
friction μ = 0.14). The use of lubricant paint or lubricant, which affects the coefficient of friction "μ", is not
permitted.
The specified tightening torques TA must be complied with, applying DIN 25202 ScrewConnection
Class "C", with an outputtorque scatter of ± 5 %.
The tightening torques and wrench widths of the set screws are specified in table 7.
Table 9: Tightening torques and wrench widths of the screw connection with bolts
162 1120
125 178 228 285 360 450 560 710 900 1250 1800
Size 105 144 252 320 400 500 630 800 1000 1400 2000
198
1600
Tightening
torque TA 8 15 30 55 100 170 180 340 580 600 1150 2000
Wrench width
SW 10 13 17 19 24 27 24 30 36 36 46 55
Hexagon head
Table 10: Tightening torques for bolting coupling part 20 to the counterpart
125 228 320 450
144 178 252 360 500 630
Size 105 198 710 800
162 285 400 560
Bolt size M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
Tightening
torque TA 24.6 48 84 206 415 714 1428 2482
Bolts of strength class 8.8 with a shim to DIN 125 must be used.
4. Startup and operation
Bolttightening torques for the coupling and tightening torques for the foundation
bolts of the coupled machine must be checked before startup. Enclosures (coupling
protection, contact guard) must be fitted!
Overload conditions during startup cannot be excluded. If the coupling breaks
through overload, metal parts may fly off and cause personal injury and/or material
damage.
If it is to be used below ground in potentially explosive areas, the coupling, which is

made of cast iron or steel, must be provided with a robust casing to preclude the risk
of ignition from e.g. friction, impact or friction sparks.
The depositing of heavy metal oxides (rust) on the coupling must be precluded by the
casing or other suitable precautions.
The coupling must run with little noise and without vibration. Irregular behaviour must be treated as a fault
requiring immediate remedy. In case of fault the drive must be stopped at once. The necessary measures
for repair must be taken in accordance with the safety regulations applying.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
19 / 28
5. Faults, causes and remedy
5.1 Possible cause of fault

Change in alignment:
─ Rectify the cause of the change in alignment (e.g. loose foundation bolts).
─ Align the coupling.
─ Check the axial fastening and, if necessary, adjust.
─ Wear check, procedure as described in section 6.
Buffers (5) worn:
─ Check wear of the buffers (5) as described in section 6; if necessary replace the buffers (5).
5.2 Incorrect use

Through incorrect use the coupling may become an explosion hazard.
5.2.1 Frequent faults when selecting the coupling and/or coupling size
• Important information for describing the drive and the environment are not communicated.
• System torque too high.
• System speed too high.
• Application factor not correctly selected.
• Chemically aggressive environment not taken into consideration.
• The ambient temperature is not permissible.
• Finished bore with inadmissible diameter and/or inadmissible assigned fits.
• Machining of parallel keyways of which the width across corners is greater than the width across
corners of the parallel keyways to DIN 6885/1 with a maximum permissible bore.
• The transmission capacity of the shafthub connection is not appropriate to the operating conditions.
• Maximum load or overload conditions are not being taken into consideration.
• Dynamic load conditions are not being taken into consideration.
• Shafthub connection resulting in impermissible material stress on the coupling.
• Operating conditions are being changed without authorisation.
• Coupling and machine / drive train form a critical torsional, axial and bending vibration system.
• Fatigue torque load too high.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
20 / 28
5.2.2 Frequent faults when fitting the coupling
• Components with transport or other damage are being fitted.
• When fitting coupling parts in a heated condition, already fitted RUPEX buffers (5) are being
excessively heated.
• The shaft diameter is beyond the specified tolerance range.
• Coupling parts are being interchanged, i.e. their assignment to the specified shaft is incorrect.
• Specified axial fastenings are not fitted.
• Specified tightening torques are not being adhered to.
• Bolts are inserted dry or greased.
• Flange surfaces of screwed connections have not been cleaned.
• Alignment / shaftmisalignment values do not match those in the instructions manual.
• The coupled machines are not correctly fastened to the foundation, and as a result shifting of the
machines e.g. through loosening of the foundationscrew connection is causing excessive
displacement of the coupling parts.
• The coupled machines are not sufficiently earthed.
• RUPEX buffers are not fitted.
• The coupling guard used is not suitable.
5.2.3 Frequent faults in maintenance
• Maintenance intervals are not being adhered to.
• No genuine RUPEX spare parts are being used.
• Old or damaged RUPEX spare parts are being used.
• The fitted buffers (5) are different.
• Leakage in the vicinity of the coupling is not being identified and as a result chemically aggressive
media are damaging the coupling.
• Fault indications (noise, vibration, etc.) are not being observed.
• Specified tightening torques are not being adhered to.
• Alignment / shaftmisalignment values do not match those in the instructions manual.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
21 / 28
6. Maintenance and repair
6.1 Maintenance interval

The torsional backlash between the two coupling parts must be checked after three
months, then at least once a year.
The buffers (5) must be replaced, when the torsional backlash exceeds the value stated in table 11.
Δ SV
Fig. 6: Wear mark
Table 11: Wear mark for the torsional backlash
125 162 228 285 360 450 560 710 900 1120 1400 1800
Size 105
144 198 252 320 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
Wear mark ΔSV
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 6.0 7.0 8.5 10.0 12.0 13.5 15.0 18.0 20.0
in mm
If the above specified maintenance instructions are not adhered to, a correct operation
within the meaning of the explosionprevention requirements and/or Directive 94/9/EC
can no longer be guaranteed.
Use in potentially explosive areas is then not permitted.

6.2 Replacement of wearing parts

Loosen and remove the heaxagonhead nuts (7) and demount bolts (4) and buffers (5) through the buffer
bores (up to coupling size 400).
Loosen and remove the heaxagonhead nuts (11) and demount bolts (4) and buffers (5) and disks (8)
through the buffer bores (from coupling size 450 on).
After removing the locking ring (12) and the washer (6) the buffers (5) can be removed through the buffer
holes (from coupling size 710 upwards without removing the bolts).
Pull off the buffers (5) and carefully clean the bolts (4) and fitting holes.
The buffers (5) must be replaced in sets. Only identical buffers (5) may be used.
After replacing the buffers (5), assembly is carried out in the reverse order, the screws (11) being resecured
with threadlocking medium "mediumfirm" (e.g. Loctite 243). The selflocking hexagon nuts (7) must be
replaced with new hexagon nuts (7) of the same quality.
For reassembly, the instructions in sections 3 and 4 must be observed.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
22 / 28
6.2.1 Extracting the bolts in the case of coupling sizes 450 to 2000 with the demountijg box
For demounting the bolts Siemens offers a hydraulic extracting device, which can be provided on request.
Observe instructions manual BA 3600.1, "Demounting box for extracting RUPEX
bolts"!
6.2.2 Extracting the bolts in the case of coupling sizes 450 to 2000 with grease
Separate the coupling halves (1; 2; 3) and make them free of load. From coupling size 710 upwards the
locking rings (12) and disks (6) can be removed and the buffers (5) pulled off the bolts (4), if a separation
of the coupling halves (1; 2; 3) is not possible.
Unscrew bolt (11) and remove disk (8). Completely remove Loctite residue from the tapped hole.
Fill the tapped hole of the RUPEX bolt to 90 % with commercially available machine grease (e.g. Fuchs
Renolit H443HD88).
Wind Teflon strip or Teflon sealing cord around the bolt (11) and screw it together with the fitted washer (8)
by your fingers some 2 to 3 threads into the bolt (4).
Wear protective glasses!
For axial securing, disk (8) must imperatively be positioned at bolt (11).
Danger of getting caught by the sudden movement of the bolt (11), disk (8) and by
a sudden release of the bolt (4)!
Sudden release of the bolt is accompanied by a loud noise.
Using a spanner, screw the bolt (11) slowly further into the thread. In this manner the grease is pressed
through the transverse bore between the bolt and bolt bore in the coupling part (1; 2; 3). Screw in slowly,
to enable the grease to spread evenly on the bolt (4). If it is not possible to generate enough pressure,
a longer bolt (minimum strength class 8.8) should be used or, if necessary, grease should be refilled.
Grease must not escape; if it does, the bolt (11) must be resealed.
The extraction operation has finished as soon as the bolt (4) is released from the hole.
Demount all the bolts (4) one after the other in this way.
If reusing the old bolts (4), clean them carefully. No grease or Loctite must be left in the tapped or transverse
bores in the bolts (4).
Apply just a small quantity of Loctite to the screw (11), otherwise there is a risk that the Loctite may seal
the transverse hole.
6.3 Demounting the coupling parts in case of shafthub connection with parallel key
Move the coupled machines apart.
Remove the axial fastening (set screw, end plate). Mount a suitable detaching device. Using a burner, heat
coupling part (1; 2; 3) along its length and above the parallel keyway (max. + 80 °C). When heating up
observe the temperature range of the buffers (5) (see table 5); if necessary demount the buffers (5).
Burner and heated coupling parts (1; 2; 3) form an explosion hazard, therefor there
must not be an explosible atmosphere when fitting the coupling parts.
Pull off coupling part (1; 2; 3). Examine the hub bore and the shaft for damage, and protect against rust.
Damaged parts must be replaced.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
23 / 28
6.4 Demounting the coupling parts in case of a cylindrical and tapered interference fit set up for removal by
oilhydraulic shrinkingoff
Move the coupled machines apart.
Demount buffers (5).
For demounting the following tools are needed:
• For each oil channel (for number, see the dimensioned drawing) an oil pump with pressure gauge
(min. 2 500 bar) or a motor pump with corresponding number of independently closable connections
In case of coupling parts (1; 2; 3) with stepped bore, a motordriven pump must be connected up to the
oil channel located at the point of transition from the smaller bore to the larger, as a large quantity of oil
per unit of time is needed here.
• Suitable connections and pipes.
• 1 detaching device or retaining plate with retaining screws or threaded spindles with nuts (material of
screws and spindles min. 10.9, material of nuts identical to that of the screws).
• 1 hydraulic cylinder with oil pump. Note displacement and pressure of the hydraulic cylinder (for axial
force, consult Siemens or refer to the dimensioned drawing).
Observe manufacturer's instructions for using forcingoff/detaching device and

pumps.
Fit the detaching device.

Secure coupling part (1; 2; 3) and detaching device, using suitable lifting equipment!
In case of tapered interference fit, to prevent the coupling part (1; 2; 3) from suddenly
coming off, it must be secured axially.
The screw plugs (101 / 201 / 301) must be removed from the oil channels. One oil pump must be bled and
connected up to middle oil channel.
Then apply the pressure specified on the dimensioned drawing to the pump until oil emerges from the
adjacent connections or at the end faces.
The maximum pressure specified on the dimensioned drawing must not be exceeded.
During the entire operation the pressure must be maintained at a constant level on all
the oil channels to which pressure is applied.
Bleed the next oil pump, connect it up to the adjacent oil channel and operate it at the pressure specified
on the dimensioned drawing, until oil emerges from the adjacent connections or at the end faces.
If, when pressure is applied, oil emerges to the extent that pressure cannot be maintained, a thicker oil must
be specified.
Only when an unbroken ring of oil emerges from both end faces can pressure be applied to the hydraulic
cylinder to slide the coupling part (1; 2; 3) smartly off the shaft.
All the oil must be completely collected and disposed of in accordance with the regulations applying.
Note stroke of hydraulic cylinder. If readjustment is necessary, the end face of the
hydraulic cylinder must stop between 2 oil channels.
After detaching, the oil pumps and the detaching device must be removed from the coupling part (1; 2; 3).
Examine the hub bore and the shaft for damage, and protect against rust. Damaged parts must be
replaced.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
24 / 28
7. Stocking spare parts
7.1 Spare parts

For ordering spare parts state the following data, as far as possible:
• Siemens order number and position
• Drawing number
• Coupling type and coupling size
• Part numer (see spareparts list)
• Bore, bore tolerance, keyway and balancing as well as particular characteristics such as
flangeconnection dimensions, intermediateshaft length, brakedrum dimensions.
• Any special details such as temperature, electrically insulating.
Table 12: Spareparts list
Type RWN, RWS Type RWB, RBS Type RFN, RFS

Part Part Part
num Designation num Designation num Designation
ber ber ber
1 Coupling part 1 1 Coupling part 1 1 Coupling part 1
2 Coupling part 2 3 Coupling part 3 4 Bolt
4 Bolt 4 Bolt 5 Buffer
5 Buffer 5 Buffer 6 Washer
6 Washer 6 Washer 7 Hexagon nut, selflocking
7 Hexagon nut, selflocking 7 Hexagon nut, selflocking 8 Washer
8 Washer 101 Screw plug 1) 11 Hexagonhead bolt
11 Hexagonhead bolt 301 Screw plug 1) 12 Locking ring
12 Locking ring 20 Coupling part 20
101 Screw plug 1) 101 Screw plug 1)
201 Screw plug 1)
1) The screw plugs (101 / 201 / 301; see fig. 7) are used only with an oilhydraulic interference fit
(see item 3.6).
101
201
301
Fig. 7: Screw plug
BA 3600 en 02/2012
25 / 28
1 2 1 3 1 20
1) 2) 3)
4 6 5 7 4 6 5 8 11 4 12 6 5 8 11
4) 5) 6)
Fig. 8: Spareparts drawing

1) Types RWN, RWS
2) Types RWB, RBS
3) Types RFN, RFS
4) Screw connection with bolts in case of sizes 105 to 400
Up to size 360 the buffers are arranged on one side in coupling part 1. From size 400 onwards
the buffers are located within coupling parts 1 and 2.
BA 3600 en 02/2012
26 / 28
8. Declarations
8.1 EC declaration of conformity
EC declaration of conformity
within the meaning of EC Directive 94/9/EC of 23.03.1994 and the legal requirements laid down for its
implementation
The manufacturer, Siemens AG, 46395 Bocholt, Germany, declares that the equipment described in these
operating instructions:
FLENDER RUPEX®
couplings
Types RWN, RWS, RWB, RBS
and RFN, RFS
is in conformity with Article 1 and Article 8, Paragraph 1 b) ii) of Directive 94/9/EC and complies with the
requirements of Directive 94/9/EC and the following standards:
DIN EN 1127‐1 : 02‐2008

DIN EN 13463-1 : 07-2009
The technical documentation has been delivered to the body named below:
DEKRA EXAM GmbH, 44727 Bochum, Germany, code number: 0158.
Bocholt, 2012‐02‐22
Andre Jansen (Director Engineering KUE)
Bocholt, 2012‐02‐22
Nicola Warning (Director Business Subsegment KU)
BA 3600 en 02/2012
27 / 28
Further Information:
"FLENDER gear units" on the Internet
www.siemens.com/gearunits
"FLENDER couplings" on the Internet

www.siemens.com/couplings
Service & Support:

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10803928/133300
Lubricants:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42961591/133000
Siemens AG Subject to modifications

Industry Sector
Mechanical Drives © Siemens AG 2012
Alfred-Flender-Straße 77
46395 Bocholt
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/drivetechnologies
HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13.5 Operating instructions for temperature sensor

Technical Information
Omnigrad T TR24
Modular RTD assembly
threaded or weld-in compression fitting
Application
• Universal range of application
• Measuring range: -200...600 °C (-328...1112 °F)
• Pressure range up to 50 bar (725 psi)
• Degree of protection: up to IP 68
Head transmitters
All Endress+Hauser transmitters are available with
enhanced accuracy, reliability and cost effectiveness
compared to directly wired sensors. Easy customizing by
choosing one of the following outputs and protocols:
• Analog output 4...20 mA
• HART®
• PROFIBUS® PA
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
Your benefits
• High flexibility due to modular assembly with standard
terminal heads and customized
immersion length
• Fast response time with reduced tip form
• Types of protection for use in hazardous locations:
Intrinsic Safety (Ex ia)
Non-Sparking (Ex nA)
4 0
TI269T/02/en
71079764
TR24
Function and system design

Measuring principle The Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) element has an electrical resistance with a value of 100 Ω at 0 °C
(32 °F). It is commonly known as Pt100 and complies with IEC 60751. This resistance value increases at higher
temperatures according to the characteristics of the resistor material (platinum). These kind of sensors are
called Positive Temperature Coefficient elements (PTC).
The coefficient is fixed with α = 0.00385 °C-1, calculated between 0 and 100 °C (32 and 212 °F), according
to ITS90 (International Temperature Scale).
Wire wound platinum resistance thermometers (WW) consist of hair thin highly purified platinum wire double
wound inside a ceramic carrier. This is then sealed top and bottom with a ceramic protective layer. The
measurements achieved by these resistance thermometers are not only highly reproducible, but also show long
term resistance/temperature characteristic stability within temperature ranges up to 600 °C (1112 °F). This
sensor type is relatively large in its dimensions and is also sensitive to vibration.
Thin film platinum resistance thermometers (TF) consist of a precise amount of platinum which is vaporized
under vacuum onto a ceramic substrate to a thickness of 1 μm. This is then protected by a glass layer. The
advantages are: smaller dimensions than wire wound and greatly improved vibration resistance. Thin film
resistances (TF) are flat, microscopic versions of the wire wound types (WW) with a measurement relevant
difference:
The temperature expansion behavior of the different layers of this structure leads to minimal mechanical stress.
Temperature changes in thin film resistances (TF) cause the desired temperature relevant changes of the
resistance as well as minimal tension stress related resistance changes. Through this the resistance/temperature
characteristic of most thin film platinum resistance thermometers (TF) differs considerably from the standard
characteristics at higher temperatures. Thin film resistances are therefore used for temperature measurement
in ranges below 500 °C (932 °F).
Measuring system
a0009647
Example of an application
A Built-in RTD assembly TR24 with head transmitter

B RIA261 Field display
– The display measures an analog measurement signal and indicates this on the display. The display is connected in a
4 to 20 mA current loop and also derives its supply from the loop. The voltage drop is almost negligible (< 2.5 V).
The dynamic internal resistance (load) makes sure that independently from the loop current, the maximum voltage
drop is never exceeded. The analog signal at the input is digitalized, analyzed, and displayed.
For details see Technical Information (see chapter "Documentation").
C Active barrier RN221N
– The RN221N active barrier (24 V DC, 30 mA) has a galvanically isolated output for supplying voltage to loop powered
transmitters. The power supply has a wide-range input for mains power, 20 to 250 V DC/AC,
50/60 Hz to be used in any electrical circuit. For details see Technical Information (see chapter "Documentation").
2 Endress+Hauser
TR24
Equipment architecture
a0009740
Equipment architecture of the Omnigrad T TR24
1 Insert (∅ 3 mm, 0.12 in) with mounted head 5 Various tip shapes - detailed information see chapter ’tip
transmitter, for example shape’:
2 Insert (∅ 6 mm, 0.24 in) with mounted ceramic 5a Straight for inserts with ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in)
terminal block, for example 5b Straight or reduced for inserts with ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in)
3 Terminal head L Immersion length
4 Compression fittings TA50, TA56, TA70 as process IL Insertion length = L + 35 mm (1.38 in)
connection
The Omnigrad T TR24 RTD assemblies are modular. The terminal head serves as a connection module for the
mechanical and electrical connection of the measuring insert. The actual RTD sensor element is fitted in and
mechanically protected within the insert. The insert can be exchanged and calibrated even during the process.
Either ceramic terminal blocks or transmitters can be fitted to the internal base washer. The TR24 can be fitted
onto a pipe or tank through the use of a compression fitting, which can be chosen from the most common
models (see → ä 11).
Measurement range -200 ... 600 °C (-328...1112 °F) according to IEC 60751
Performance characteristics
Operating conditions Ambient temperature
Terminal head Temperature in °C (°F)
Without mounted head transmitter • Housing, material aluminum -40 to 100 ºC (-40 to 212 °F)
• Housing, material polyamide -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)
With mounted head transmitter -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)
With mounted head transmitter and display -20 to 70 °C (-4 to 158 °F)
Process pressure
! Note!
Maximum process temperature and pressure for using the compression fitting (TA50) or weld in adapter
(TA56, TA70) see chapter ’process connection’, → ä 11.
Permitted flow velocity depending on the immersion length

The highest flow velocity tolerated by the thermometer diminishes with increasing immersion length exposed
to the stream of the fluid. In addition it is dependent on the diameter of the thermometer tip, on the kind of
measuring medium, on the process temperature and on the process pressure. The following figures exemplify
the maximum permitted flow velocities in water and superheated steam at a process pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar
= 145 PSI).
Endress+Hauser 3
TR24
a0010867
Permitted flow velocity

- Insert diameter 3 mm (0.12 in) ------------
- Insert diameter 6 mm (0.24 in) - - - - - -
A Medium water at T = 50 °C (122 °F) L Immersion length

B Medium superheated steam at T = 400 °C (752 °F) v Flow velocity
Shock and vibration resistance

4g / 2 to 150 Hz as per IEC 60068-2-6
Accuracy RTD corresponding to IEC 60751
Class max. Tolerances Temperature range Characteristics

(°C)
RTD max. error type TF - range: -50 to +400 °C
F0.15 0.15 ± 0.002 · |t|1) -50 °C to +250 °C

(Cl. A)
F0.1 0.10 ± 0.0017 · |t|1) 0 °C to +150 °C

(Cl. AA,
former 1/3
Cl. B)
F0.3 (Cl. B) 0.3 ± 0.005 · |t|1) -50 °C to +400 °C
RTD max. error type WW - range: -200 to +600 °C
W0.15 0.15 ± 0.002 · |t|1) -200 °C to +600 °C

(Cl. A)
W0.1 0.10 ± 0.0017 · |t|1) 0 °C to +250 °C

(Cl. AA,
former
1/3 Cl. B)
W0.3 0.3 ± 0.005 · |t|1) -200 °C to +600 °C
(Cl. B)
a0008588-en
1) |t| = absolute value °C
4 Endress+Hauser
TR24
! Note!
For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equations above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Response time Tests in water at 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s), according to IEC 60751; 10 K temperature step changes:
Insert diameter Response time
6 mm (0.24 in) t50 3.5 s

t90 8s
3 mm (0.12 in) t50

t90 2s
6 mm (0.24 in) / 3 mm (0.12 in) t50 5s
t90
! Note!
Response time for the sensor assembly without transmitter.
Insulation resistance Insulation resistance ≥100 MΩ at ambient temperature.

Insulation resistance between each terminal and the sheath is tested with a voltage of 100 V DC.
Self heating RTD elements are passive resistances that are measured using an external current. This measurement current
causes a self heating in the RTD element itself which in turn creates an additional measurement error. In
addition to the measurement current the size of the measurement error is also affected by the thermal
conductivity and flow velocity of the process. This self heating error is negligible when an Endress+Hauser
iTEMP® temperature transmitter (very small measurement current) is connected.
Calibration specifications The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibration from -80 to +600 °C (-110 °F to 1112 °F)
based on the International Temperature Scale (ITS90). Calibrations are traceable to national and international
standards. The calibration report is referenced to the serial number of the thermometer.
Ø 6 mm (0.24), Ø 3 mm (0.12 in) or reduced tip shape Minimum immersion length L in mm (inch)
Temperature range With or without head transmitter

-80 °C to -40 °C (-110 °F to -40 °F) 200 (7.87)
-40 °C to 0 °C (-40 °F to 32 °F) 160 (6.3)
0 °C to 250 °C (32 °F to 480 °F) 120 (4.72)

250 °C to 550 °C (480 °F to 1020 °F) 300 (11.81)
Material
Material Short description max. application Characteristics

temperature
SS 316L/1.4404 X2CrNiMo 17 13 2 800 °C (1472 °F) • Austenitic, stainless steel

• High corrosion resistance
• High resistance at low temperatures
• Optimal corrosion resistance in an acid, non oxydizing environment
(e.g. phosphorous and sulphuric acids in low concentration and at low temperatures)
– Not resistant to chloride at high temperatures
Endress+Hauser 5
TR24
Transmitter specifications
TMT180 TMT181 TMT182 TMT84 PA / TMT85 FF

PCP PCP HART®
Pt100 Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV
Measurement accuracy 0.2 °C (0.36 °F), optional 0.2 °C (0.36 °F) or 0.08% 0.1 °C (0.18 °F)
0.1 °C (0.18 °F) or 0.08%
% is related to the adjusted measurement range (the larger value applies)
Sensor current Ι ≤ 0.6 mA Ι ≤ 0.2 mA Ι ≤ 0.3 mA
Galvanic isolation (input/output) - Û = 2 kV AC
Transmitter long-term ≤ 0.1 °C/year (≤ 0.18 °F / year) or ≤ 0.05% / year

stability Data under reference conditions; % relates to the set span. The larger value applies.
System components
Family of temperature Thermometers fitted with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready complete solution to improve
transmitters temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability, when compared to direct wired sensors, as
well as reducing both wiring and maintenance costs.
PC programmable head transmitter TMT180 and TMT181

They offer you extreme flexibility and help control costs with the ability to stock devices and program them for
your needs. Regardless of your choice of output, all iTEMP® transmitters can be configured quickly and easily
with a PC. To help you with this task, Endress+Hauser offers free software ReadWin® 2000 which can be
downloaded from the website www.readwin2000.com. Details see Technical Information (see chapter
’Documentation’).
HART® TMT182 head transmitter

HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting better information more
inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control system and provide painless
access to preventative diagnostic information.
Configuration with a DXR275 or 375 hand-held or a PC with configuration program (FieldCare, ReadWin®
2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. Details see Technical Information (see chapter ’Documentation’).
Type of transmitter Specification
iTEMP® TMT18x • Material: Housing (PC), Potting (PUR)

• Terminals: Cable up to max. max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG (secure screws) or
with wire end ferrules
• Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator
clips
• Degree of protection NEMA 4 (see also type of terminal head)
Details see Technical Information (see chapter ’Documentation’)
R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-en-001
PROFIBUS® PA TMT84 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS® PA communication. Converting various input
signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy over the complete ambient temperature range. Swift and easy
operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC directly from the control panel, e. g. using operating
software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS.
6 Endress+Hauser
TR24
Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments, mathematic functions,
thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, sensor diagnosis functions and sensor-transmitter
matching using Callendar-Van Dusen coefficients. Details see Technical Information (see chapter
! Note!
The previous model PROFIBUS® PA TMT184 head transmitter will be available for a transition time.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ TMT85 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus™ communication. Converting
various input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy over the complete ambient temperature range.
Swift and easy operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC directly from the control panel, e. g. using
operating software such as ControlCare from Endress+Hauser or the NI Configurator from National
Instruments.
Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments, mathematic functions,
thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, sensor diagnosis functions and sensor-transmitter
matching using Callendar-Van Dusen coefficients. Details see Technical Information (see chapter
Type of transmitter Specification
iTEMP® TMT84 and TMT85 • Spring range L ≥ 5 mm (0.2"), see Pos. A

• Fixing elements for pluggable measured value display, see Pos. B
• Interface for contacting measured value display, see Pos. C
• Material (RoHS-compliant)
Housing: PC
Potting: PU
• Terminals:
Screw terminals (cable up to max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG)
or spring terminals (e. g. from 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2/ 24 AWG to 18 AWG
for flexible wires with wire-end ferrules with plastic ferrule)
• Degree of protection NEMA 4 (see also type of terminal head)
a0007301-en
Details see Technical Information (see chapter ’Documentation’)
Pluggable display TID10 as option • Displays the actual measured value and the measurement point identification
• Displays fault events in inverse color with channel ident and diagnostics code
• DIP-switches on the rear for hardware set-up, e. g. PROFIBUS® PA bus
address
a0009955
Endress+Hauser 7
TR24
Terminal heads All terminal heads have internal geometry according to DIN 43729, form B and thermometer connection
M24x1.5.
All dimensions in mm (inch). All cable gland dimensions in the graphics are based on SKINTOP ST M20x1.5
TA30A Specification
• Degree of protection: IP66/68

107.5 (4.23)
• Tapped hole spacing: 33 mm (1.30") for the measuring insert
• Max. temperature: 150 °C (300 °F)
• Material: aluminum, polyester powder coated
70 (2.76)
Seals: EPDM-70
15.5 (0.6)
• Cable entry incl. glands: ½" NPT and M20x1.5, only thread: G ½",
plugs: M12x1 PA, 7/8" FF
• Protection armature connection: M24x1.5
• Head color: blue RAL 5012
• Cap color: grey RAL 7035
28
(1.1) • Weight: 330 g (11.64 oz)
78 (3.1) • LABS - free
a0009820
TA30A with display window Specification

Seals: EPDM-70
• Weight: 420 g (14.81 oz)
• Head transmitter optional with TID10 display
a0009821
TA30D Specification

Seals: EPDM-70
• Two head transmitters can be mounted
• Weight: 390 g (13.75 oz)
• LABS - free
a0009822
8 Endress+Hauser
TR24
TA20B Specification
• Degree of protection: IP65

• Material: polyamide (PA)
• Cable entry: M20x1.5
• Head and cap color: black
• Weight: 80 g (2.82 oz)
a0008663
TA21E Specification
• Degree of protection: IP65

• Max. temperature: 130 °C (266 °F) silicone, 100 °C (212 °F)
rubber (observe max. permitted temperature of the cable gland!)
• Material: aluminum alloy with polyester or epoxy coating; rubber
or silicone seal under the cover
• Cable entry: M20x1.5 or plug M12x1 PA
• Protection armature connection: M24x1.5, G ½" or NPT ½"
• Weight: 300 g (10.58 oz)
a0008669
TA20J Specification
• Degree of protection: IP66/IP67

• Material: 316L (1.4404) stainless steel, rubber seal under the
cover (hygienic design)
• 4 digits 7-segments LC display (loop powered)
• Cable entry: ½" NPT, M20x1.5 or plug M12x1 PA
• Protection armature connection: M24x1.5 or ½" NPT
• Head and cap color: stainless steel, polished
• Weight: 650 g (22.93 oz) with display
• Humidity: 25 to 95%, no condensation
The programming is executed through 3 keys at the bottom of the
display.
a0008866
* dimensions with optional display
Endress+Hauser 9
TR24
TA20R Specification

• Material: SS 316L (1.4404) stainless steel
• Cable entry: ½" NPT, M20x1.5 or plug M12x1 PA
• Head and cap color: stainless steel
• Weight: 550 g (19.4 oz)
• LABS - free
a0008667
Assembly All dimensions in mm (inches).
a0009747
Dimensions of the Omnigrad T TR24
A Model with terminal block mounted ∅ ID Insert diameter 6 mm (0.24 in) or 3 mm (0.12 in)
B Model with head transmitter mounted IL Insertion length = L + 35 mm (1.38 in)
C Model with flying leads L Immersion length
D Compression fittings (see ’Process connection’)
Tip shape
Tip shape Insert Diameter
Reduced ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) / ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in) x 50 mm (1.97 in)

Straight ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) or ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in)
Weight From 0.5 to 2.5 kg (1 to 5.5 lbs) for standard options.
10 Endress+Hauser
TR24
Process connection The process connection is the connection between the process and the thermometer. When using a
compression fitting the thermometer is pushed through a gland and fixed using a compression ferrule (can be
loosened) or a metal ferrule (cannot be loosened). The gland is either screwed or welded in the tank or pipe.
Process connection
Threaded compression fitting (TA50) Weld in compression fitting Weld in adapter (TA70)
(TA56)
a0009767
Model F in mm L in mm C in mm B in mm Material Max. process temperature Max. process pressure

(inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) ferrule
TA50 G½" 47 (1.85) - 15 (0.6) SS3161) 800 °C (1472 °F) 40 bar at 20 °C (580 psi at 68 °F)
2)
PTFE 200 °C (392 °F) 10 bar at 20 °C (145 psi at 68 °F)
1)
½" NPT 50 (1.97) - 20 (0.8) SS316 800 °C (1472 °F) 40 bar at 20 °C (580 psi at 68 °F)
PTFE2) 200 °C (392 °F) 10 bar at 20 °C (145 psi at 68 °F)
2)
TA56 Weld-in 30 (1.18) 18 (0.71) - PEEK 200 °C (392 °F) 140 bar at 20 °C (2030 psi at 68 °F)
25 (0.98)
TA70 Weld-in 76 (3) 34 (1.34) - Viton® 2) 180 °C (356 °F) 20 bar at 20 °C (290 psi at 68 °F)
30 (1.18)
1) SS316 compression ferrule: Can only be used once, the compression fitting cannot be repositioned on the protection tube after loosening. Fully adjustable
immersion length on initial installation.
2) PTFE/PEEK/Viton® compression ferrule: Can be reused, after loosening the fitting can be moved up and down the protection tube. With fully adjustable
immersion length.
More available versions see Technical information ’TA fittings & sockets’ (TI091t/02/en) and on request.
Spare parts The RTD insert is available as spare part TPR100 (see Technical Information in chapter ’Documentation’).
If spare parts are required, refer to the following equation: Insertion length IL = L + 35 mm (1.38 in)
Spare part Material-No.
Gasket set M24x1.5, aramid+NBR (10 pieces) 60001329
Ferrules set for TA50, ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in), G1/8" and G¼", SS 316 (5 pieces) 60011575
Ferrules set for TA50, ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in), G1/8" and G¼", PTFE (5 pieces) 60011598
Ferrules set for TA50, ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in), G¼", G3/8", G½" and G¾", SS 316 (5 pieces) 60011599
Endress+Hauser 11
TR24
Wiring
Wiring diagrams Type of sensor connection
Head mounted transmitter TMT18x (single input)
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000
Head mounted transmitter TMT84 and TMT85 (dual input)
a0008848-en
Terminal block mounted
a0008591-en
12 Endress+Hauser
TR24
Installation conditions
Orientation No restrictions.
Installation instructions
a0009762
Installation examples
A - B: In small nominal bore pipes the tip should reach or extend slightly past the center line of the pipe (= L).
C - D: Angled installation.
The immersion length of the thermometer influences the accuracy. If the immersion length is too small then
errors in the measurement are caused by heat conduction via the process connection and the container wall.
If installing into a pipe then the immersion length must be at least half of the pipe diameter.
• Installation possibilities: Pipes, tanks or other plant components
• Minimum immersion length = 80 to 100 mm (3.15 to 3.94 in)
The immersion length must be at least 8 times the protection tube diameter. Example: Protection tube
diameter 12 mm (0.47 in) x 8 = 96 mm (3.8 in). Recommended standard immersion length according to
DIN 43772: 120 mm (4.72 in)
• ATEX certification: Always take note of the installation regulations!
! Note!
When operating in small nominal bore pipes it must be guaranteed that the protection tube tip is long enough
to extend past the pipe center line (see Pos. A and B). A further solution could be an angled (tilted) installation
(see Pos. C and D). When determining the immersion length all thermometer parameters and the process to
be measured must be taken into account (e.g. flow velocity, process pressure).
Endress+Hauser 13
TR24
Neck tube length The neck tube is the part between the process connection and the housing. It is normally made of a tube with
dimensional and physical characteristics (diameter and material) which are the same as of the tube in contact
with the medium.
The connection situated in the upper part of the neck allows for orientation of the terminal head.
As illustrated in the following figure, the neck tube length may influence the temperature in the terminal head.
It is necessary that this temperature is kept within the limit values defined in the chapter "Operating
conditions".
a0008623-en
Heating of the terminal head consequent to the process temperature
Certificates and approvals

CE Mark The device meets the legal requirements of the EC directives if applicable. Endress+Hauser confirms that the
device has been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.
Hazardous area approvals For further details on the available Ex versions (ATEX, CSA, FM, etc.), please contact your Endress+Hauser
sales organization. All relevant data for hazardous areas can be found in separate Ex documentation.
Other standards and • IEC 60529:

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP-Code).
• IEC 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical measurement, control and laboratory instrumentation.
• IEC 60751:
Industrial platinum resistance thermometer
• DIN43772:
Protection tubes
• EN 50014/18, DIN 47229:
Terminal heads
• IEC 61326-1:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
PED approval The thermometer complies with paragraph 3.3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/CE) and is not
marked separately.
Test report and calibration The "Factory calibration" is carried out in an EA (European Accreditation) authorized laboratory of
Endress+Hauser according to an internal procedure. A calibration may be requested separately according to an
EA accredited procedure (SIT calibration). Calibration is carried out on the thermometer insert.
14 Endress+Hauser
TR24
Ordering information
Product structure RTD thermometer TR24
Approval:
A Non-hazardous area
B ATEX II 1 GD EEx ia IIC
E ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC
G ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC
H ATEX II 3 GD EEx nA II
Head; Cable Entry:

B TA30A Alu, IP66/IP68; M20
C TA30A Alu, IP66/IP68; NPT ½"
D TA30A Alu, IP66/IP67; M12 plug PA
E TA21E Alu, screw cap IP65; M20
F TA30A Alu+display, IP66/IP68; M20
G TA30A Alu+display, IP66/IP68; NPT ½"
H TA30A Alu+display, IP66/IP67; M12 plug PA
J TA20J 316L, IP66/IP67; M20
K TA20J 316L, + display, IP66/IP67; M20
M TA20J 316L, IP66/IP67; M12 plug PA
N TA20R 316L, screw cap IP66/IP67; M20 silicone free
O TA30D Alu, high cover, IP66/IP68; M20
P TA30D Alu, high cover, IP66/IP68; NPT ½"
Q TA30D Alu, IP66/IP67; M12 plug PA
R TA20R 316L screw cap IP66/IP67; M20
S TA20R 316L screw cap IP66; M12 plug
T TA30A Alu, IP66/IP67; 7/8" plug FF
U TA30A Alu+display, IP66/IP67; 7/8" plug FF
V TA30D Alu, IP66/IP67; 7/8" plug FF
7 TA20B PA black, IP65; M20
Insert Diameter:
1 3 mm; 316L
2 6 mm; 316L
5 6 mm; 316L, reduced 3x50 mm
Compression fitting; Ferrule:

A Not needed
B Threaded TA50, G½" 316; 316, max. 800 °C
C Threaded TA50, G½" 316; PTFE max. 200 °C
D Threaded TA50, NPT ½" 316; 316
E Threaded TA50, NPT ½" 316; PTFE
F Weld-in spheric TA56, D=25 mm 316L; PEEK 200 °C
G Weld-in cylindric, D=30 mm 316L; Silopren
Immersion Length L:
B 80 mm
D 120 mm
F 175 mm
H 235 mm
K 275 mm
L 335 mm
M 365 mm
N 425 mm
X .... mm
Y .... mm, as specified
Head Transmitter; Range:

B TMT84 PA
C Terminal block
D TMT85 FF
F Flying leads
G TMT181 (PCP); temp. range to be specified
H TMT182 (HART); temp. range to be specified
2 TMT180-A21 fix; 0.2 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -200/650 °C
3 TMT180-A22 fix; 0.1 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -50/250 °C
4 TMT180-A11 PCP; 0.2 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -200/650 °C
5 TMT180-A12 PCP; 0.1 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -50/250 °C
Endress+Hauser 15
TR24
RTD; wire; meas. range; class; validity:

A 1x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
B 2x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
C 1x Pt100 WW; 4; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
F 2x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; 1/3B; 0/250 °C
G 1x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; 1/3B; 0/250 °C
Y Special version, to be specified
2 1x Pt100 TF; 3; -50/400 °C; A; -50/250 °C increas. vibr. resistance
3 1x Pt100 TF; 4; -50/400 °C; A; -50/250 °C increas. vibr. resistance
6 1x Pt100 TF; 3; -50/400 °C; 1/3B; 0/150 °C increas. vibr. resistance
7 1x Pt100 TF; 4; -50/400 °C; 1/3B; 0/150 °C increas. vibr. resistance
Material Certificate:
0 Not needed
9 Special version, to be specified
Test/Calibration:
A 0, 100 °C, RTD-Signal
B 0, 100 °C, 4-20 mA/loop
C 0, 100 °C, RTD-Signal, 2 Sensors
E 0, 100, 150 °C, RTD-Signal
F 0, 100, 150 °C, RTD-Signal, 4-20 mA/loop
G 0, 100, 150 °C, RTD-Signal, 2 Sensors
0 Not needed
Additional option:
0 Not needed
9 Special version, to be specified
TR24- ← Order code (complete)
This ordering information can give an overview about the available order options. The Endress+Hauser sales
organization can provide detailed ordering information and information on the order code.
Documentation
Technical information:
• RTD Insert for Temperature Sensor Omniset TPR100 (TI268t/02/en)
• TA fittings and sockets Omnigrad TA50, TA55, TA60, TA70, TA75 (TI091t/02/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT84 PA (TI138r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT85 FF (TI134r/09/en)
Hazardous area supplementary documentation:
• Omnigrad TRxx RTD Thermometer ATEX II1GD or II 1/2GD (XA072r/09/a3)
Omnigrad TRxx/TCxx RTD/TC Thermometer ATEX II 3GD (XA044r/09/a3)
Application example Technical Information:

• Field display RIA261 (TI083r/09/en)
• Active barrier with power supply RN221N (TI073R/09/en)
16 Endress+Hauser
TR24
TR24
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel. +41 61 715 81 00

Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI269T/02/en/12.08
71079764
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13.6 Operating instructions for vibrocontrol

VIBROCONTROL 1100
C01 / C02 / C11 / C12
Technische Dokumentation
Technical Documentation
Documentation Technique
C 102 844.002
All rights reserved.
No part of this technical documentation may be reproduced
without prior written permission of Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Copyright 20 by Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH, D-64293

Contents VC 1100
Contents
VIBROCONTROL 1100 - C01 / C02 / C11 / C12
1 Overview
2 Technical Data
3 Connectors and Interfaces
4 Built-in Operating Panel and Display

Error messages
5 List of Setup Parameters
6 Installation and Commissioning
© VC1100E/contents C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6  Dec. 2009 C 102 844.002 Page 1 of 2
VC 1100 Contents
Instrument types - Overview
Instrument Type Supply Voltage Bearing Condition
230 V AC
VC 1100 C01 YES
115 V AC
VC 1100 C02 24 V DC YES
230 V AC
VC 1100 C11 NO
115 V AC
VC 1100 C12 24 V DC NO
The instrument types C01, C02, C11 and C12 listed in the table above are described in the
VIBROCONTROL 1100 documentation.
Apart from the bearing condition, which is not applicable to the instrument types C11 and
C12, the descriptions for all instruments are the same.
Page 2 of 2 Dec. 2009 © VC1100E/contents C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 

Overview VC 1100
1 Overview
VIBROCONTROL 1100 is a 2 channel microprocessor controlled machine
condition monitor. Vibration velocity sensors or vibration acceleration
sensors (accelerometers) are used to sense the vibrations from a machine.
ATTENTION
If the VIBROCONTROL 1100 was converted to a CCS version, only
constant current-supplied acceleration sensors can be attached!
Consider the supplement page!
VIBROCONTROL 1100 is a compact machine monitor. All components, like

power supply, connectors, signal conditioners, microprocessor and operator
panel are integrated to one splash-proofed housing.
1
SE VIBROCONTROL 1100 SE
25
1 TE=0V internal RS 232 25 TD1
2 (Data 26 RD1 26
2 intern
3 only) 27
+ 3 Output 1 27 SG1
4 4 Ausgang 1 28 TD2 28
5 + 5 Output 2 29 RD2 29
6 6 Ausgang 2 30 SG2 30
7 31
7 Buffer A 31
32
8 8 OK-Relais 32 BA
33
9 9 Buffer B 33
34
10 10 34 BB
35
11 11 Relais K1 Reset 35
36 36
12 12
Esc P M/Ent
13 13
14 14 Relais K2
15 37
15 Pickup 37 DC
16 Chan. A 38 38
16
Aufn.
39
17 17 Relais K3 Kanal A 39 COM
18 40 SIG 40
18
19 L 19 Power supply
20 20 Versorgungs-
spannung
21
PE 21 Jumper Pickup 41 DC 41
22 Brücke Chan. B 42
22 42
230/115Vac Aufn.
23 23 Serien Nr. Kanal B 43 COM 43
N 24 Series no. 44 SIG
24 44
N° de serie
VC11TOTA (951030)
Figure 1-1: Top view of a VIBROCONTROL 1100 with cover removed
VIBROCONTROL 1100 is complete; there are no options. Three alarm

relays, one OK-relay, two analog outputs, two buffered outputs, remote I/O
interface, and signal conditioners are built-in.
There are no jumpers or potentiometers. All functions are completely
microprocessor controlled and are configured using the built-in operator
panel or via the remote interface with a computer or process controller.
The wiring is done through removable terminal strip connectors.

Vibration analyzers or data collectors can be connected to the buffered
outputs without interrupting the monitoring functions.
© VC1100E/overview C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 Dec. 2009 1-1

VC 1100 Overview
Measured Values
Displayed Parameters
The measured values can be displayed in metric or English units:
Measured Parameter Abbreviation Unit

Vibration Displacement s mm mils
Velocity v mm/s ips
Vibration Acceleration a g m/s2
If accelerometers are used, the Bearing Condition of rolling element

bearings can be measured and monitored.
The unit for Bearing Condition is BCU.
Bearing Condition --- BCU
BCU Scaling Factor

Due to the BCU scaling factor, the BCU measuring result can be multiplied
with a factor. This factor is determined with parameter J19 for channel A and
J20 for channel B in the range between 0.1 and 10. Factor 1 displays the
measuring result not scaled.
The BCU scaling factor makes it possible to set the measuring result to a
defined inital value in order to compare several measuring points. The BCU
scaling factor is to be employed preferrably with new bearings.
Note:
The selected scaling factor must be considered when setting the BCU limit
value. If for instance the measuring result is divided by two due to the
scaling factor, also the limit value must be divided by two.
1-2 Dec. 2009 © VC1100E/overview C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 

Overview VC 1100
Example how to use the BCU scaling factor

In case of BCU measurements, the measuring result depends on various
factors, e.g. on the place of the sensor installation, on the type of connection
(e.g. tightening torque of the sensor) etc. The consequence may be different
measuring results with identical machines and the same bearing condition
units.
To enable a clear comparison of the single measuring points (change of the
bearing condition over a longer measuring period), by means of the BCU
scaling factor (parameters J19, J20) the measuring results can be set to the
same initial value (desired value at the beginning of the measurement) for
each measuring point.
Carry out scaling

Input the scaling factor 1 for the respective measuring points.
Acquire the current measuring result.
From the desired BCU initial value and the current measuring result of the
respective measuring point, the BCU scaling factor J19 or J20 is calculated
with the following formula:
desired initial value

J 19 
current measuring result
After the parameter input of all scaling factors, the respective measuring
point must display the desired BCU initial value.
BCU averaging
The BCU value may vary depending on the operating conditions of a
machine, for example due to varying loading conditions.
A defective anti-friction element which regulary changes its position in such
a way that the damaged part comes into contact with the bearing running
surface only after several revolutions, will also cause varying BCU values.
Variations of that kind do not allow the conclusion that the bearing is
damaged.
The measured value can be averaged by means of a filter with settable time
constant (averaging time 10 ... 3600 secs.) in order that these "variations"
(which do not represent the normal condition of the machine) don't cause an
alarm message.
The bigger the selected averaging time
 the more stable the measured value (particularly important for trend
considerations)
 the more delayed the response behaviour of the limit value monitoring.
The averaging be switched on and off separately for channel A and channel
B (parameters J15 ... J18).

VC 1100 Overview
Measuring Ranges
The measuring ranges are microprocessor controlled and can be selected
continuously within the limits defined in the following table:
Sensor : Vibration acceleration sensor

Signal detection : Root mean sqare value
Measured Parameter Measuring Range Unit

Min Max
Vibration Acceleration 0 ... 4.00 0 ... 800 m/s2
g
0 ... 0.40 0 ... 80.0
Vibration Velocity 0 ... 5.00 0 ... 999 mm/s
0 ... 0.20 0 ... 40.0 ips
Sensor : Vibration Velocity sensor

Signal detection : Root mean sqare value

Min Max
Vibration Velocity 0 ... 5.00 0 ... 150 mm/s
0 ... 0.20 0 ... 6.00 ips
Vibration Displacement 0 ... 50.0 0 ... 333 m
0 ... 2.00 0 ... 13.3 mils
Multiply values by 1.41 for peak-values and by 2.82 for peak-to-peak values.
The largest acceptable number is 999.
The measuring ranges for BCU-Monitoring are independent of the

measuring ranges for vibration monitoring.

Min Max
Bearing Condition 0 ... 1.00 0 ... 140 BCU

Overview VC 1100
Filters
Machine vibrations are sensed by the vibration velocity sensors or
accelerometers. Which sensor to use depends on the application. The
following table lists the filters that may be used with the different measured
parameters and sensor types:
Measured Parameter Transducer Filter

v a
Vibration displacement x 10 Hz ... 1000 Hz
Vibration Velocity x x 1 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x x 3 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x x 10 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x 10 Hz ... 10 kHz
Vibration Acceleration x 3 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x 10 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x 3 Hz ... 10 kHz
10 Hz ... 10 kHz
Bearing Condition x 15 Hz ... 50 kHz
Sensor : v = Vibration Velocity Sensor

a = Accelerometer
*) Fulfills the requirements of International Standard ISO 2372
Signal Conditioning and Signal Detection Type

The built-in signal conditioners are microprocessor controlled. Gain factors,
filters, and the integrator are set automatically. The settings are determined
by the microprocessor from the configuration.
Linearization
The characteristic of vibration velocity sensors is not linear in the lower
frequency range, i.e. with frequencies around 10 Hz.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 corrects this nonlinearity with a built-in linearization
circuit (Standard fo = 8 Hz / the special design fo = 15 Hz is identifield by an
adhesive label inside the instruments). The result is a linear frequency
response characteristic for the total measuring system down to 1 Hz.
The linearization circuit can be activated or deactivated by means of
parameter input (IO6).
Settling Time and Cycle Times

Electronic components like amplifiers, filters, etc. need a certain amount of
time to provide the correct output signal after the input signal has been
switched or changed.
This time is called settling time. Components used to measure low
frequencies have longer settling times than components used to measure
higher frequencies.

VC 1100 Overview
VIBROCONTROL 1100
can be configured as a single channel monitor or a 2 channel monitor.
Single Channel Monitor (Vibration and Bearing Condition)

Operating as a single channel monitor, settling times are not required, since
the vibration signal is not switched from channel A to channel B. The
configuration, filter characteristic and gain, etc. of the Vibration Signal
Conditioner and the Bearing Condition Detector do not need to be changed;
therefore the vibration signal is measured continuously.
Cycle Time: Built-in Display 0.5 s

Alarm level comparison 0.25 s
2 Channel Monitor (Vibration)

The vibration signals of channel A and B are switched alternately
(multiplexed) to the Vibration Signal Conditioner.
For each switch between channel A and B, the Vibration Signal Conditioner
is automatically re-configured and settling times are required.
The total time for one measurement consists of the settling time and the
measurement time. The measurement time is always 3 seconds.
Outside the measuring times, the current display values of the other channel
are frozen, the current measured value, however, is monitored in intervals of
0.25 seconds.
The following table shows the settling times and the cycle times (sum of
settling and measuring time) for different functions and setups of the
Vibration Signal Conditioner. Different setups can be used for channel A and
B. The total cycle time is the sum of the cycle times for channel A and B.
Activated Function Settling Time Cycle Time

High Pass Filter: 1 Hz 1.75 s 4.75 s
High Pass Filter: 3 Hz 1.00 s 4.00 s
High Pass Filter.: 10 Hz ISO 1.25 s 4.25 s
High Pass Filter: Special 1.75 s 4.25 s
Integrator 6.00 s 9.00 s
Linearization Circuit: 5.75 s 8.75 s
If more than one function has been selected, the function with the longest
settling time determines the total settling time.
2 Channel Monitor (Vibration and Bearing Condition)

Since VIBROCONTROL 1100 is equipped with a Bearing Condition
Detector, the measurement of Bearing Condition is independent of the
vibration measurement.
The settling time is 2.75 s and the measuring time is 1.25 s.

Overview VC 1100
Monitoring
Each measuring channel has three limit values. Two limit values for
monitoring the vibration level, (lim_1 and lim_2), and one limit value for
Bearing Condition (lim_b). Each limit value can be set individually.
Each limit value can be set to any value between 10 % and 100 % of the
measuring range. Larger or smaller limit values are not accepted and will
generate an error message
For each limit value an alarm delay time between 1 and 99 seconds can be
selected. Limit value exceedance is only acknowledged if the monitored
signal remains above the limit value for a period of time longer than the
selected delay time. When acknowledged, the event in entered into the 'Log
Book', and if it is configured to do so, the appropriate relay trips
In the 2 channel mode the alarm delay time is related to the measurement
cycle of the appropriate channel. Two cases have to be considered:
Case 1
The measured value exceeds the limit value and the alarm delay time is
shorter than the remaining measurement time of this cycle. If the measured
value stays above the limit value, the alarm event is acknowledged after the
alarm delay time.
Case 2
The measured value exceeds the limit value and the alarm delay time is
longer than the remaining measurement time of this cycle. At the end of the
measurement cycle, the alarm delay time is suspended. If the measured
value still exceeds the limit value at the beginning of the next measurement
cycle, the alarm delay time is resumed. This procedure is continued until the
end of the alarm delay time. At this point the alarm event is acknowledged.
In case 2 the alarm delay time is prolonged by the measurement cycle of the
other channel.
Log Book
All events are stored in a circular buffer using short notation. This buffer can
store up to 99 events.
Events are:
Power Up; limit value exceedance; reset instructions; and internal errors
detected by the self monitoring.
If the Log Book capacity is exceeded, the "oldest" event is deleted and all
stored events are shifted one position, freeing space to store the new event.
The Log Book can be displayed on the built-in display or read via the remote
interface.
Each Log Book entry begins with an "H", (for History) followed by a two digit
running number and a 'short' notation of the event.

VC 1100 Overview
Example:
H03 K1 Lim1 A
Meaning:
H03 Label of Log Book entry
K1 Relay K1 tripped
Lim1 A because limit value lim_1 of channel A has been exceeded.
The Log Book is deleted every time the VIBROCONTROL 1100 is powered
up. It can also be deleted using the built-in operator panel or via the serial
interface.
Relays
Three relays are provided which are activated on alarm exceedance if so
programmed.
They are designated as K1, K2, and K3.
Programming the Relays

Relay operation is defined by the setup parameters:
1. Which limit value controls which relay.
2. Latching or Non-Latching Mode.
3. Energized or de-energized Operation.
4. Control a relay by combining several limit values using a logical OR or
AND statement.
Comment to 1.
Limit value exceedances can be configured as single events or grouped
events.
A configuration that is commonly used is, lim_1A and lim_1B control relay
K1, and lim_2A and lim_2B control relay K2.
Comment to 2.
Latching Mode
The relay remains latched (tripped) until it is reset using the control panel,
reset switch, or via the remote interface.
Non-Latching Mode
The relay is automatically reset when the measured value drops below the
limit value.

Overview VC 1100
Comment to 3.
This choice depends on the user's philosophy. What is important though, is
preventing a false relay trip if power to the VIBROCONTROL 1100 is
disconnected.
Mode No Alarm Alarm

Normally Energized Relay active Relay not active
Normally De-Energized Relay not active Relay active
Comment to 4.
AND
Several limit values control one relay. This relay is tripped only if all limit
values are exceeded.
OR
Several limit values control one relay. This relay is tripped if at least one limit
value is exceeded.
Note:
If a measuring channel or a limit value has been set to "not active" ("N") and
this limit value is combined with an AND, this logical condition can never
become "true". Therefore the alarm indication can never be activated.
OK-Monitoring
The OK-Monitoring is used to report malfunctions and/or data failure of the
program and data stores, electric damages or the failure of the sensor and
its connection lines. The monitoring covers an "External range recording" of
the vibration signal. Errors caused by cable breakage, short circuit or earth
fault of the signal lines are recognized, reported and written into the log
book.
Since the OK-Relay is normally energized, the messages are output in the
operating state network ON/OFF.

VC 1100 Overview
System messages such as:

– no calibration data in EEprom
– no dialog data in EEprom
will cause an OK-error which can be reset by means of Relay Reset.
Important:
When an OK error occurs, all limit relays maintain their current status. After
removing the OK error and acknowledging it by "Relay Reset", they perform
their normal function again.
In case of a system error message, e.g.
– calibration data not readable (ER -31)
– no valid calibration data in the EEPROM (ER -37)
a hardware error is present.
This error can only be eliminated by a Brüel & Kjær Vibro service station or
in the parent company.

Overview VC 1100
Inputs and Outputs

Inputs
VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts vibration velocity sensors or accelero-
meters.
In 2 channel operation, sensors of the same type with the same sensitivity
are required.
Accelerometers (passive sensors) are powered by the internal power supply
of VIBROCONTROL 1100.
Outputs
a) Alarm Indication
Alarm level exceedances are indicated by galvanically free relay contacts.
b) Analog-Outputs
Two separate analog outputs are provided for analog meters or strip chart
recorders. Which measured parameter is supplied on which analog output is
determined during the setup. Each analog output can be configured for
either 0 ... 10 V or 0.4 ... 20 mA.
Remote I/O (Serial Interface)

Up to 205 VIBROCONTROL 1100 can be daisy-chained to one serial
interface of a computer or process controller. Status, Log Book, and
measured values can be read, stored, displayed, printed, etc.
In addition the configuration of each VIBROCONTROL 1100 can be
confirmed and modified.

VC 1100 Overview
Definitions
Several terms are commonly used for measured vibration parameters. The
following is a summery of terms used in this manual.
Signal Detection Type:

Zero-to-Peak Value *)
Definition: The maximum deviation of the absolute value of the
vibration signal from zero.
Used here: peak or pc
Other terms: peak-value, amplitude, single amplitude

Peak-to-Peak Value *)
Definition: The maximum distance between peak negative and
peak positive of the vibration signal.
Used here: peak-to-peak or ppc
Other terms: amplitude, double amplitude

Root-Mean-Square Value
Definition: The square root of sum of the squared amplitudes
over a period of time.
Describes the energy content of a vibration signal.
Used here: rms
Other terms: effective value, true rms value
*) VIBROCONTROL 1100 measures the true rms value.Peak values are

calculated from the rms value using the formulae:
Beispiel:
zero-to-peak value = rms value x 1.41 [pc]
peak-to-peak value = rms value x 2.82 [ppc]

Technical Data VC 1100
2 Technical Data
Supply Voltage
• Type VC-1100-C01
Type VC-1100-C11 115 V AC or
230 V AC +15 % / -25 %
jumper selectable 48 ... 400 Hz
• Power consumption approx. 15 VA
• Type VC-1100-C02
Type VC-1100-C12 24 V DC (16 ... 36 V)
Power consumption approx. 15 W
Fuses
• Supply Voltage 115/230 V AC 2 Thermo-Resistors

250 °F (125 °C)
built-in the primary transformer
windings
• Supply Voltage 24 V DC NTC - Resistor

Sensor supply -24 V 2 x 30 mA short-circuit-proof
EMC
• according to EN 61326-1: 2006
• GHOST R_B35125 Certificate
WEEE-Reg.-No. 69572330
product category / application area: 9
© VC1100E/tedata C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7→ March 2010 2-1

Safety and reliability related values according to

DIN EN ISO 13849-1
Safety and reliability related values MTTF, PL and Category according to DIN
EN ISO 13849-1 have been evaluated for VC-1100 with the following results:
Device: VC-1100 C01 and C11
Parameter Value (40°C) Value (50°C)

640.148 h 414.950 h
MTTF
~ 73 years ~ 47 years
PL c c
Category 1 1
Device: VC-1100 C02 and C12

696.209 h 541.741 h
MTTF
PL c c
Category 1 1
Device: VC-1100 C01/CCS and C11/CCS

638.674 h 414.143 h
MTTF
PL c c
Category 1 1
Device: VC-1100 C02/CCS and C12/CCS

694.466 h 540.784 h
MTTF
PL c c
Category 1 1
Test conditions:
♦ Operating temperatures: 40°C und 50°C.
♦ Environmental conditions: Ground Benign, Controlled
2-2 March 2010 © VC1100E/tedata C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 67→
Note:
The results of this assessment are valid when the following procedures are
followed:
♦ The Relays of the VC-1100 have to be operated in the „normally
energised” mode.
♦ The analog 4-20 mA signal industry-standard current loops must be
used.
♦ The OK Relay has to be used as system function.
♦ The VC-1100 system must be protected against erroneous change in
configuration
Abbreviations:
MTTF Mean Time To Failure
PL Performance Level
From PL "a" (highest failure probability) to PL "e"
(lowest failure probability)
Category Category (CAT)
Classification of the safety related parts of a control
system in respect of their resistance to faults and their
subsequent behaviour in the fault condition, and which
is achieved by the structural arrangement of the parts,
fault detection and/or by their reliability
Ground Benign, Nearly zero environmental stress with optimum
Controlled engineering operation and maintenance.
Note:
The harmonized standard EN 954-1 is still valid (end of 2011), but it is con-
sidered technically outdated. It was replaced by the current harmonized
standards EN ISO 13849-1. More detailed information about safety and reli-
ability values can be obtained on request from Brüel & Kjær Vibro
(info@bkvibro.com).

Housing and Operating Conditions

Housing
• Material Aluminium AL Si 12
Seal type IP 65 (DIN 40050) splash proof

(water)
Dimensions 360 x 160 x 91 mm (LxWxH)

14.2 x 6.3 x 3.6 inch (LxWxH)
• Weight app. 5 kg (11 lbs)
• Cable fittings 9 x M16x1,5 and 3 x M20x1,5

feed-throughs adapters
M16x1,5 to 1/2-14 NPT are
available
• Paint RAL 7032 (grey)

Top cover RAL 2011 (orange)
ca.400
360
M16 x 1,5
14
6,5
160
110
M20 x 1,5
340
VC11GEH D metr (030305)
Figure 2-1: Housing Dimensions
Operating Conditions
• Storage Temperature Range -20 ... + 70 °C (4 ... 148 °F)
• Operating Temperature Range 0 ... + 50 °C (32 ... 122 °F)
• Rel. Humidity max. 95 % non condensing
Analog Circuits
Channels 2
1) 2)
Inputs accept
a) Vibration Velocity Sensors with a sensitivity of
100 mV/mm/s, fo = 8 Hz, Ri = 4 kΩ
b) Accelerometer with a sensitivity of
2
100 mV/g (10.2 mV/m/s )
Input Impedance appox. 100 kΩ
Accuracy
(for frequency ranges listed below:)
• Vibration Parameters ± 0.5 % of full-scale plus:
± 4.0 % of the meas. value ( 1 Hz... 3 Hz)
± 2.0 % of the meas. value (1000 Hz...10000 Hz)
• Bearing Condition ± 6 % of the measured value plus or

± 3.5 % of full-scale, whichever is greater
Frequency Range 3)
The 10 Hz high-pass and 1000 Hz low-pass filters are of the 3.rd order, and
meet the requirements of DIN/ISO 2373, DIN/ISO 3945 and DIN 45 666. All
other filters are 2nd order Butterworth filters, with -1 dB damping at specified
corner frequencies.
• Vibration Displacement: 10...1000 Hz (v- sensor)
1) VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts 2 sensors of the same type and sensitivity.

2) The setup is microprocessor controlled via the built-in operator panel or Remote Interface.
3) The respective selection is made software-controlled in dialog mode.

• Vibration Velocity: 1... 1000 Hz (v-or a-sensor)

or 3... 1000 Hz (v-or a-sensor)
or 10... 1000 Hz (v-or a-sensor)
or 10...10000 Hz ( a-sensor)
• Vibration Acceleration: 3... 1000 Hz (a-sensor)

or 10... 1000 Hz (a-sensor)
or 3...10000 Hz (a-sensor)
or 10...10000 Hz (a-sensor)
• Bearing Condition: 13 kHz ... 64 kHz- 3 dB (a-sensor)
Measured Parameters and Signal Detection Type 3)

• Root-Mean-Square-Value Xrms or Xeff for s/v/a
• Zero-to-Peak-Value Xpc for s/v/a
• Peak-to-Peak-Value Xppc for s/v/a
• Bearing Condition BCU

4) Ranges between min. and max. are infinitely variable.
Measuring Ranges 3) 4)
The measuring range depends on the selected sensor type, measured
parameter, and signal detection type. The range is continuously adjustable
within the minimum and maximum values shown in the table.
Measured Parameters and Signal Detection Type

Sensor Unit rms pc ppc
min max min max min max
2
m/s 0... 4.0 0...800.0 0... 6.0 0...999.0 0... 12.0 0...999.0
a g 0... 0.4 0... 80.0 0... 0.6 0...120.0 0... 1.2 0...240.0
mm/s 0... 5.0 0...999.0 0... 7.5 0...999.0 0... 15.0 0...999.0
ips 0... 0.2 0... 40.0 0... 0.3 0... 60.0 0... 0.6 0...120.0
mm/s 0... 5.0 0...150.0 0... 7.5 0...225.0 0... 15.0 0...450.0
v ips 0... 0.2 0... 6.0 0... 0.3 0... 9.0 0... 0.6 0... 18.0
mm 0...50.0 0...333.0 0...75.0 0...500.0 0...150.0 0...999.0
mils 0... 2.0 0... 13.3 0... 3.0 0... 20.0 0... 6.0 0... 40.0
Sensor Unit Measuring range

min max
a BCU 0 ... 1 0 ... 140
Type of Sensors:
a = vibration acceleration Sensor
v = vibration velocity Sensor
Measuring Cycles
♦ Single-Channel-Mode
• Vibration Displacement 3.0 s

Bearing Condition 1.25 s
• Refresh Display 0.5 s

Comparison of limit values 0.25 s

4) Ranges between min. and max. are infinitely variable.

♦ Dual-Channel-Mode
• Vibration Parameters
Measuring Time per Channel: 3.0 s
Settling Times:
Filter with a lower frequency corner of 1 Hz 1.75 s
Filter with a lower frequency corner of 3 Hz 1.0 s
ISO-Filter with a lower frequency corner of 10 Hz 1.25 s
Special Filter 1.75 s
Integrator 6.0 s
Linearization Circuit 5.75 s
• Bearing Condition
Measuring Time per Channel: 1.25 s
Setting Time 2.75 s
♦ Analog Output
• Number of Outputs 2
3)
Resolution: 256 (8 Bit)
(both outputs independently adjustable)
Refresh time ca. alle 0.5 s
0...10 V DC Rload ≥ 500 Ω

(withstands short circuits)
or 0...20 mA Load ≤ 500 Ω
or 4...20 mA Load ≤ 500 Ω
Error: U-Output
± 1 % of measured value ± 0.1 mV
I-Output
± 2 % of measured value ± 0.2 µA
• Buffered Outputs
Number of Outputs 2 Output of the sensor signal of each
channel with the correct phase. The
signal is attenuated by a factor of 0.1
Source impedance :≈0Ω
Max. output current : 4 mA
Resistance : > 10 kΩ
Max. cable length with cable
capacitance of 70 pF/m
(Wire against wire) : ≤ 16 m
Microprocessor - System
Storage capacity
RAM 8 kByte
EPROM 64 kByte
EEPROM 2 kByte
Built-in Operator Panel

• 5 push buttons
• LCD, 16 characters, alphanumeric
Storage of setup parameters in non-volatile EEPROM
Limit values 3)
• Total number 6 (3 per channel)
• per channel 1 limit value 1 (lim_1)

1 limit value 2 (lim_2)
1 limit value Bearing Condition (lim_b)
Relays
• Self-Monitoring 1 OK-Relay to indicate malfunctions detected by

the self-monitoring function
• Alarm Level Exceedances 3 Relays K1, K2, K3 to indicate alarm level

3)
exceedances
• Range of settings for limit values 10 ... 100 % of the corresponding measuring range
• Contacts 2 pole
• Contact Rating 250 V AC, 5 A (Ohm Load, cos ϕ = 1)

250 V AC, 2 A (Inductive Load, cos ϕ = 0.4 ... 0.7)
24 V DC / 0.4 A
48 V DC / 0.2 A
A spark extinguisher must be installed as close to the spark generator as

possible !

♦ Link of limit values to relays
• Each limit value can be linked only once
• None or 1 to 6 limit values can be linked to one relay
• If a relay is linked to several limit values, thelimit value exceedances can be

combined in two ways:
a) AND
The relay trips, if all limit values that are linked to this relay are exceeded.
b) OR
The relay trips, if at least one of the limit values linked to this relay is
exceeded.
• OK-Relay normally energized
• Alarm relays
3)
normally energized
K1, K2, K3 or normally de-energized latching or non-latching
• Alarm delay Time

3)
can be set individually for each limit value from
between 1 and 99 s (accuracy ± 5 %
• Reset function 1 galvanically free contact switch to reset

latched relays.
♦ Remote Interface Number of Ports 2 Interface Type RS-232-C (EIA),

(Data only)
• Baud rate
3)
1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 Parity none Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Microprocessor - System
Storage capacity
RAM 8 kByte
EPROM 64 kByte
EEPROM 2 kByte
Built-in Operator Panel

• 5 push buttons
• LCD, 16 characters, alphanumeric
Storage of setup parameters in non-volatile EEPROM
Limit values 3)
• Total number 6 (3 per channel)
• per channel 1 limit value 1 (lim_1)

1 limit value 2 (lim_2)
1 limit value Bearing Condition (lim_b)
Relays
• Self-Monitoring 1 OK-Relay to indicate malfunctions detected by

the self-monitoring function
• Alarm Level Exceedances 3 Relays K1, K2, K3 to indicate alarm level

3)
exceedances
• Range of settings for limit values 10 ... 100 % of the corresponding measuring range
• Contacts 2 pole
• Contact Rating 250 V AC, 5 A (Ohm Load, cos ϕ = 1)

250 V AC, 2 A (Inductive Load, cos ϕ = 0.4 ... 0.7)
24 V DC / 0.4 A
48 V DC / 0.2 A
A spark extinguisher must be installed as close to the spark generator as

possible !

♦ Link of limit values to relays
• Each limit value can be linked only once
• None or 1 to 6 limit values can be linked to one relay
• If a relay is linked to several limit values, thelimit value exceedances can be

combined in two ways:
a) AND
The relay trips, if all limit values that are linked to this relay are exceeded.
b) OR
The relay trips, if at least one of the limit values linked to this relay is
exceeded.
• OK-Relay normally energized
• Alarm relays
3)
normally energized
K1, K2, K3 or normally de-energized latching or non-latching
• Alarm delay Time

3)
can be set individually for each limit value from
between 1 and 99 s (accuracy ± 5 %
• Reset function 1 galvanically free contact switch to reset

latched relays.
♦ Remote Interface Number of Ports 2 Interface Type RS-232-C (EIA),

(Data only)
• Baud rate
3)
1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 Parity none Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Connectors and Interfaces VC 1100
3 Connectors and Interfaces

Fundamentals:
ATTENTION
If the VIBROCONTROL 1100 was converted to a CCS version, only
constant current-supplied acceleration sensors (CCS) can be attached!
Consider the supplement page!
 All connections including those for power are inside the housing.
 Feed cables into the housing via feed-through fittings. There is a total of
3 x M20x1,5 and 9 x M16x1,5 feed-through fittings; 6 on each side.
The threads are M16x1,5, a standard commonly used in Europe.
Each VIBROCONTROL 1100 comes with two M16x 1,5/M12 x 1,5
adapters.
Maximum cable size is 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG).
Use flexible cable only.
 Cable ends should have crimp ferrules for a proper connection to the
removable terminal strips. Remove (unplug) the terminal strips during
wiring. VIBROCONTROL 1100 groups the terminal strips in functional
blocks (sensors, remote I/O, relays, etc.) and each is coded to prevent
mix-ups.
Use shielded cables to suppress external RF noise. This is not

necessary for power and relay wiring.
Connect all shields to the screw terminals located on top of both sides
of the internal housing (SE).
 Run signal cables a minimum of 0.5 m (20 inches) from power cables. If
you must cross a power cable do so at right angles.
By means of steel flexible tubes, protect signal leads from mechanical

damage and electrical interferences.
© VC1100E/connect C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6  Dec. 2009 3-1

VC 1100 Connectors and Interfaces
Index of Cable Connections and Interfaces:

Inputs: Terminal: Page:
Power 19 ... 24 4
Sensor Channel A 37 ... 40 5-7
Sensor Channel B 41 ... 44 5-7
Relay Reset 35 ... 36 8
Inputs: Terminal: Page:
Relay 1 10 ... 12 9
Relay 2 13 ... 15 9
Relay 3 16 ... 18 9
OK-Relay 7 ... 9 9
Analog Output 1 Channel A 3 ... 4 11
Analog Output 2 Channel B 5 ... 6 11
Buffered Output Channel A 31 ... 32 12
Buffered Output Channel B 33 ... 34 12
Remote I/O:
RS-232-C IN 25 ... 30 13
RS-232-C OUT C 28 ... 30 13
The connections in particular:
Symbols
The following abbreviations are used:
TE = Technical Earth (Ground)

SE = Shield Earth (Ground)
PE = Protective Earth (Ground)
 = General Symbol for Reference Level
0VA = Analog Circuits
0VD = Digital Circuits
L = Line Voltage
N = Neutral
DC = Direct Current/Voltage
AC = Alternating Current/Voltage
TD = Transmit Data (RS-232-C)
RD = Receive Data (RS-232-C)
SG = Signal Ground (RS-232-C)
BA = Buffered Output Channel A
BB = Buffered Output Channel B
TE (0VA) and 0VD can be connected at a central point.
3-2 Dec. 2009 © VC1100E/connect C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 

1
SE VIBROCONTROL 1100 SE
25
1 TE = 0V 25 TD1
2 interno (Data 26 RD1 26
2
3 only) 27
+ 3 27 SG1
Izlaz 1
4 4 28 TD2 28
5 + 5 29 RD2 29
Izlaz 2
6 6 30 SG2 30
7 31
7 Buffer A 31
32
8 8 Relej OK 32 BA
33
9 9 Buffer B 33
34
10 10 34 BB
35
11 11 Relej K1 Reset 35
36 36
12 12
Esc P M/Ent
13 13
14 14 Relej K2
15 37 DC 37
15
16 Prijem 38 38
16
kanal A 39 COM 39
17 17 Relej K3
18 40 SIG 40
18
19 L 19
Napon
20 20 napajanja
21 21 41 DC 41
PE Most Prijem 42
22 22 230/115Vac 42
kanal B
23 23 43 COM
43
N 24 Serijski broj 44 SIG
24 44
VC11TOTA (030110)
Fig. 3 - 1: Top view of a VIBROCONTROL 1100 with cover removed
Important: Safety Procedures
The safety instructions are attached as a separate brochure in different

languages.
The user is responsible for commissioning the VIBROCONTROL 1100 and

its placement in the operating environment. Special care should be taken
when installing sensors in hazardous areas.
Apply safety standards properly.

Inputs
Power Supply
Version Supply Voltage
VC 1100 C01/C11 230 V AC or 115 V AC
VC 1100 C02/C12 24 V DC
115 V AC Wiring 230 V AC Wiring
24 V DC Wiring
VC1100
19
+24 V
20
Supply * Connect to terminal 1 or 2
21
Voltage (see general ground
22 24 V DC recommendations)
24V DC 0V 23
0V
24
PE
* KL19-24 E (940921)
Fig. 3 - 2 : Supply Voltage Wiring
Coded Terminal strip 19 - 24 cannot be plugged into any other slot but its
own.
Grounding
Connect protective ground of the power cord to the PE terminal located on
top of the internal housing.
This is the central grounding point for the housing. This point (PE) is
connected to TE by a jumper wire between terminal strip 1/2 and SE. This is
the standard configuration.
In special cases, for example if a peripheral instrument is used with
internally grounded inputs, open the connection between PE and TE by
removing this jumper wire.
Please consult the General Grounding Recommendation in this manual.

Sensors (except of CCS-Sensors)

Two types of sensors can be connected:
a) Vibration Velocity Sensors

b) Vibration Acceleration Sensors (Accelerometers)
Velocity sensors and accelerometers have different interfaces. The velocity

sensors (Type VS - ...) is an active sensor, i.e. it does not require a supply
voltage. The cable has two conductors and a shield.
The accelerometer (Type AS - ...) is a passive sensor, i.e. it has a built-in
charge amplifier which requires a supply voltage. VIBROCONTROL 1100
supplies accelerometers with -24 V DC with a max. current of 30 mA. The
cable has of 4 conductors and a shield.
The connecting cable has 4 conductors when the connection is made
through a terminal box (AC-221). If the sensor is directly connected the
connecting cable has 3 conductors.
Fig. 3 - 3 : Connecting Vibration Velocity and Vibration Acceleration

Sensor
rt = red, ws = white, sw = black, ge = yellow, br = brown,
ge/sw = yellow/black
Standard sensor cable length is 5 m (16 feet). A maximum cable length of

200 m (600 feet) requires proper installation including appropriate junction
boxes and signal cables.
For more information, please consult the manual for the sensor used.

Relay Reset
Use only galvanically free switches with the Relay-Reset Input to manually
reset latched relays. Latched relays can also be reset via the operating
panel or through the remote interface.
VC1100
+5VD
31
32
1k
33
Reset
100uH
34
35
0VD 36
SE
KL35-36 (020123)
Fig. 3 - 4 : Connection of a galvanically free switch to the Relay

Reset-Input

Outputs
Relays
Consider the following if the relay outputs are to be used.
 Decide if the relays are to be "normally energized" or "normally de-

energized". Setup parameters (N10, N11, N12)
must be consistent with the wiring.
Refer to the examples on the next page.
 If a relay is configured as latching (see parameters N07, N08, N09)
there are three ways to reset it.
With the operating panel; via the remote interface; using the Relay-
Reset Input
To use the Relay-Reset Input, connect a galvanically free switch to
terminals 35 and 36 (see previous page).
 If conductive loads are connected, provide appropriate spark
suppression placed as close as possible to the part that would generate
the spark.
Contact Rating: max. 5 A, 220 V AC (Ohmic load)
A spark extinguisher must be installed as close to the spark generator

as possible !
VC1100
7
Example 8 OK-Relay
9
+ 10
11 Relay K1
12
- 13
14 Relay K2
15
16
17 Relay K3
18
KL7-18 (030109)
Fig. 3 - 5 : Connecting the-Relays
Figure 3 - 5 shows the contacts in the de-energized position.

Relays
The following diagrams explain the terms
 normally de-energized and
 normally energized
The thicker lines show energized circuits.
Normally de-energized
VC1100 VC1100
+ +
10 11 12 10 11 12
+
no
Alarm Alarm
+
KL7-18A (030109) - + - +
Normally energized
VC1100 VC1100
+ +
10 11 12 10 11 12
+
no
KL7-18B (030109) + - Alarm + - Alarm
Fig. 3 - 6: Explanation of the Normally De-Energized and Normally

Energized Mode for Relays

Analog Outputs
The analog outputs are used for example with strip chart recorders and
analog meters. These analog outputs are not galvanically free, (isolated)
and should only be used with instruments that have galvanically free inputs.
Both analog outputs are independent and of equal design.
Their function depends on how they are configured (see parameters L1, L2,
L3, L4).
Example :
Configure analog output 1 for the measured vibration value of channel B
"vib_B" using a 4 ... 20 mA signal.
The setup parameters for channel B are:
 Measured Parameter J04: v (vibration velocity)
 Unit J06: mm/s (or ips)s
 Signal Detection J08: rms
 Measured Tange J10: 50.0 (or 2.00)
Using this setup, an output signal of 4 mA corresponds to a vibration level of

0 mm/s (0 ips). An output signal of 20 mA corresponds to a vibration level of
50.0 mm/s (2.00 ips).
Technical Data :
Current Output: 0/4 ... 20 mA Load < 500 
Voltage Output: 0 ... 10 V RL > 1 k, short-circuit proof
VC1100
1 TE=0VA
2 TE=0VA
100uH
0-10V
3 +DC
Output 1 100uH
0/4-20mA 4 0VA
100uH
0-10V
5 +DC
Output 2
0/4-20mA 6
SE
SE
KL1-6 (030109)
Fig. 3 - 7: Connecting Analog Outputs

Buffered Outputs
The buffered outputs provide the sensor signals for on site analysis or data
collection. The signal is attenuated by a factor of 0.1. The buffer amplifier
strips off the DC part of the sensor signal.
Max. output current Imax: 4 mA

Ohmic load RL: > 10 k
Max. cable length with cable capacity
of 70 pF/m (Wire against wire):  16 m
VC1100
0VA 31
Channel A
BA 32
33
Channel B
BB 34
35
36
SE
SE
KL31-36 (940718)
Fig. 3 - 8: Connecting to the Buffered Outputs for On Site Analysis

Remote I/O
VIBROCONTROL 1100 has two RS-232C serial interfaces. Hardware
handshakes are not required for communication with process controllers or
personal computers (HOST). This reduces the number of cable conductors
required.
Cables should be shielded with two twisted pairs.
The Remote Interface provides a means to interrogate and modify the
configuration as well as obtain the measured values from up to 205 daisy-
chained VIBROCONTROL 1100's.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 can be connected to a HOST in two different ways:
a) A HOST communicating with one VC-1100

for 25-pole Sub-D Plug
Pin assignment for

25-pole Sub-D Plug
RS-232-C
VC1100
SE
100uH
(3)
TD1 25 RD PC
RD1 26 (2)
TD EDV
SG1 27 (7)
SG EDP
TD2 28 SE
RD2 29
0VD SG2 30
SE
KL25-30a (960729)
Fig. 3 - 9: Interfacing a HOST with one VC-1100
b) A HOST communicating with one VC-1100

for 9-pole Sub-D Plug
Pin assignment for

9-pole Sub-D Plug
25 (2)
RD PC
RD = Receive Data 26 (3) TD EDV
(receive) 27 (5) SG EDP
28 SE
29
TD = Transmit Data 30
(send)
SG = Signal Ground
(Ground) KL25-30b (030110)
Fig. 3 - 10: Interfacing a HOST with one VC 1100

c) A HOST Communicating with Several

VIBROCONTROL 1100
The HOST can control up to 205 daisy-chained VIBROCONTROL 1100's
with one serial interface on the HOST.
Each VIBROCONTROL 1100 has a unique address.If a VIBROCONTROL
1100 does not receive it's unique address, it passes the message to the next
unit. If one unit is removed, the daisy-chain must be closed as shown in
figure 10.
For more information, please consult the "Remote I/O" chapter in this
manual.
VC1100 VC1100
SE SE SE SE
2 1 2 1
SG RDTD SGRDTD SG RDTD SGRDTD
30 29 28 27 26 25 30 29 28 27 26 25
RD
next PC
VC 1100 TD EDV
SG EDP
SE
VC11NETA (960729)
Fig. 3 - 11: Interfacing a HOST with several VC-1100’s
Use commercially available shielded data transfer cables with two twisted
pairs.

Built-in Operating Panel and Display VC 1100
4 Built-in Operating Panel and Display

Open the housing to reveal the operator panel.
Versions
Model
Monitor Unit
Main menu
Display
A 16 digit alphanumeric LCD display provides access to the Measured
Values, Relay Status, Log Book, and Setup Parameters.
During normal operation the display is dark. The display shown in the above
figure appears after pressing any key. This display - the main menu -
informs the user about the monitor unit, model and version.
Starting from the main menu, you can access the different function modes
by pressing appropriate keys.
The microprocessor returns to the main menu automatically if a key is not
pressed for 15 minutes, and the display will be turned off after an additional
15 minutes of inactivity.
© VC1100E/bult-in C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6  Dec. 2009 4-1

VC 1100 Built-in Operating Panel and Display
Display Setup Parameters
Starting point
During normal operation the display is dark. The main menu will appear if
any key is press.
Press any key.

The main menu appears.
Parameter value
Parameter number
Display Setup Parameters
Pressing this key at this time has no effect, since I01 is the first parameter.
Step to the next parameter number.

Reach any parameter by pressing either the up or down arrow key. Press
and release the key to go to the next parameter (single step). Press and
hold the key if you want to scroll through the parameter numbers faster. The
longer you hold a key down, the faster the parameter numbers change. The
last parameter is P02.
Exit "Display Setup Parameters" mode and return to the main menu.
4-2 Dec. 2009 © VC1100E/bult-in C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6

Change Setup Parameters

Access all modes from the main menu.
Exit a mode and return to the main menu by pressing
If the display is dark, press any key to turn it on.
or
The main menu appears.
Parameter value
Parameter number
Parameter group
Hold the key DOWN, then press key.

A cursor that underlines the parameter group indicates that the parameter
group and number can be changed.
Step to the next parameter number using the and keys.
Pressing this key at this time has no effect, since I01 is the first parameter.

Reach any parameter by pressing either the up or down arrow keys. Press
and release the key to go to the next parameter (single step). Press and
hold the key if you want to scroll through the parameter numbers faster. The
longer you hold a key down, the faster the parameter numbers change.
The last parameter is P02.
Access the change parameter value mode by pressing .

Parameter value
Parameter number
Indicates:
Parameter value is selectable
A flashing parameter group indicates change of the parameter value is

allowed.
Change the parameter value using the and keys.
To save the shown parameter value press again. The parameter group
no longer flashes. The new parameter value is in effect upon exiting to the
main menu .
or
Exit "Change Setup Parameters" and return to the main menu.

The microprocessor will automatically start a consistency check for the new
parameter list. This check will generate an error message if the parameters
are not consistent.
Example:
The following parameters I03 Vibration velocity sensor v
J05 Unit of the measured parameter g
Error messages see explanations on page 16.

Confirm the error messages by pressing any key. The program will
automatically show the inconsistent parameter.
Correct the error:

Press
Adjust parameter value:
Accept parameter value by pressing .
Exit to main menu .
If the setup is consistent, the program returns to the main menu.

If not, the display shows the next error message. Correct this error and
repeat the procedure until the setup is consistent. Find explanations of error
messages on pages 15 of this chapter
Escape from the change parameter value mode by pressing .
Indicates:
Parameter value is selectable
Indicates:
Parameter numbermode is
selectable
Press to return to the select parameter number mode.
Press again to return to the main menu.

Quick Reference to the Change Setup Parameters Mode
The start is always made from the main menu.

Enter the "Change Setup Parameters" mode
Select the parameter you want to change.
Access the change parameter value mode
Change the parameter value.
Save the new parameter value.

Change other parameters or press to return to the main
menu.If the new setup is consistent, it is accepted and it becomes
the current setup and the main menu appears.
If not, an error message will appear (see previous page).

The consistency check takes about 15 s. During this time the monitoring
function is suspended.

Display Measured Values

Access all modes from the main menu. Exit a mode and return to the main
menu by pressing . If the display is dark, press any key to turn it on.
or
Main menu appears.
Signal detection type

Unit
Measured value
Channel
The display shows vibration level of channel A.

A flashing display indicates a limit value was exceeded.
Step to next measured values:

 Bearing condition channel A
 Vibration level channel B
 Bearing condition channel B
Relay status
Relay identification
Event

No/Yes
Object
Command
Active/Inactive
Step to next entry using key, or press ...
No/Yes
Change is possible
Press to enter the change status mode
Select:
Y: Reset relays
N: Do not reset relays.
Accept reset command and return to display mode.
Press , and show Log Book.
Step to first Log Book entry.

The Log Book stores up to 99 events.

After the last Log Book entry, you can delete the Log Book.
Delete Log Book: Press to allow change

Select Y using
Press to delete the Log Book.
The Log Book is deleted
Exit the Display measured values mode and return to the main
menu.
Find an explanation of the Log Book entries and events on pages 14 and 15
of this chapter.

Service Mode
Access all modes from the main menu. Exit a mode and return to the main
menu by pressing .
If the display is dark, press any key to turn it on.
or
Main menu appears.
Before accessing the service mode,

consider that
a) the service mode suspends the measuring and monitoring
modes.
b) activating the relays could cause machine shut-down.
Service Mode
Service parameter
Hold down the key, and press the key to enter the service mode.The
service functions all start with an S.

Check Relays
The service mode provides direct access to relay activation.
Indicates the test function is

active
Change the relay status by pressing and .

Used to check operation of devices connected to the relays.
K1 off: Relay not active.

K1 on: Relay active
Press to exit test of relay K1.

Step to next function by pressing .
Check relays K2 and K3:
Function S04 checks the OK-Relay.
OK off : OK-Relay not active.

OK on : OK-Relay active.
Press to exit the OK-Relay test.

Test analog output 1.

Select voltages of 0, 2, 5, or 10 Volt by pressing
Press to exit. Press to go to next test.
Test analog output 1.

Select currents of 0, 4, 12, or 20 mA by pressing
Analog output 2 is tested in the same manner.
Analog Output 2 Voltage

S07 0V
2V
5V
10 V
Analog Output 2 Current

S08 0 mA
4 mA
12 mA
20 mA
Press to start the self-test. During the self-test, a count down from 10 to
0 is displayed. OK will appear on the display if the test is completed
successfully.
The self-test does not suspend the monitoring mode.

VIBROCONTROL 1100 has the ability to perform a self-calibration. This

function requires about 20 minutes. During the self-calibration the monitoring
mode is suspended, a count down is and displayed from ??? to 0, at which
time the display returns to:
Press to exit self-calibration and return to the main menu.

Events
The microprocessor stores events in the Log Book using a short notation.
The Log Book can store up to 99 events. When the 100th event occurs, the
"oldest event" is dropped making room for the new 100th event. The Log
Book events are maintained until an instruction is received to erase all
entries.
All Log Book entries start with a "H" (for History) followed by a two digit
running number and a short description of the event. If a relay trips, the Log
Book entry identifies the relay and the cause of the relay trip.
Example :
Cause
Relay
Entry number
If the event is a logical AND combination of events, the combination is

displayed. In this case, the plus sign replaces the AND.
A trip of the OK-Relay generates one of the

following Log Book entries:
Event Cause
OK POWER OFF OK-Relay is active for 15 safter
power is returned.
OK A OK-Relay is active.
Malfunction Channel A
OK B OK-Relay is active.
Malfunction Channel B

A trip of relays K1, K2, or K3 generates the following

Log Book entries:
Event Cause
K1 Cause Relay K1 is active.
See list of causes below.
Cause
Lim1A Channel A: Vibration exceeds lim_1
Lim2A Channel A: Vibration exceeds lim_2
LimbA Channel A: Bearing Condition exceeds lim_b
Lim1B Channel B: Vibration exceeds lim_1
Lim2B Channel B: Vibration exceeds lim_2
LimbB Channel B: Bearing Condition exceeds lim_b
Relay resets generate Log Book entries:
Event Cause
RESET DIALOG Relay reset via built-in operator panel
RESET EXTERN Relay reset via reset input
RESET RS-232 Relay reset via Remote-I/O

Error Messages
VIBROCONTROL 1100 automatically checks for setup consistency upon

exiting the "Change Setup Parameters" mode. If the setup is not consistent,
an error message is displayed.
The consistency check stops at the first inconsistency detected. It assumes

that the parameter with the lowest number is correct.
Therefore, a parameter other than the one displayed could be the cause of
the inconsistency.
A list of error messages appears on the next page.

Unit errors
Format: ER -nn is a number with 1 to 5 digits
Example: < ER -1<
Error see page 20 Meaning

code
-1 ! Error in operating system
-6 ! power down (last message, if time is
sufficient)
-8 r Program monitoring is out of operation or
defective.
-31 r Disrupted calibration data (run auto-
calibration!)
-32 ! Error EEPROM / Hardware error
-33 ! Error ROM / Hardware error
-34 ! Error RAM / Hardware error
-35 ! Disrupted data in RAM / Hardware error
-36 k Auto-calibration not successful /
Hardware error
-37 e/r e) No valid configuration stored in
EEPROM.
(Re-configure) / Hardware error
r) If no valid configuration can be made, a

hardware error is present.

Communication errors
Error see page 20 Meaning (continued)

code
-55 w Correct parameter specifier received, but
command cannot be processed because the
requested data are not available; e.g.
channel not active
-57 w received data not accepted, because:
a) data is not in the list of choices.
b) number (INTEGER or FLOATING
POINT) is out of specified range.
-58 w Received unit of the pickup sensitivity (I04)
does not correspond to the selected pickup
(e.g. mV/g and vibration velocity pickup).
-59 w The sensitivity (I05) is too large or too small.
-60 w The selected measured parameter (J03/J04)
cannot be processedwith the selected pickup
(I03); e.g. vibration acceleration with vibration
velocity pickup.
-61 w The unit (J05/J06) does not correspond to
the measured parameter (J03/J04); e.g.
vibration displacement cannot be measured
in g.
-62 w The selected measuring range (J09/J10;
J13/J14) is too small or too large.
-63 w The limit values are smaller than 10 % or
larger than 100 % of the corresponding
measur-ing range (M09/M10; M11/M12;
M13/M14).
-65 w An analog output has been configured to
output BCU's and the pickup type velocity
sensor (I03) has been selected.
-68 Parameter transfer is not possible since
presently another transfer is made or the self-
calibration is running. Repeat the command!

How to react to error-messages?
The 2nd column of the above list of error-messages contains the characters
„k“ „r" „!" 2e" and „w". These characters show what to do if the
corresponding error message occurs.
k Repeat the command.

If VIBROCONTROL 1100 repeats this error-message after several retries,
there is a severe problem and the instrument must be sent to Brüel & Kjær
Vibro for repair.
r Send VIBROCONTROL 1100 to Brüel & Kjær Vibro for repair.
! This error activates the OK-relay temporarily, because an automatic restart

is performed.
Sporadic occurrence of this error indicates that external noise effects the
unit. Check installation, especially shielding of cables and grounds.
Permanent occurrence of this error indicates a severe fault. Send unit to
Brüel & Kjær Vibro for repair.
e Re-do configuration or download consistent setup. If this is not successful,

send unit to Brüel & Kjær Vibro for repair.
w Repeat command using correct data.

This page has been reserved for your notes.

List of Setup Parameters VC 1100
5 List of Setup Parameters

Basic Concepts
VIBROCONTROL 1100 stores its setup parameters in non-volatile memory.
The operating system uses this data to configure the analog circuits and the
software modules. All data is uniquely named. We call this data "Setup
Parameters" or simply "Parameters" and reference them by name. The
setup parameter values can easily be changed within predefined ranges,
providing a convenient way to configure the measuring and monitoring
system.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 checks the consistency of the setup after leaving
the "Change Setup Parameters" mode. If the setup is inconsistent, the
display shows an error messages. The setup must be corrected since the
VIBROCONTROL 1100 will not accept an inconsistent setup.
Parameter list structure

Parameters are listed in sequence with a complete definition. The definition
describes its function, choices, and range.
The same format is used for all parameters.
Example:
Group
Number
Title
K 01 Channel A: Lower Frequency Corner
Choices: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz ISO

Function: Select the lower frequency corner for channel A
Parameter specifier
All setup parameters are organized in functional groups. The "Parameter
Specifier" consists of a group and a number within the group. The first
character specifies the group and the two digit number specifies the
individual parameter.
© VC1100E/paralist C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 Dec. 2009 5-1

VC 1100 List of Setup Parameters
Parameter Title
The "Parameter Title" is a short description of the parameter's function.
Parameter Groups
Group I Channel and Sensor Selection
Define measuring channels
Sensor type and sensitivity
Group J Channel Configuration

Define measured parameters, units, signal detection type, and
full scale.
Group K Filter Configuration

Define upper and lower frequency corners.
Group L Analog Outputs

Assign measured parameters and define signal type.
Group M Limit Configuration

Define monitoring functions, limit values and delay times.
Group N Relay Configuration

Assign limit values to relays. Define relay operation.
Group O OK Monitoring
Enable/Disable
Group P Serial Interface

Define device address and baud rate.
Group S Service Functions

Check relay operation.
Set analog outputs to predefined levels.
Run self-test and
Self-calibration.
5-2 Dec. 2009 © VC1100E/paralist C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 

Additional Information
A functional description of the setup parameters for a group consists of text
and usually a block diagram. The block diagram shows one channel only for
simplicity.
The following is a list of the symbols that are used in the block diagrams,
and their meaning.
Symbols
Range check
Amplifier
Digital-to-Analog Converter
Limit value check
Filter, exponential
Delay time
Tt
& Logical AND
1 Logical OR
Latch
1 Logical NOR
Setup Parameters and variables
Error message LEGENDE E (940923)
Fig. 5 - 1: Legend

Channel and Sensor Selection Group I

General
Configure VIBROCONTROL 1100 as a Single- or Dual-channel monitor.
Use channel A or channel B in the Single-channel mode.
In the Dual-channel mode, VIBROCONTROL 1100 only accepts sensors of
the same type and sensitivity.
I05
A: I01
B: I02 I03 I04
110,0
mV/g
mV/m/s 2 A: J03
8,0
B: J04 VIBRATION
a
SIGNAL
11,2 v
s
PICKUP a 0,816
v
N
110,0 a
v
90,0 s
mV/mm/s 2794,0
mV/ips
2286,0
-58 -59 -60

GRUP-I01E (940923)
Fig. 5 - 2: Parameter Group I, Channel Selection
I 01 Channel A
Choices: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable Channel A.
Y = Yes Channel A is active
N = No Channel A is not active
I01 = Y: For measured value acquisition, connect a sensor to
channel A.
I01 = N: Disables all measuring and monitoring functions for
channel A.

I 02 Channel B
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable Channel B.
Y = Yes Channel B is active
N = No Channel B is not active
I02 = Y: For measured value acquisition, connect a sensor to
channel B.
I02 = N: Disables all measuring and monitoring functions for
channel B.
I 03 Sensors
Choises: a, v
Function: Select sensorr type.
a= Use accelerometers.
v= Use vibration velocity sensors.
Use the same sensor type with the same sensitivity for channel A and B.
I 04 Unit
Choises: mV/g, mV/m/s2, mV/ips, mV/mm/s

Function: Define unit of sensor sensitivity.
I04 defines the unit of sensor sensitivity for both channels. If the unit does
not match the sensor type, VIBROCONTROL 1100 generates error-
message:
-58.
Select
mV/g or mV/m/s2 for accelerometers
mV/mm/s or mV/ips for vibration velocity sensors.

I 05 Sensitivity
Range: 0.8 ... 3750

Resolution: 0.8 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 3750
Function: Sensor sensitivity
I05 defines the sensor sensitivity for channel A and B.

VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts sensitivities within the ranges listed in the
following table:
Sensor type Unit min. value max. value

Accelerometer mV/g 8.0 120
(I03 = a) mV/m/s2 0.8 12
Vibration Velocity mV/mm/s 15 150
(I03 = v) mV/ips 375 3750
I 06 Frequency response linearization
Choises: Y, N
Function: Y = Yes Frequency response linearization is active
N = No Frequency response linearization is not active
At a switch-on of the frequency response linearization, the vibration velocity
sensor supplies an exact measurement even in low frequency ranges, e.g.
measurements below the natural frequency of the sensor
(f0 < 8 Hz or f0 < 15 Hz according to the sensor type).
The standard equipment of the VIBROCONTROL 1100 system comprises a
frequency response linearization for sensor natural frequencies of f0 = 8 Hz.
The special design for f0 = 15 Hz is identified by the adhesive label „moving
coil linearization 15 Hz" which is located on the right side of the printed
circuit cover underneath the grounding bar, after opening the lid.

Signal Detection Type Group J

General
Group J defines how the incoming vibration signal is processed and
displayed.
The signal processing block diagram shows the function of the setup
parameter and uses the following terms:
Vibration Signal: Output of the vibration sensor.
Measured Parameter : Vibration displacement, Vibration velocity,
Vibration acceleration.
Unit: Unit of the measured parameter.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the same unit
for the limit values
Signal detection type: rms, zero-to-peak calculated (pc),
peak-to-peak calculated (ppc)
A: J01 A: J03 A: J05 A: J07 A: J09

B: J02 B: J04 B: J06 B: J08 B: J10
m/s 2 Meas. Parameter

VIBRATION g rms(a) VIBRATION
SIGNAL a a rms
mm/s pc
v v
s
ips rms(v) s
pc = 2 x rms ppc
N
µm
mils rms(s) ppc = 2 x pc
A: J15 A: J17 A: J13

A: J11 B: J16 B: J18 B: J14
Meas. Parameter
B: J12
BEARCON
BEARCON
N N
-61
GRUPPE-J01 C01 (030109)
Fig. 5 - 3: Parameter Group J, Signal Detection Type
Measuring ranges
The measuring range depends on the selected sensor type, measured
parameter, and signal detection type. The range is continuously adjustable
within the minimum and maximum values shown in the table.

Measuring range
Sensor Unit rms pc ppc
min max min max min max
2
m/s 0... 4.00 0... 800 0... 6.00 0... 999 0... 12.0 0... 999
a g 0... 0.40 0... 80.0 0... 0.60 0... 120 0... 1.20 0... 240
mm/s 0... 5.00 0... 999 0... 7.50 0... 999 0... 15.0 0... 999
ips 0... 0.20 0... 40.0 0... 0.30 0... 60.0 0... 0.60 0... 120
mm/s 0... 5.00 0... 150 0... 7.50 0... 225 0... 15.0 0... 450
v ips 0... 0.20 0... 6.00 0... 0.30 0... 9.00 0... 0.60 0... 18.0
mm 0... 50.0 0... 333 0... 75.0 0... 500 0... 150 0... 999
mils 0... 2.00 0... 13.3 0... 3.00 0... 20.0 0... 6.00 0... 40.0
Bearing condition (BEARCON)
a BCU 0... 1.00 0...140
I: 03 A: J05 A: J07 A: J09

B: J06 B: J08 B: J10
rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
m/s2 ppc
g
mm/s rms
ips pc
µm ppc
mils
a
v
m/s2
g rms
mm/s pc
ips ppc
µm
mils rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
VIBRATION ppc
BEARCON
1 -62
A: J13
B: J14
GRUPPE-J02
GRUPPE-J02
C01
C01
E (940923)
(030108)
Fig. 5 - 4: Parameter Group J, Signal Detection Type

J 01 Channel A : Vibration
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable signal processing for channel A
Y = Yes Channel A processes the vibration signal
N = No Channel A does not processes the vibration
signal
J 02 Channel B : Vibration
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable signal processing for channel B
Y = Yes Channel B processes the vibration signal
N = No Channel B does not processes the vibration
signal
J 03 Channel A : Measured Parameter:
Choises: a, v, s
Function: Define the measured vibration parameter for channel A
a= Vibration acceleration
v= Vibration velocity
s= Vibration displacement
J 04 Channel B : Measured Parameter
Choises: a, v, s
Function: Define the measured vibration parameter for channel B
a= Vibration acceleration
v= Vibration velocity
s= Vibration displacement

J 05 Channel A : Unit
Choises: g, m/s2, ips, mm/s, mils, m

Select English or metric units for the measured vibration parameter of
channel A.
Select g or m/s2 for vibration acceleration

Select ips or mm/s for vibration velocity
Select mils or m for vibration dieplacement
Unit Measured Parameter

2
g m/s J03 = a
mm/s ips
J03 = v
m mils
J03 = s
If the unit does not match the selected measured parameter (J03), the
consistency check generates error-message -61.
J 06 Channel B : Unit
Choises: g, m/s2, ips, mm/s, mils, m

Select English or metric units for the measured vibration parameter of
channel B.
Select g or m/s2 for vibration acceleration

Select ips or mm/s for vibration velocity
Select mils or m for vibration dieplacement
Unit Measured Parameter

2
g m/s J04 = a
mm/s ips
J04 = v
m mils
J04 = s
If the unit does not match the selected measured parameter (J04), the
consistency check generates the error-message - 61.
J 07 Channel A : Signal Setection Type
Choises: rms, pc, ppc

rms = Root-mean-square value
pc = Zero-to-peak calculated value
ppc = Peak-to-peak calculated value

J 08 Channel B : Signal Setection Type
Choises: rms, pc, ppc

s = Root-mean-square value
pc = Zero-to-peak calculated value
ppc = Peak-to-peak calculated value
J 09 Channel A : Full scale (Vibration)
Range: 0.200 ... 999

Resolution: 0.200... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Define full scale value for the measured vibration
parameter of channel A. You can use different full
scale values for channel A and B.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the full scale values to automatically configure

the analog circuits, display functions, monitoring functions, and the analog
outputs.
If you enter full scale values outside the ranges defined in the table, the
consistency check generates error message -62.
J 10 Channel B : Full scale (Vibration)
Range: 0 ... 999

Resolution: 0.200... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Define full scale value for the measured vibration
parameter of channel B. You can use different full
scale values for channel A and B.
For more information see parameter J09

J 11 Channel A : Bearing condition (BCU)
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable processing of BCU values for channel A
Y= Process BCU for channel A.
N= Do not process BCU for channel A.
Connect an accelerometer to channel A to measure BCU.
J 12 Channel B : Bearing condition (BCU)
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable processing of BCU values for channel B.
Y = Yes Process BCU for channel B.
N = No Do not process BCU for channel B.
Connect an accelerometer to channel B to measure BCU.
J 13 Channel A : BCU Full scale:
Range: 1 ... 140

Resolution: 1,00 ... 9,99
10,0 ... 99,9
100 ... 140
Function: Define full scale value for BCU on channel A.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the full scale value to automatically configure

the BCU Signal Conditioner, display functions, monitoring functions, and the
analog outputs.
You can use different full scale values for channel A and B. If you enter a
value outside the defined range, the consistency check generates error-
message: -62.
J 14 Channel B : BCU Full scale
Range: 1 ... 140

Resolution: 1,00 ... 9,99
10,0 ... 99,9
100 ... 140
Function: Define full scale value for BCU on channel B.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the full scale value to automatically configure

the BCU Signal Conditioner, display functions, monitoring functions, and the
analog outputs.
You can use different full scale values for channel A and B. If you enter
values outside the defined range, the consistency check generates error-
message: -62.

J 15 Channel A : BCU Avertaging
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable BCU Averaging
Y = Yes Averaging is active
N = No Averaging is not active
Condition: Only when BCU on channel A (J11) is active.
J 16 Channel B : BCU Averaging
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable BCU Averaging
Y = Yes Averaging is active
N = No Averaging is not active
Condition Only when BCU on channel B (J12) is active.
J 17 Channel A : BCU Averaging delay
Range: 10 ... 3600

Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define time constant for BCU averaging channel A.
Condition: Averaging channel A (J15) = active.
J 18 Channel B : BCU Averaging delay
Range: 10 ... 3600

Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define time constant for BCU averaging channel B.
Condition: Averaging channel B (J16) = active.

J 19 Channel A : BCU Scaling Factor:
Range: 0.1 ... 10.0

Dimension: Factor
Function: Setting of all BCU measuring points to the same initial value
by means of the BCU scaling factor.
J 20 Channel B : BCU Scaling Factor
Range: 0.1 ... 10.0

Dimension: Factor
Function: Setting of all BCU measuring points to the same initial value
by means of the BCU scaling factor.

Filter Configuration Group K

General
Filters eliminate frequency components of the vibration signal outside a
specified frequency range. The lower and upper frequency corners define
the frequency range or the bandwidth of the filter.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides several filters which are selected based on
application. For each channel an upper and lower frequency corner is
selected allowing each channel to use a different filter.
International standard ISO 2373 defines a filter that guarantees comparable
readings (see also standards DIN/ISO 3945 and DIN 45 666).
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides this type of filter.
ISO 2372 designates the frequency corners for this filter.
The ISO-Filter has an order of 3. The other filters you can select are 2nd
order Butterworth-filters. The damping at the specified frequency corner is
-1 dB.
K 01 Channel A : Lower Frequency Corner:
Choises: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz ISO

Function: Select lower frequency corner for channel A.
1 Hz = Lower frequency corner
10 Hz ISO = Lower frequency corner
* special = Lower frequency corner
 Possible only if a supplementary filter is installed as an option.

K 02 Channel B : Lower Frequency Corner
Choises: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz ISO

Function: Select lower frequency corner for channel B
10 Hz ISO = Lower frequency corner
* special = Lower frequency corner
K 03 Channel A : Upper Frequency Corner:
Choises: 1000 Hz ISO, 10 kHz

Function: Select upper frequency corner for channel A.
1000 Hz ISO = Upper frequency corner
10 kHz = Upper frequency corner
* special = Upper frequency corner
K 04 Channel B : Upper Frequency Corner
Choises: 1000 Hz ISO, 10 kHz

Function: Select upper frequency corner for channel B.
1000 Hz ISO = Upper frequency corner
10 kHz = Upper frequency corner
* special = Upper frequency corner

Analog Outputs Group L

General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides two analog outputs. Select which
measured parameter issent to analog output 1 and 2.
The full scale values selected in setup parameters J09/J10 and J13/J14
determine the analog output calibration.
L03 I03 L01
BCU_A a
v
vib_A 0...10 V
0...20 mA
BCU_B a 4...20 mA
v
vib_B Analog Output 1
Measured Parameter
Channel A: BEARCON (BCU_A)
Channel A: Vibration (vib_A)
Channel B: BEARCON (BCU_B)
Channel B: Vibration (vib_B) L04 L02
BCU_A a
v
vib_A 0...10 V
0...20 mA
BCU_B a 4...20 mA
v
vib_B Analog Output 2
GRUPPE-L C01 (030109) -65
Fig. 5 - 5: Parameter Group L, Analog Outputs
You cannot select BCU values if a vibration velocity sensor is used. The
consistency check will generate error message: -65.
L 01 Analog Output 1 : Signal Range
Choises: 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA

Function: Select signal type.
L 02 Analog Output 2 : Signal Range
Choises: 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA

Function: Select signal type.

L 03 Analog Output 1 : Measured Parameter
Choises: vib A, BCU A,vib B, BCU B

Function: Select measured parameter sent to analog output 1.
vib A = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel A
BCU A = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel A
vib B = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel B
BCU B = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel B
L 04 Analog Output 2 : Measured Parameter
Choises: vib A, BCU A,vib B, BCU B

Function: Select measured parameter sent to analog output 2.
vib A = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel A
BCU A = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel A
vib B = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel B
BCU B = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel B
L 05 Analog Output 1 : Range Full Scale
Choises: 0.000 ... 999.0

Function: In connection with an indicator or a plotter, the analog output
can be scaled to an optional full scale value within the present
range limits.
L 06 Analog Output 2 : Range Full Scale
Choises: 0.000 ... 999.0

Function: In connection with an indicator or a plotter, the analog output
can be scaled to an optional full scale value within the present
range limits.

Limit Value Configuration Group M

General
This parameter group enables or disables the monitoring functions for both
channels. Three limit values can be defined for each channel; two for
vibration levels and one for bearing condition. Each limit value can be
enabled or disabled and it's value and alarm delay time set individually.
The manual uses notations lim_1 (limit 1), lim_2 (limit 2), and lim_b (BCU)
for the limit values. The unit of the corresponding measured parameter
defines the unit of the limit value.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts limit values in the range of 10 % to 100 %
of the corresponding full scale. The consistency check generates error-
message -63 if the limit values are outside this range.
Alarm delay times are in seconds. If the measured value exceeds the limit
value for a time longer than the alarm delay time, VIBROCONTROL 1100
generates an event. The event is stored in the Log Book and the assigned
relay is tripped as defined in the setup.
Warning:
When an OK error occurs, all limit relays maintain their current status. After
removing the OK error and acknowledging it by "Relay reset", they perform
their normal function again.
A: M03 A: M09 A: M15

B: M04 B: M10 B: M16
lim_ 1
N Tt
A: M01 Tt = 0
B: M02
A: M05 A: M11 A: M17

N B: M06 B: M12 B: M18
Measured Parameter
VIBRATION
lim_ 2
N Tt
Tt = 0
A: M13 A: M19
B: M14 B: M20
A: M07
B: M08
lim_ b
Measured Parameter N Tt
BEARCON Tt = 0
GRUPPE-M C01 (030109)
Fig. 5 - 6 : Parameter Group M, Limit Value Configuration

M 01 Channel A : Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable vibration monitoring for channel A
(lim_1, lim_2).
Y = Monitoring for channel A is active.
N = Monitoring for channel A is not active.
M 02 Channel B : Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable vibration monitoring for channel B
(lim_1, lim_2).
Y = Monitoring for channel B is active.
N = Monitoring for channel B is not active.
M 03 Channel A : Monitor lim_1
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_1 A.
Y = Monitoring lim_1 A.
N = Do not monitoring lim_1 A.
M 04 Channel B : Monitor lim_1
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_1 B.
Y = Monitoring lim_1 B.
N = Do not monitoring lim_1 B.
M 05 Channel A : Monitor lim_2
Choises: Y, N
Y = Monitoringlim_2 A.

M 06 Channel B : Monitor lim_2
Choises: Y, N
Y = Monitoringlim_2 A.
M 07 Channel A : Monitor lim_b
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_b
(BCU channel A).
Y = Monitoring lim_b.
N = Do not monitoring lim_b.
M 08 Channel B : Monitor lim_b
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_b
(BCU channel B).
Y = Monitoring lim_b.
N = Do not monitoring lim_b.
M 09 Channel A : Limit value lim_1
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_1 A in the measured parameter units.
M 10 Channel B : Limit value lim_1
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_1 B in the measured parameter units.

M 11 Channel A : Limit value lim_2
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_2 A in the measured parameter units.
M 12 Channel B : Limit value lim_2
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_2 B in the measured parameter units.
M 13 Channel A : Limit value lim_b
Choises: 0.100 ... 140

Dimension: BCU
Resolution: 0.100 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 140
Function: Enter limit value lim_b, for bearing condition channel A.
M 14 Channel B : Limit value lim_b
Choises: 0.100 ... 140

Dimension: BCU
Resolution: 0.100 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 140
Function: Enter limit value lim_b, for bearing condition channel B.

M 15 Channel A : Alarm Delay Time lim_1
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel A lim_1.
M 16 Channel B : Alarm Delay Time lim_1
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel B lim_1.
M 17 Channel A : Alarm Delay Time lim_2
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel A lim_2.
M 18 Channel B : Alarm Delay Time lim_2
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel B lim_2.
M 19 Channel A : Alarm Delay Time lim_b
Choises: 3 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel A lim_b.
M 20 Channel B : Alarm Delay Time lim_b
Choises: 3 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel B lim_b.

Relay Configuration Group N

General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides three relays to indicate alarm level
exceedances. The relays are designated as K1, K2 and K3.
Relay operation can be defined as follows:
A: N01
B: N02
- -
lim_ 1 K1
K2
K3 &* N13 N07 N10
AND N N
OR 1
1
A: N03 K1
B: N04
- -
lim_ 2 K1
K2
K3 &* N14 N08 N11
AND N N
OR 1
1
K2
A: N05 &* N15 N09 N12

B: N06 AND N N
- - OR 1
lim_ b K1
K2
K3 1
K3
LOG BOOK RESET
GRUPPE-N C01 (030109)
Fig. 5 - 7 : Parameter Group N, Relais Configuration
Programmable Relay Operation:

1. Which alarm level exceedance controls which relay?
2. Latching or non-latching operation?
3. Normally energized or normally de-energized operation?
4. Logical combinations.
Comments to item 1:
It is common to assign alarm levels lim_1 of channel A and B to relay K1 and
alarm levels lim_2 of channel A and B to relay K2.
Comments to item 2:
In the latching mode, a relay remains latched until VIBROCONTROL 1100
receives a reset command. In the non-latching mode, VIBROCONTROL
1100 resets the relays automatically when the monitored signal drops below
the limit value.

Comments to item 3:
The following table shows the contact positions for normally de-energized
and normally energized relay operating modes.
Mode No alarm Alarm

Normally de-energized Relay active Relay not active
Normally energized Relay not active Relay active
Comments to item 4:
If several alarm limits control one relay, combine the alarms using a logical
AND or a logical OR.
N 01 Channel A : lim_1 controls relay ...
Choises: --, K1, K2, K3

Function: Assign event "lim_1A exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_1A does not control a relay
K1 = lim_1A controls relay K1
N 02 Channel B : lim_1 controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_1B exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_1B does not control a relay
K1 = lim_1B controls relay K1
N 03 Channel A : lim_2 controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_2A exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_2A does not control a relay

N 04 Channel B : lim_2 controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_2B exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_2B does not control a relay
N 05 Channel A : lim_b controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_bA exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_bA does not control a relay
K1 = lim_bA controls relay K1
N 06 Channel B : lim_b controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_bB exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_bB does not control a relay
K1 = lim_bB controls relay K1
N 07 Relais K1 : Latching
Choises: Y, N
Function: Select latching or non-latching operation for relay K1.
Y = Relay K1 latches.
N = Relay K1 does not latch.
Choises: Y, N

Choises: Y, N
N 10 Relais K1 : Normally Energized
Choises: Y, N
Function: Select normally energized or normally de-energized
mode for relay K1
Y = Relay K1 operates normally energized.
N = Relay K1 operates normally de-energized.
Choises: Y, N
mode for relay K2.
Choises: Y, N
mode for relay K3.
N 13 Relais K1 : Logic
Choises: OR, AND

Function: Define how several alarm level exceedances control
relay K1
OR = Exceedance of at least one of the assigned
alarm levels trips relay K1.
AND = Only exceedance of all assigned alarm levels
trips relay K1.

Choises: OR, AND

Function: Define how several alarm level exceedances control relay K2.
trips relay K2.
Choises: OR, AND

Function: Define how several alarm level exceedances control relay K3.
trips relay K3.

OK-Monitoring Group O
General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 has a cyclic self-monitoring routine.
This routine tests the sensors and the cables between VIBROCONTROL
1100 and the sensors. The sensor signal is checked to verify that it remains
within a predefined range. This method detects errors such as disconnected
sensors, broken cables and shorts. If an OK error occurs, the OK relay is
tripped and the event is stored in the Log Book.
Note:
When vibration velocity sensors with moving coil are used, lead breakage or
short-circuit cannot usually be recognized. A constant current is thus
superposed to the measuring signal. This current effects a direct voltage
drop of approx. 1 V in the VIBROCONTROL 1100. This voltage drop is
measured as OK voltage.
The OK relay is configured to the normally energized mode. In this mode a
power failure at the VIBROCONTROL 1100 will trip the OK relay to the
alarm position.
In special cases, for example if line drivers or isolation amplifiers are used, it
might be necessary to disable the OK monitoring function for the sensors.
Therefore, VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides for disabling this function. This
has no effect on other self-monitoring functions.
O 01 Channel A : OK Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable OK monitoring of the sensor on channel A.
Y = OK monitoring for sensor channel A is active
N = OK monitoring for sensor channel A is not active
O 02 Channel B : OK Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable OK monitoring of the sensor on channel B.
Y = OK monitoring for sensor channel B is active
N = OK monitoring for sensor channel B is not active
O 03 Channel A : OK-Lower Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

Function: The OK-limits are only settable for acceleration sensors.

O 04 Channel B : OK- Lower Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

O 05 Channel A : OK-Upper Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

O 06 Channel B : OK- Upper Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

Note for the definition of the OK-limits

If the input value of the OK-upper value is smaller than the input value for
the OK-lower value, an OK error message is displayed.
The typical setting values for the OK-upper limit and the OK-lower limit are
dependent on the sensor type. For Brüel & Kjær Vibro sensors the following
settings are recommended:
Velocity sensor (series VS - ...)

OK-upper limit: 2.5
OK-lower limit : 0.5
Acceleration sensor (series AS - ...)

OK-upper limit: -1
OK-lower limit : -20

Serial Interface Group P
P 00 Remote I/O : Device Address
Choises: 1 ... 205

Function: Define a unique address for each VIBROCONTROL 1100
P 01 Serial Port 1 : Baud rate
Choises: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600

Unit: Bit/s
Function: 1200 = Baud rate: 1200 Bd
2400 = Baud rate: 2400 Bd
P 02 Serial Port 2 : Baud rate
Choises: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600

Unit: Bit/s
Function: Select baud rate for serial port 1.

Service Functions Gruppe S

General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides direct access to the relays and analog
outputs. Use these functions to test the connected peripherals including
wiring.
These functions also help programmers of process control systems to verify
the interface with VIBROCONTROL 1100. Additionally, VIBROCONTROL
1100 itself can be tested using the self-test and self-calibration functions.
Warning
The service functions suspend all measuring and monitoring functions.
Changing relay outputs could cause machine shutdown !
Relay Test
Switch each relay to the "active" and "inactive" position . Test the reaction of
the system in both positions. Repeat the procedure for all relays including
the OK- relay.
Analog Output Test

Set each analog output to a predefined output voltage or current. Check to
see if the same levels are displayed, for example on the analog meter in the
control room.
Self-test
The self-test takes about 15 seconds. During this test the most important
modules of the microprocessor system are checked, including stored data.
"Test" is displayed during the test along with a countdown from 10 to 0. The
self-test is not interruptible.
Normally, "TEST ok" is displayed at the end of the self-test. Press any key to
continue. If the self-test detects an error, the error message is displayed for
x seconds and automatically restarts the system.
The error message is stored in the Log Book.
Self-calibration
The self-calibration program takes about 15 minutes. During this time, the
signal conditioners, multiplexers, and analog-to-digital converters, etc. are
checked using an internally generated test signal.
This program does not have access to the input and output modules like
relays, pre-amplifiers, and amplifiers for the analog outputs. Use the relay
and analog output tests to check these functions.
"Calibration" is displayed during the self-calibration along with a number
indicating the current test. This program is not interruptible. Remember that
during self-calibration all measuring and monitoring functions are
suspended.

The status of the relays and analog outputs does not change during the self-
calibration.
S 01 Relay K1 : Test
Choises: K1 on, K1 off

Funktion: Test relay K1.
K1 on = Relay K1 is active
K1 off = Relay K1 is not active.

K2 off = Relay K2 is not active abgefallen.

K2 off = Relay K3 is not active abgefallen.
S 04 OK-Relay : Test
Choises: OK on, OK off

Funktion: Test OK-relay.
OK on = OK-Relay is active
OK off = OK-Relay is not active
S 05 Analog-Output 1 : Output voltage
Choises: 0 V, 2 V, 5 V, 10 V
Funktion: Set the output voltage level on analog output 1.
0V = The output voltage is 0 Volt
10 V = The output voltage is 10 Volt

S 06 Analog-Output 1 : Output current
Choises: 0 mA, 4 mA, 12 mA, 20 mA

Funktion: Set the output current level on analog output 1.
0 mA = The output current is 0 mA
S 07 Analog-Output 2 : Output voltage
Choises: 0 V, 2 V, 5 V, 10 V
Funktion: Set the output voltage level on analog output 2.
10 V = The output voltage is 10 Volt
S 08 Analog- Output 2 : Output current
Choises: 0 mA, 4 mA, 12 mA, 20 mA

Funktion: Set the output current level on analog output 2.
S 09 TEST
Function: Start self-test of VIBROCONTROL 1100.
S 10 CALIBRATION
Function: Start self-calibration of VIBROCONTROL 1100.

Parameter Configuration Standard

Plant : VC 1100 C01 230 V / C02 24 V
Version : VC VC 1100 V 2.02
Name : Date: ....……..……….
Channel and Sensor Selection - Group I

I01 Channel A Y [X] N []
I02 Channel B Y [X] N []
I03 Sensor a [X] v []
I04 Unit mV/g [X] mV/m/s²2 [ ] mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Sensitivity [______________]
I06 Frequency response linearization Y [] N [X]
Channel Configuration - Group J

J01 Channel A: Vibration Y [X] N []
J02 Channel B: Vibration Y [X] N []
J03 Channel A: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J04 Channel B: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J05 Channel A: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
ips [] mm [ ] mils []
J06 Channel B: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
J07 Channel A: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J08 Channel B: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J09 Channel A: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J10 Channel B: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J11 Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [X] N []
J12 Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [X] N []
J13 Channel A: BCU Full Scale [_____2.000 ____]
J14 Channel B: BCU Full Scale [_____2.000 ____]
J15 Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N [X]
J16 Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N [X]
J17 Channel A: Mean time (BCU) [_______20_____]
J18 Channel B: Mean time (BCU) [_______20_____]
J19 Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor [_____1.000 ____]
J20 Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor [_____1.000 ____]
Filter Configuration - Group K
K01 Channel A: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K02 Channel B: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K03 Channel A: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
K04 Channel B: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
Analog Output - Group L
L01 Analog Output 1: 0..10V [X] 0..20mA [ ] 4..20mA []
L03 Analog Output 1: Parameter vib_A [X] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analog Output 2: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [X] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analog Output 1: Full Scale [_____20.00____]
L06 Analog Output 2: Full Scale [_____20.00____]

Limit Configuration - Group M

M01 Channel A: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M02 Channel B: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M03 Channel A: Monitor lim_1 Y [X] N []
M04 Channel B: Monitor lim_1 Y [X] N []
M07 Channel A: Monitor lim_b Y [] N [X]
M08 Channel B: Monitor lim_b Y [] N [X]
M09 Channel A: Value lim_1 [_____10.00_____]
M10 Channel B: Value lim_1 [_____10.00_____]
M11 Channel A: Value lim_2 [_____15.00_____]
M12 Channel B: Value lim_2 [_____15.00_____]
M13 Channel A: Value lim_b [_____4.000_____]
M14 Channel B: Value lim_b [_____5.000_____]
M15 Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1 ______]
M16 Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1 ______]
M17 Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1 ______]
M18 Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1 ______]
M19 Channel A: Delay Time lim_b [_______7 ______]
M20 Channel B: Delay Time lim_b [_______8 ______]
Relay Configuration - Group N
N01 Channel A: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N02 Channel B: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N03 Channel A: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N04 Channel B: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N05 Channel A: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 [X]
N06 Channel B: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 [X]
N07 Relay K1: Latching Y [X] N []
N10 Relay K1: Normally Energized Y [X] N []
N13 Relay K1: Logic AND [] OR [X]
OK Monitoring - Group O
O01 Channel A: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O02 Channel B: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O03 Channel A: OK-Lower Limit [____-21.0000___]
O04 Channel B: OK-Lower Limit [____-21.0000___]
O05 Channel A: OK-Upper Limit [_____-2.0000___]
O06 Channel B: OK-Upper Limit [_____-2.0000___]
Baud Rate for Serial Interface - Group P
P00 Device Address [_______1______]
P01 Serial Port 1: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]
P02 Serial Port 2: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]

Parameter Configuration Standard

Plant : VC 1100 C11 230 V / C12 24 V
Version : VC VC 1100 V 2.02
Name : Date: ....………..…….

I01 Channel A Y [X ] N []
I02 Channel B Y [X] N []
I03 Sensor a [X] v []
I04 Unit mV/g [X] mV/m/s² [ ] mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Sensitivity [_____100.0 ____]
I06 Frequency response linearization Y [X] N []

J01 Channel A: Vibration Y [X] N []
J02 Channel B: Vibration Y [X] N []
J03 Channel A: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J04 Channel B: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J05 Channel A: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
J06 Channel B: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
J07 Channel A: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J08 Channel B: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J09 Channel A: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J10 Channel B: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J11 Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J12 Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J13 Channel A: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J14 Channel B: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J15 Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J16 Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J17 Channel A: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J18 Channel B: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J19 Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
J20 Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
K01 Channel A: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K02 Channel B: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K03 Channel A: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
K04 Channel B: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
L03 Analog Output 1: Parameter vib_A [X] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analog Output 2: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [X] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analog Output 1: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
L06 Analog Output 2: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]


M01 Channel A: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M02 Channel B: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M07 Channel A: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M08 Channel B: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M09 Channel A: Value lim_1 [_____10.00 ____]
M10 Channel B: Value lim_1 [_____10.00 ____]
M11 Channel A: Value lim_2 [_____15.00 ____]
M12 Channel B: Value lim_2 [_____15.00 ____]
M13 Channel A: Value lim_b [______________]
M14 Channel B: Value lim_b [______________]
M15 Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1______]
M16 Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1______]
M17 Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1______]
M18 Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1______]
M19 Channel A: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
M20 Channel B: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
N01 Channel A: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N02 Channel B: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N03 Channel A: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N04 Channel B: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N05 Channel A: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N06 Channel B: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N10 Relay K1: Normally Energized Y [] N [X]
O01 Channel A: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O02 Channel B: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O03 Channel A: OK-Lower Limit [___-22.0000____]
O04 Channel B: OK-Lower Limit [___-22.0000____]
O05 Channel A: OK-Upper Limit [____-2.0000____]
O06 Channel B: OK-Upper Limit [____-2.0000____]
P00 Device Address [_______1______]
P01 Serial Port 1: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]
P02 Serial Port 2: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]

Parameter Configuration
Plant :________________________________________________________________________
Version :___VC 1100/C ___V _______________________________________________________
Name :_____________________________________________________Date: ______________

I01 Channel A Y [] N []
I02 Channel B Y [] N []
I03 Sensor a [] v []
I04 Unit mV/g [] mV/m/s² [ ] mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Sensitivity [______________]
I06 Frequency response linearization Y [] N []

J01 Channel A: Vibration Y [] N []
J02 Channel B: Vibration Y [] N []
J03 Channel A: Parameter a [] v [] s []
J04 Channel B: Parameter a [] v [] s []
J05 Channel A: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s []
J06 Channel B: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s []
J07 Channel A: Signal Detection rms [] pc [ ] ppc []
J08 Channel B: Signal Detection rms [] pc [ ] ppc []
J09 Channel A: Full Scale [______________]
J10 Channel B: Full Scale [______________]
J11 Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J12 Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J13 Channel A: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J14 Channel B: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J15 Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J16 Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J17 Channel A: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J18 Channel B: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J19 Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
J20 Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
K01 Channel A: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [] * Spec. [ ]
K02 Channel B: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [] * Spec. [ ]
K03 Channel A: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [] * Spec. []
K04 Channel B: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [] * Spec. []
L01 Analog Output 1: 0..10V [] 0..20mA [ ] 4..20mA []
L02 Analog Output 2: 0..10V [] 0..20mA [ ] 4..20mA []
L03 Analog Output 1: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analog Output 2: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analog Output 1: Full Scale [______________]
L06 Analog Output 2: Full Scale [______________]


M01 Channel A: Monitoring Y [] N []
M02 Channel B: Monitoring Y [] N []
M03 Channel A: Monitor lim_1 Y [] N []
M04 Channel B: Monitor lim_1 Y [] N []
M05 Channel A: Monitor lim_2 Y [] N []
M06 Channel B: Monitor lim_2 Y [] N []
M07 Channel A: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M08 Channel B: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M09 Channel A: Value lim_1 [______________]
M10 Channel B: Value lim_1 [______________]
M11 Channel A: Value lim_2 [______________]
M12 Channel B: Value lim_2 [______________]
M13 Channel A: Value lim_b [______________]
M14 Channel B: Value lim_b [______________]
M15 Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 [______________]
M16 Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 [______________]
M17 Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 [______________]
M18 Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 [______________]
M19 Channel A: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
M20 Channel B: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
N01 Channel A: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N02 Channel B: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N03 Channel A: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N04 Channel B: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N05 Channel A: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N06 Channel B: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N07 Relay K1: Latching Y [] N []
N10 Relay K1: Normally Energized Y [] N []
N13 Relay K1: Logic AND [] OR []
O01 Channel A: OK-Monitoring Y [] N []
O02 Channel B: OK-Monitoring Y [] N []
O03 Channel A: OK-Lower Limit [______________]
O04 Channel B: OK-Lower Limit [______________]
O05 Channel A: OK-Upper Limit [______________]
O06 Channel B: OK-Upper Limit [______________]
P00 Device Address [______________]
P01 Serial Port 1: 9600 [ ] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]
P02 Serial Port 2: 9600 [ ] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]

Installation and Commissioning VC 1100
6 Installation and Commissioning

Installation
VIBROCONTROL 1100 Mount rear side down
Vibration sensors: Consult sensor manual
Wiring: Consult chapter 3 of this manual
Grounding: Consult grounding recommendations
See chapters 2 and 3 of this manual for technical data and details on serial
interfacing. Seal unused cable ports using ... AC-xxx.
Commissioning
CAUTION !
The safety instructions are attached as a separate brochure in

different languages.
Check wiring
Check supply voltage
Power Monitor
Enter setup parameters required for this installation
Connect sensors Once the sensors are connected and

power is applied, the OK error must clear
showing everything is configured
correctly.
Connect peripheral devices to relays and analog outputs.

Connect serial interfaces as required
© VC1100E/mounting C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6  Dec. 2009 6-1

VC 1100 Installation and Commissioning
Checks
Use the VIBROCONTROL 1100 service functions to verify all connected
peripheral functions.
Service functions are described in chapter 5, under setup parameters
group S.
Relays: Service parameters S01...S04
Analog outputs: Service parameters S05...S08
These functions provide a means to switch each relay separately and to set
the analog outputs to predefined values.
Complete the installation by running self-test (S09) and auto-calibration
(S10).
Recommendation
Run auto-calibration under operating conditions with the machinery running.
The auto-calibration function does not change setup parameters.
6-2 Dec. 2009 © VC1100E/mounting C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 

Analogausgänge/Analog Outputs/Sortie analogiques Analogausgänge/Analog Outputs/Sortie analogiques
1 TE 7 1 TE 7
2 TE OK-Relay 8 2 TE OK-Relay 8
3 +DC 9 3 +DC 9
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA 0/4 ... 20 mA
10 10
4 4
K1 11 K1 11
* 5 +DC
12 * 5 +DC
12
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA 13 0/4 ... 20 mA 13
6 6
K2 14 K2 14
15 15
Netzanschluß/Power Supply/ Netzanschluß/Power Supply/
* Raccordementdu secteur 115 V/230 V AC
16 * Raccordementdu secteur 24 V DC
16
19 L
K3 17 K3 17
20
18 18
21 21 +24 V
115 V 230 V
22 TD1 25 TD1 25
23 RD1 26 23 0V RD1 26
Serielle Schnittstelle SG1 27 Serielle Schnittstelle SG1 27
24 N Serial interface 24 0V Serial interface
Interface série Interface série
TD2 28 TD2 28
Aufnehmeranschlüsse/Pickups/ RD2 29 Aufnehmeranschlüsse/Pickups/ RD2 29

Raccordement des capteurs Raccordement des capteurs
SG2 30 SG2 30
37 -24 V DC 37 -24 V DC
38 0V 38 0V
Kanal A
Channel A Buffer A
31
* Kanal A
Channel A
31
*
39 COM Canal A 39 COM Canal A Buffer A
BA 32 BA 32
40 SIG 40 SIG
33 33
Buffer B Buffer B
BB 34 BB 34
* *
41 -24 V DC 41 -24 V DC
* *
42 0V 42 0V
Kanal B Kanal B
35 35
Channel B Channel B
43 COM Reset 43 COM Reset
Canal B Canal B
36 36
44 SIG 44 SIG
VIBROCONTROL 1100 VIBROCONTROL 1100

C01/C11 C02/C12
* *
PE PE
* Schirm an Kabelverschraubung
Shield on cable screw
Blindage sur boulonnage
Datum Name Zeichng. Nr.

Bearb. 06.04.01 Giegeler VIBROCONTROL 1100 Brüel & Kjær Vibro
Gepr. 06.04.01 Hölzel C01 / C11 - C02 / C12 Leydheckerstr. 10, 64293 Darmstadt C102 230.001
Änderung 08.03.05 Giegeler
Schwinggeschwindigkeits-Sensoren
Vibration Velocity Sensors
Capteurs de vitesse vibratoire
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
75
(80 bei VS-079)
12
Messrichtung
Direction of
ø 38 measurement
M10
Direction de
mesure
SW 27 10
r min
60
m
m
0,3 m 4,7 m
VS06x07x (091105)
Zulässiger Montagebereich / admissible mounting range

Plage de montage admissible
VS-069 VS-077/079
Messrichtung: Messrichtung:
VS-068 Direction of measurement: Direction of measurement:
Messrichtung: Direction de mesure: Direction de mesure:
Direction of measurement: Vertical Horizontal und/and/et Vertical
Direction de mesure:
Horizontal 90° 90°
110° 70°
90°
5°
175°
180° 0°
185° 180° 0° 180° 0°
355°
200° 340°
Anwendung Application Utilisation

Brüel & Kjær Vibro-Schwinggeschwin- Brüel & Kjær Vibro vibration velocity Les capteurs de vitesse vibratoire
digkeits-Sensoren arbeiten nach dem sensors operate in accordance with Brüel & Kjær Vibro fonctionnent selon
elektrodynamischen Prinzip und the electrodynamic principle and are le principe électrodynamique et
werden zur Erfassung der absoluten used for measuring the bearing servent à mesurer la vibration absolue
Lagerschwingung von Maschinen absolute vibration of machines. de palier des machines.
eingesetzt.
Anschluss-Schema Connection Diagram Schéma de raccordement

weiss / white / blanc Signal
braun / brown / brun 0V Bezugsleiter
0V Zero
0V - Zéro analogique
V schwarz/gelb Schirm
black/yellow Shield
noir/jaune Blindage VSB07 (050405)
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten! / Technical specifications subject to change! /

Spécifications techniques sous réserve de modifications!
Brüel & Kjaer Vibro GmbH Tel. : +49 (0)6151 428-1400 ©vs06x07xdef / 27.01.2015
Leydheckerstraße 10 Fax : +49 (0) 6151 428-1401 C102 804.001 / V 05
D-64293 Darmstadt E-Mail : info@bkvibro.com Seite/Page 1 von/of/de 13
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
VSB01 Polarität VSB01 Polarity VSB01 Polarité

Bei der eingezeichneten Bewegungs- With the illustrated direction of move- Etant donné le sens du mouvement
richtung der Lagerschale entsteht ein ment of the bearing shell, a positive indiqué pour la carcasse de palier,
positives Signal an der weissen polarity signal is produced at the white un signal positif est disponible au brin
1) 1) 1)
Kabelader. wire of the cable. blanc du câble.
1) 1) 1)
Ausgenommen VS-079 für mobile Exception for VS-079 for mobile Pour VS-079 un signal négatif est
Applikationen (mit Adapterleitung applications (with connection cable disponible au brin blanc du câble.
6-pol. DIN/BNC). Bei VS-079 liegt ein 6-pole DIN/BNC). In this case a
negatives Signal an der weißen negative signal will be produced at the
Kabelader. white wire of the cable.
Technische Daten Technical Data Données techniques

Allgemeine Daten General Data Données techniques
généralités
Anschlusskabel des Sensors Sensor cable Raccordement électrique
PTFE-Kabel (C) PTFE cable (C) Câble PTFE(C)
2 2 2
2 x 0,38 mm ; abgeschirmt 2 x 0,38 mm ; shielded 2 x 0,38 mm ; blindé
Außendurchmesser Outside diameter Diamètre extérieur
4 mm 4 mm 4 mm
Länge Length Longueur
5 m; Aderenden: offen 5 m; wire ends: open extension 5 m; extrémités libres : le câble
Verlängerung des Anschluss- of the sensor connecting cable du capteur peut être étendu à
kabels auf max. 200 m möglich to a max. of 200 m is possible 200 mètres (utiliser une boîte
(mit Klemmkasten) (wiht a terminal box) de jonction)
Schutzschlauch Protective conduit outside Diamètre extérieur flexible de
Außendurchmesser diameter protection
11,5 mm 11,5 mm 11,5 mm
Schlüsselweite Wrench size of conduit fitting Vissage tuyau flexible ouverture
Schlauchverschraubung de clé
17 mm 17 mm 17 mm
Anschlussgewinde Connection thread for conduit Vissage tuyau flexible filetage
Schlauchverschraubung fitting raccord
M12 x 1,5 M12 x 1,5 M12 x 1,5
Gehäuse Housing Boîtier
Edelstahl hermetisch gekapselt stainless steel; hermetically acier inoxydable,
sealed hermétiquement scellé
Befestigung Fixing Fixation
Zentralbefestigung mittels: Central mounting by means of Fixation centrale par goujon
Gewindestift M10 x 25 mm; stud M10 x 25 mm; fileté M10 x 25 mm;
Empf. Anzugsmoment 14 Nm Recommended tightening Couple de serrage
torque 14 Nm préconisé 14 Nm
Gewindeadapter M10 x M8;
Empf. Anzugsmoment 7,1 Nm Thread adapter M10 x M8 Goujon adapteur M10 x M8
Recommended tightening Couple de serrage
torque 7.1 Nm préconisé 7,1 Nm
Seite/Page 2 von/of/de 13 © Brüel & Kjaer Vibro GmbH / vs06x07xdef / 27.01.2015
C 102 804.001 / V05
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten!
Technical specifications subject to change!
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
Schutzart nach DIN 40 050 Protective class as per DIN 40 050 Indice de protection d'après
DIN 40 050
IP 66 IP 66 IP 66
Gewicht des Sensors ohne Kabel Weight of sensor without cable Poids (sans câble)
ca. 500 g approx. 500 g env. 500 g
EMV EMC CEM
EN 61326-1 : 2006 EN 61326-1 : 2006 EN 61326 : 2006
WEEE-Reg.-Nr. DE 69572330 WEEE-Reg.-No. DE 69572330 WEEE-Reg.-N°. DE 69572330

Produktkategorie / product category / catégorie de produits /
Anwendungsbereich: 9 application area: 9 domaine d'application: 9
Technische Daten für Technical Data for VS-068 Données techniques pour le
VS-068 und VS-069 and VS-069 VS-068 et le VS-069
Messgröße Measuring parameter Grandeur de mesure

Schwinggeschwindigkeit Vibration velocity vitesse vibratoire
Messprinzip Measuring principle Principe de mesure
elektrodynamisch electrodynamic électrodynamique
Übertragungsfaktor E bei f = 80 Hz Sensitivity E at f = 80 Hz Facteur de transmission E
à f = 80 Hz
100 mV RL 100 mV RL 100 mV RL
E= x E= x E= x
mm / s 4 kΩ + R L mm / s 4 kΩ + R L mm / s 4 kΩ + R L
mV
mm/s
150
120 1
100
80 2
3
60
50
40
30
25
20
5 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 50 100 150200 300 500 1000 2000 Hz
300 600 900 1500 3000 6000 12000 30000 60000 120000 1/min
Kurve Empfindlichkeit
Curve Sensitivity
Courbe
RL Sensibilité 4 kOhm
+5% Ri Lastwider-
stand
1 1MOhm 100mV/mm/s U R = Resistance
L
2 50 kOhm 92 mV/mm/s Résistance
à la charge
3 27 kOhm 87 mV/mm/s V
VSB11 (050405)
Typischer Frequenzgang und Typical frequency response and Réponse en fréquence typique et
Übertragungsfaktor sensitivity facteur de transmission
© Brüel & Kjaer Vibro GmbH / vs06x07xdef / 27.01.2015 Seite/Page 3 von/of/de 13

C 102 804.001 / V05
Technische Änderungen vorbehalte
Technical specifications subject to chang
Spécifications techniques sous réserve de modification
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
Innenwiderstand Internal impedance Résistance interne

4 kΩ ±5% 4 kΩ ±5% 4 kΩ ±5%
Querempfindlichkeit Transverse sensitivity Sensibilité transversale
≤7% ≤7% ≤7%
Eigenfrequenz fo Natural frequency fo Fréquence propre fo
8 Hz ± 10 % 8 Hz ± 10% 8 Hz ± 10 %
Arbeitstemperaturbereich Operating temperature range Température de travail
-40 ... + 80 °C -40 ... + 80 °C (short-term -40 ... + 80 °C (+ 100 °C
(kurzzeitig + 100 °C) max. + 100 °C) pour courte période)
Max. zulässiger Schwingweg Max. admissible vibration Déplacement vibratoire
displacement maximal admissible
± 0,45 mm ± 0,45 mm ± 0,45 mm
Kabelschutz Cable protection Protection du câble
Stahlschutzschlauch mit PU- Flexible steel protective hose Gaine de protection en acier
Ummantelung encased with PU material avec revêtement PU
Magnetfeldempfindlichkeit Magnetic field sensitivity Sensibilité par rapport au champ
magnétique
< 0 ,03 mm / s < 0 ,03 mm / s < 0 ,03 mm / s
0 ,1 mT 0 ,1 mT 0 ,1 mT
Lieferumfang Scope of supply Contenu de la livraison

Sensor Sensor Capteur
1 Gewindeadapter M10 x M10 1 Thread adapter M10 x M10 1 adaptateur fileté M10 x M10
1 Gewindeadapter M10 x M8 1 Thread adapter M10 x M8 1 adapteteur fileté M10 x M8
Dokumentation Documentation Documentation
Gewicht Weigth Poids
ca. 1500 g approx. 1500 g env. 1500 g
Technische Daten für VS-077 Technical Data for VS-077 Données techniques pour le
VS-077

Schwinggeschwindigkeit Vibration velocity vitesse de vibration
à f = 80 Hz
E= x E= x E= x
mm / s 3 kΩ + R L mm / s 3 kΩ + R L mm / s 3 kΩ + R L

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
mV
mm/s
120
100
80
1
60 2
50
40
3
30
25
20
15
12
10
8
6
5 6 8 10 15 20 30 4050 100150 200 300 500 1000 2000 Hz
300 600 900 1500 3000 6000 12000 30000 60000 120000 1/min
Curve RL Sensitivity
Sensibilité 3 kOhm
Courbe +2% Ri Lastwider-
stand
1 1 MOhm 75 mV/mm/s U RL = Resistance
27 kOhm 68 mV/mm/s Résistance
2 à la charge
3 6,8 kOhm 53 mV/mm/s V
VSB12 (050425)
Typischer Frequenzgang und Typical frequency response and Réponse en fréquences typique et
3 kΩ ±5% 3 kΩ ±5% 3 kΩ ±5%
≤5% ≤5% ≤5%
15 Hz ± 2,5 % 15 Hz ± 2.5 % 15 Hz ± 2,5 %
-40 ... + 80 °C -40 ... + 80 °C -40 ... + 80 °C
Max. zulässiger Schwingweg Max. admissible vibration Déplacement vibratoire maximal
displacement admissible
± 1 mm ± 1 mm ± 1 mm
Stahlschutzschlauch mit PU- Flexible steel protective hose Gaine de protection en acier
Ummantelung encased with PU material avec revêtement PU
magnétique
< 0 ,024 mm / s < 0 ,024 mm / s < 0 ,024 mm / s
0 ,1 mT 0 ,1 mT 0 ,1 mT

1 Gewindeadapter M10 x M10 1 Thread adaptor M10 x M10 1 adaptateur fileté M10 x M10
1 Gewindeadapter M10 x M8 1 Thread adaptor M10 x M8 1 adaptateur fileté M 10 x M8
ca. 1500 g approx. 1500 g env. 1500 g

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
Technische Daten für VS-079 Technical Data for VS-079 Données techniques pour le
VS-079

Schwinggeschwindigkeit Vibration velocity vitesse vibratoire
à f = 80 Hz
E = x E = x E = x
mm / s 3 kΩ + RL mm / s 3 kΩ + RL mm / s 3 kΩ + RL
mV
mm/s
100
80
60 1
50 2
40
30
3
25
20
15
12
10
8
6
5 6 8 10 15 20 30 4050 100 150200 300 500 1000 2000 Hz

300 600 900 1500 3000 6000 12000 30000 60000 120000 1/min
RL Sensitivity
Curve
Sensibilité 3 kOhm
Courbe +6% Lastwider-
Ri
stand
1 1 MOhm 70 mV/mm/s U R L= Resistance
Résistance
2 27 kOhm 63 mV/mm/s à la charge
3 6,8 kOhm 48 mV/mm/s V
VSB13a
Typischer Frequenzgang und Typical frequency response and Réponse en fréquence typique et

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079

3 kΩ ±5% 3 kΩ ±5% 3 kΩ ±5%
≤6% ≤6% ≤6%
15 Hz ± 5 % 15 Hz ± 5 % 15 Hz ± 5 %
-40 ... + 200 °C -40 ... + 200 °C -40 ... + 200 °C
Max. zulässiger Schwingweg Max. admissible vibration Déplacement vibratoire
displacement maximal admissible
± 1 mm ± 1 mm ± 1 mm
Edelstahlschutzschlauch nicht Rust-free stainless-steel, not Gaine acier inoxydable
rostend, nicht ummantelt encased
magnétique
< 0 ,024 mm / s < 0 ,024 mm / s < 0 ,024 mm / s
0 ,1 mT 0 ,1 mT 0 ,1 mT

ca. 1200 g approx. 1200 g env. 1200 g

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
Montage Assembly Montage

Sensor befestigen Fastening of sensor Fixation du capteur
Grundsätzlich gilt: The following applies on Les points suivants doivent

principle: toujours être observés :
Hinweis: Note: Nota :
Beachten Sie bei der Montage die Observe the assembly drawing Respectez le schéma ci-dessus
obige Montagezeichnung. Wählen above during assembly. Choose a lors de l'assemblage. Choisir une
Sie die Lage der Montagefläche position on the mounting surface position de montage au plus prêt
direkt am Lagergehäuse unter der directly at the bearing housing de la surface du palier en tenant
Beachtung der Messrichtung des taking into account the measuring compte de la direction de mesure
Sensors. direction of the sensor. du capteur.
• Die Montagefläche hat einen • The mounting surface has a • Surface de montage de diamètre
Mindestdurchmesser von 35 mm minimum diameter of 35 mm and is minimum 35 mm et usinée à plat
und ist plan bearbeitet machined flat (surface roughness (rugosité de surface Ra de 0,8 µm)
(Rautiefe Ra 0.8 µm) Ra 0.8 µm)
• Die M10 Gewindebohrung ist 25 • The M10 threaded hole is 25 mm • Le trou fileté M10 a 25 mm de
mm tief und liegt zentral in und deep and is located in the centre profondeur et se trouve au centre
senkrecht zur Montagefläche. Sie and perpendicular to the mounting et perpendiculaire à la surface de
ist angefast und entgratet. surface. It is bevelled and montage. Il est biseautée et
deburred. ébarber.
• Die Montagefläche ist staubfrei und • The mounting surface is clean and • La surface de montage est propre
gesäubert. dust free. et préparée.
1) Schrauben Sie den 1) Screw the threaded pin 1) Visser la tige filetée comme
Gewindestift gemäß 15 mm deep into the illustré avec 15 mm de
Abbildung 15 mm tief in die mounting surface as pictured profondeur dans la surface
Montagefläche ein und and secure it against de montage, fixez-le et
sichern ihn mit Schrauben- loosening using a screw utiliser un dispositif de
sicherung gegen Lösen (z.B. locking device (e.g. LOCTITE blocage (LOCTITE 243 force
LOCTITE 243 mittelfest, 243 medium strength, moyenne, LOCTITE 270
LOCTITE 270 hochfest). LOCTITE 270 high strength). haute résistance).
2) Befestigen Sie den Sensor 2) Attach the sensor to the 2) Fixez le capteur à la tige
auf den Gewindestift unter threaded pin taking into filetée en tenant compte du
Beachtung des empfohlenen account the recommended couple de serrage de 14 Nm
Anzugsmoments von 14 Nm tightening torque of 14 Nm (M10xM10) ou 7.1 Nm
(M10xM10) bzw. 7,1 Nm (M10xM10) or 7.1 Nm (M10 x M8). Bloquer le
(M10 x M8). Sichern Sie den (M10 x M8). Secure the capteur avec un dispositif vis
Sensor mit Schrauben- sensor against loosening with de blocage (LOCTITE 243
sicherung gegen Lösen (z.B. a screw locking device (e.g. de force moyenne).
LOCTITE 243 mittelfest). LOCTITE 243 medium
strength).
C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
3) Die Einschraubtiefe des 3) The penetration depth of the 3) La pénétration du goujon

Sensors soll maximal 10 mm sensor should be a maximum dans le capteur doit être au
betragen! of 10 mm. maximum de 10 mm.
Anschlusskabel Connecting Cable Câble de connexion
Hinweis: Note: Nota:
Zum Schutz gegen mechanische For protection against mechanical Pour une protection mécanique et
Beschädigungen und zur Erhöhung damage and for increasing the EMC pour augmenter la sécurité EMC le
der EMV-Sicherheit ist das safety the extension cable must be câble d'extension doit être posé
Anschlusskabel in laid in steel protective conduits and dans des conduits de protection en
Stahlschutzschläuchen und -rohren pipes (bending radius rmin = 60 acier (rayon de courbure rmin = 60
zu verlegen (Biegeradius rmin = 60 mm). mm).
mm).
4) Achten Sie bei der Installation 4) When installing the extension 4) Lors de l'installation du câble
des Anschlusskabels/- cable / protective conduit, d'extension / gaine de
Schutzschlauches darauf, make sure that they are laid protection, assurez-vous que
dass durch die Verlegung in such a way that there is no toute tension soit évitée au
während des Betriebes keine tension in the sensor system niveau du capteur en
Kräfte in das Sensorsystem during operation. This avoids fonctionnement. Cela évitera
eingeleitet werden. corrupting the measuring toute altération des résultats
So vermeiden Sie eine results. de mesure.
Verfälschung der Mess-
ergebnisse.
Bearbeitung Preparing the steel protective Installation de la gaine de

Stahlschutzschlauch conduit protection
Um den Stahlschutzschlauch an die Adapt the steel protective conduit to Pour adapter la gaine de protection
örtlichen Gegebenheiten anzupassen, the site conditions by taking the aux conditions locales de l’installation,
wird wie folgt gekürzt: following steps: elle doit être raccourcie de la manière
suivante:
• Bei Schutzschlauch mit Geflecht- • If the protective conduit has a • Lorsque la gaine comprend une
schirm ist die Trennstelle gegen braided shield, to ensure a clean tresse de blindage, l’endroit de la
Ausfasern des Geflechtschirms vor cut through the braided wrap a coupure doit être entouré de ruban
dem Schnitt mit Metallklebeband zu strip of metallised adhesive tape adhésif, afin d’éviter que la tresse
umwickeln. around the area where the cut is to ne se démonte.
be made before starting the cut.
• Schutzschlauch mit geeigneter • Cut the protective conduit with a • Couper proprement la gaine à la
Schneidvorrichtung trennen, z.B. suitable cutting tool, e.g. metal longueur désirée.
Metallsäge, Trennscheibe. saw, cutting disc.
• Schlauch entgraten. • De-burr the cut end. • Ebavurer le bout de la gaine.

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
Montage Stahlschutz- Mounting steel protective Montage de la gaine pour les

schlauch bei VS-068/069/077 hose at VS-068/069/077 capteurs VS-068/069/077
Druckmutter - verlängerte Version

Pressure screw - longer version
Ecrou de pression, version longue Dichtring Gehäuse
MS-Innentülle Connector body
Sealing ring Brass-ferrule
Joint Boîtier
EMV-Schutzschlauch AC-2201 Embout
EMC protective conduit AC-2201 O-Ring
Gaine CEM type AC-2201 O-ring
Joint torique
Abmantelungsbreite 1,5-fache Breite

des EMV-Druckrings O-Ring
Dismantling width 1.5 x of EMC EMV-MS-Druckring O-ring
brass-thrust collar width EMC-Brass-thrust collar Joint torique
Découper soigneusement l'isolant sur Anneau de pression CEM AC2202 (031014)
une longueur équivalente à 1,5 fois celle
de l'anneau de pression
• Um für den EMV-Schutzschlauch • To achleve the optimum shielding • Pour obtenir les meilleures
Typ AC-2201 die optimalen performance of AC-2201 according conditions de blindage, selon la
Schirmungseigenschaften nach VDE 0245 and DIN 47250 part 4, norme VDE 0245, avec la gaine
VDE 0245 zu erhalten und die the protective conduit with AC-2201, et pour répondre aux
Vorschriften nach DIN 47250 Teil 4 connector should be assembled as exigences de la norme VDE 0245
zu erfüllen, ist der Schutzschlauch follows: (4ème partie), il convient de monter
mit der Verschraubung wie folgt zu le raccord de la manière suivante :
montieren:
• Schutzschlauch passend kürzen. • Cut protective conduit to • Couper la gaine à la longueur

appropriate length. désirée (voir le paragraphe 3.2).
• Verschraubung demontieren und • Disassemble connector and slide • Démonter le raccord et engager
Druckmutter (verlängerte Version) pressure screw (long version) over l'écrou de pression (version
über den Schutzschlauch schieben. the conduit. longue) sur la gaine.
• Dichtring mit abgeschrägter Kante • Slide sealing ring over the conduit • Engager le joint sur la gaine, coté
in Richtung Druckmutter über den with tapered edge facing the conique en direction de l'écrou de
Schutzschlauch schieben. pressure screw. pression.
• Den Kunststoffmantel vorsichtig in • Uncover the outer jacket of the • Découper soigneusement l'isolant
der 1,5-fachen Breite des conduit with care leaving a section sur une longueur équivalente à 1,5
Druckrings abmanteln. as long as 1.5 x the width of the fois celle de l'anneau de pression.
brass-thrust collar.
• Überstehende Cu-Flechtfäden mit • Cut copper shield with scissors • Découper proprement les fils de
Schere sauber und plan zum flush with the conduit. cuivre, à l'aide d'une paire de
Schlauch entfernen. ciseaux.

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
• Druckring seitenrichtig, gemäß • Slide brass-thrust collar (with taper • Engager l'anneau de pression sur
Bildfolge, auf Schutzschlauch side as shown) over the conduit as la gaine conformément au schéma.
schieben. illustrated above.
• Innentülle bis zum Anschlag in den • Screw brass ferrule into the conduit • Visser l'embout à fond sur la gaine.
Schutzschlauch eindrehen. until it stops.
• Verschraubung mit den aufmon- • Assemble the rest of the individual • Visser toutes les parties du raccord
tierten Teilen zusammenfügen und components and tighten so that the pour obtenir un bon contact,
zur guten Kontaktierung fest O-ring is not movable. jusqu'à ce que le joint ne soit plus
verschrauben, bis montierter mobile.
O-Ring nicht mehr bewegbar ist.
• Für flüssigkeitsdichte Installationen • For liquid-tight installations install • Pour que le raccordement de la
an der Anschlussgewindeseite the additional O-ring at the gaine soit étanche aux liquides, il
O-Ring montieren. connector thread side. convient d'installer un joint torique
sur le filetage du raccord.

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079
Montage Stahlschutz- Fixing steel protective Montage de la gaine pour

schlauch bei VS-079 conduit at VS-079 le capteur VS-079
A B C
E
VSB26 (031023)
D
A Stahlschutzschlauch A Steel protective hose A Gaine de protection en acier

B Dichtring (Messing) B Sealing ring (brass) B Bague d’étanchéité (Anneau)
C Anschlussstück C Connecting piece C Raccord
D Überwurfmutter D Union nut D Ecrou-raccord
E Innentülle E Inner bushing E Embout
• Stahlschutzschlauch passend • Cut protective conduit to • Couper la gaine à la longueur

kürzen (siehe 3.2) appropriate length (see 3.2) désirée (voir le paragraphe 3.2).
• Überwurfmutter und Dichtring auf • Slide the union nut and sealing ring • Engager l’écrou-raccord et la
den Stahlschutzschlauch bis hinter on steel protective hose behind the bague d’étanchéité sur la gaine
die Abschneidestelle schieben cutting point
• Innentülle auf den • Screw the inner tube onto the steel • Visser l’embout sur la gaine
Stahlschutzschlauch drehen protective conduit
• Stahlschutzschlauch über das • Slide steel protective hose slide • Faire passer le câble du capteur
Sensorkabel ziehen und die over sensor cable and fix au travers de la gaine et installer
Schutzschlauchverschraubung am protective hose joint to the sensor les raccords des deux cotés de la
Sensor und Stahlschutzschlauch and the steel protective hose gaine
montieren
• Sensorkabel passend ablängen • Adjust sensor cable length to suit • Couper le câble à la longueur
und abisolieren and ansulate désirée et dénuder ses brins
• Abschirmung an Sensorkabel • Solder screen onto sensor cable; • Souder un fil à l’extrémité du
anlöten; Lötstelle mit Schrumpf- protect soldering joint by means of blindage et isoler cette soudure à
schlauch oder Gummitülle shrink tubing and rubber bushing l’aide de gaine thermo-rétractable
schützen
• Kabelenden mit Aderendhülsen • Fix end sleeves to cable ends • Equiper les extrémités du câble
versehen d’embouts appropriés

C 102 804.001 / V05
VS - 068 / 069 / 077 / 079

C 102 804.001 / V05
Sicherheitshinweise D
Safety Instructions GB
Consignes de sécurité F
Instrucciones de seguridad E
Istruzzioni di sicurezza I
Instrucoes de seguranca P
Veiligheidswenken NL
Säkerhetsanvisningar S
Sikkerhedshenvisninger DK
Värähtelynmittaus SF
Υποδείξεις ασφαλείας GR
Sigurnosne napomene YU
Указания по безопасности RUS
Instrucţiuni pentru securitatea muncii RO

Zasady bezpieczeństwa PL
Titreşim ölçüm
Указания за безопасност
C 102 813.001
Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH
Leydhecker Str. 10
64293 Darmstadt
Service Hotline:
Tel.: +49(0)6151 / 428 1400
Fax: +49(0)6151 / 428 1401
E-Mail: info@bkvibro.com
Internet: www.bkvibro.com
Juni 2010
Safety Instructions
GB
Safety Instructions for the Handling of Vibration
Measuring and Monitoring Systems
In particular, the systems concerned are measuring, diagnosis and monitoring instruments,
hereafter called "system".
When handling these systems including accessories, for protection from danger of injury,
pay heed to the following safety instructions.
For your own safety, make yourself familiar with applicable safety instructions before using
the system.
Keep safety instructions within reach of all persons using the system
Pictograms and their Meanings

Our systems are designed to the latest state of the art and the approved safety technical
regulations. However, there is a number of residual risks, documentation refers to in form
of pictograms. The following pictograms are used:
Source of danger Dangerous electrical voltage
Fuse Specified ground
Specified protective conductor
User Qualification
Settings are effected on systems which if incorrect cause serious damage to machines
and/or persons.
Ensure that all work in conjunction with our systems is performed by skilled, expert and
authorized workers. Among these works are:
Installation and Commissioning
Installation and commissioning primarily concern work on electrical equipment. These
works exclusively be performed by electricians or workers instructed and supervised
by an electrician in accordance with electrotechnical regulations/directives.
Change of System Specification
Any change of system specification has its effects on monitoring process with
stationary systems and on the measuring sequence with portable measuring systems.
Error Messages
Any such message require to be heeded; the cause of error, to be detected and
eliminated.
Maintenance and Repair>
Pay heed to the applicable safety instructions given in Maintenance and Repair
Manual.
-6-
Safety Instructions
Source of Danger
In handling our systems and accessories, live parts are a potential source
of danger. These are:
Voltages in General
As a rule, voltages over 50 V are considered dangerous.
Power Infeed
Hazardous areas are in particular all live parts of system, e.g. certain
soldering points, conducting paths, terminals for mains connection, relay
contacts.
Before opening system unit, disconnect all wires from power supply.
External Voltages
When disconnecting system, watch out for external voltages.
Fuses
With systems provided with exchangeable fuse, exclusively use original
fuses.
Protective Conductor
Ensure that conductor is sufficiently sized and expertly designed.
Storage Battery/Battery Exchange
When exchanging battery, pay heed to instructions given in Operating
Manual !
Intended Use
of System
− Use system exclusively as originally intended. Any use other than originally
intended is prohibited. Brüel & Kjær Vibro does not assume any liability for
damages resulting from inappropriate use.
The user is solely responsible. For originally intended use, see system
documentation.
− Ensure that system is exposed only to admissible environmental influences

specified in technical system data sheet.
− Maintain electrical equipment in regular intervals.

Remedy defects, e.g. loose wires, defective connectors, immediately.
of Sensor
Exclusively use sensor as specified in data sheet. Any use other than specified is
considered inappropriate.
of Cable
− Exclusively use cable as specified in data sheet. Any use other than specified is
considered inappropriate.
− Never use cable to pull plug out of socket.
− Check cable and connectors in regular intervals.

Have any damage immediately repaired by a specialist
-7-
Safety Instructions
Use of Bought-In Items

For pickups and accessories not supplied by Brüel & Kjær Vibro the user is solely
responsible. The user is bound to ensure that the demands on electrical safety and
technical properties conform with the agreed data.
Brüel & Kjær Vibro does not assume any responsibility for bought-in items.
The user is liable for any defect on Brüel & Kjær Vibro products caused by bought-in
items
The User Is Responsible for...

Setup
The user is responsible for system setup as well as for the safety of the operating
environment. He is to ensure that all applicable national and international safety
standards are applied and heeded.
Functional Safety
Before commissioning a plant, user has to check system, or plant, for functional
safety.
The user is bound to ensure that any peripheral used grants safe operation of our
system.
Recommendations to User
If the use of the system in conjunction with machines or plant sections can produce risks
outside of Brüel & Kjær Vibro's responsibility, the user is expected to prepare and
distribute safety technical instructions or warnings and to ensure that the personnel
concerned has received and understood same.
Note:
If system is integrated into a machine or designed to be assembled, commissioning must
not take place until the machine the system is to be integrated in conforms to the EC
directives.
Prohibition of Unauthorized Modifications

System and accessories must not be changed neither in construction nor safety
technology without the express consent of Brüel & Kjær Vibro. Any unauthorized
modification excludes Brüel & Kjær Vibro's liability for resulting damages.
This applies in particular to repair work, soldering work on P.C. boards and replacement of
components/modules/P.C. boards.
When replacing parts, exclusively use the original Brüel & Kjær Vibro spare parts.
-8-
Allgemeine Erdungsempfehlung
General grounding recommendation
Recommandations générales de mise à la terre
Beschreibung
Instruction
Description
C 102 812.001
Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH
Leydhecker Str. 10
64293 Darmstadt
Germany:
Tel.: 06151 / 428 1100
Fax: 06151 / 428 1200
E-Mail: info@bkvibro.de
Internet: www.bkvibro.com
Service Hotline:
Tel.: +49(0)6151 / 428 1400
Fax: +49(0)6151 / 428 1401
Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Jegliche Vervielfältigungen dieser Technischen Dokumentation, gleich welchem Verfahren,
ist ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH, auch
auszugsweise, untersagt.
Änderungen ohne vorherige Ankündigung bleiben vorbehalten.
Copyright 2006 Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH, D-64293 Darmstadt
All rights reserved.

No part of this technical documentation may be reproduced without prior written permission
of Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH.
Subject to change without prior notice
Tous droits réservés.

Toute reproduction de la présentedocumenta-tion technique, par quelque procédé que ce
soitest interdite, même partiellement, sans l'autorisation préalableécrite de la Société Brüel &
Kjær Vibro GmbH.
Tous droits de modifications réservés sans avis préalable.
Erdung Grounding Mise à la terre
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents
Table des matières
1 Allgemeine Erdungsempfehlung......................................................................... 3
1 General grounding recommendation .................................................................. 3
1 Recommandations générales de mise à la terre ................................................ 3
1.1 Was beschreibt diese Erdungsempfehlung?................................................................................. 3

1.1 What is described in this recommendation? ................................................................................. 3
1.1 Que décrivent ces recommandations ?......................................................................................... 3
2 Allgemeines........................................................................................................ 4
2 General .............................................................................................................. 4
2 Généralités ......................................................................................................... 4
3 Erdung als Schutzmaßnahme bei indirekter Berührung von

elektrischen Betriebsmitteln................................................................................ 6
3 Grounding as a protective measure on indirect contact with
electrical equipment ........................................................................................... 6
3 Mise à la terre : protection contre un contact accidentel .................................... 6
4 Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV) ......................................................... 8

4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMV).................................................................. 8
4 Compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) ............................................................. 8
4.1 Allgemeines ................................................................................................................................... 8

4.1 General.......................................................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Généralités .................................................................................................................................... 8
© Erdung DEF 12.4.2006 Seite/Page 1 von/of/de 24

4.2 Äußere Maßnahmen für die EMV-Sicherheit ................................................................................ 9

4.2 External measures for EMV security............................................................................................. 9
4.2 Précautions à prendre pour garantir la CEM................................................................................. 9
4.2.1 Ableiten von Störungen (EMV) .................................................................................... 10
4.2.1 Diversion of interference (EMV)................................................................................... 10
4.2.1 Elimination des perturbations (CEM) ........................................................................... 10
4.2.2 Abschirmen gegen Störungen (EMV) .......................................................................... 12

4.2.2 Shielding against interference (EMV) .......................................................................... 12
4.2.2 Blindage contre les perturbations (CEM)..................................................................... 12
4.2.3 Richtige Kabelwahl und -verlegung ............................................................................. 16

4.2.3 Correct cable selection and installation ....................................................................... 16
4.2.3 Choix des types de câbles et modes de câblage ........................................................ 16
4.2.4 Zusätzliche Entstörmaßnahmen .................................................................................. 17

4.2.4 Additional interference-suppression measures............................................................ 17
4.2.4 Mise en œuvre de dispositifs d’antiparasitage............................................................. 17
5 Verbinden von 0V-Bezugspotentialen .............................................................. 18

5 Connection of 0V reference potentials ............................................................. 18
5 Raccordement du potentiel de référence (0V).................................................. 18
6 Potential und Bezugspotential .......................................................................... 20

6 Potential and reference potential...................................................................... 20
6 „Potentiel“ et „potentiel de référence“ ............................................................... 20
Seite/Page 2 von/of/de 24 © Erdung DEF 12.4.2006

1 Allgemeine 1 General grounding 1 Recommandations

Erdungsempfehlung recommendation générales de mise à la
terre
1.1 Was beschreibt diese 1.1 What is described in 1.1 Que décrivent ces
Erdungsempfehlung? this recommendation? recommandations ?
Die folgenden Seiten geben praxis- The following pages provide practical Ces pages donnent des informations
nahe Informationen zu den Themen information on the subjects of pratiques les plus actuelles sur les
Erdung, Schirmung, EMV-Sicherheit grounding, shielding, EMV security thèmes „Mise à la terre“, „Blindage“,
und Bezugspotenial, entsprechend and reference potential in accordance „Compatibilité électromagnétique“
dem gegenwärtigen Erkenntnisstand. with present-day practices. (CEM) et „Potentiels de référence“.
Diese Informationen ... This information ... Ces informations ...
• beschränken sich im wesentlichen • is limited mainly to the spheres of • se limitent aux points essentiels
auf den Bereich Montage und installation and operation of our concernant la mise en service et le
Betrieb unserer vorwiegend in der established product range’s fonctionnement industriel des
Messtechnik angesiedelten measurement techniques. appareils de notre gamme.
Produktpalette.
• erheben nicht den Anspruch auf • makes no claim to be a • n’ont pas l’ambition de décrire de
eine vollständige Behandlung des comprehensive summary of the manière exhaustive, sous ses
umfangreichen Themas Erdung, extensive subject of grounding with aspects théorique et pratique, le
mit all seinen Teilgebieten in its many theoretical and practical thème de la mise à la terre.
Theorie und Praxis. facets.
• können nicht ohne weiteres auf • cannot be used as described in • ne peuvent pas être extrapolées à
andere Anwendungsgebiete this manual in other grounding d’autres domaines que ceux
übertragen werden. applications without additional expressément cités.
information.
Ergänzend zu dieser allgemeinen The corresponding instructions in our Ces recommandations sont
Erdungsempfehlung sind die respective instrument manuals should complétées par celles qui sont décrites
entsprechenden Angaben in unseren be used as a supplement to these dans les manuels d’emploi de nos
jeweiligen Gerätebeschreibungen zu grounding recommendations différents appareils.
beachten.
Grundregel: Basic rule: Règle de base :

Erd- und Potentialverhält- Check the ground and Vérifier les niveaux des
nisse prüfen ! potential conditions! différents potentiels de
référence.
Bevor bei der Montage unserer Before the cable connections are Avant d’effectuer le câblage de l’un
Geräte Kabelverbindungen made at an installation of our de nos appareils, il est vivement
hergestellt werden, müssen die instruments the on-site grounding, conseillé de vérifier les différents
örtlichen Erd- und Potentialverhält- potential and power conditions potentiels de référence, ainsi que la
nisse sowie die Netzverhältnisse must be checked. If critical valeur de la tension d’alimentation.
geprüft werden. Werden dabei potential differences are found Si ces valeurs ne sont pas
kritische Potential-unterschiede during this check, (see section 4) admissibles (voir le paragraphe 4),
festgestellt (siehe Abschnitt 4), suitable measures in the sense of l’exploitant devra mettre en œuvre
müssen betreiberseitig geeignete these grounding recommendations les mesures nécessaires au
Maßnahmen im Sinne dieser must be taken by the operators of rétablissement d’une situation
Erdungsempfehlung getroffen the equipment. normale.
werden.

Ausnahme: Exception: Exception :

Sonderfall explosions- Explosive areas Installation en zone
gefährdeter Bereich explosible
In explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen In explosive areas or the areas Dans les zones qui présentent un
und im Bereich von Zuleitungen zu surrounding them, grounding danger d’explosion ou dans celles
diesen können Vorschriften gelten, recommendations which deviate qui possèdent des conduites vers
die von dieser Erdungsempfehlung from these instructions or which ces zones, il peut exister des
abweichen oder zusätzliche require additional measures to be directives supplémentaires ou qui
Maßnahmen erforderlich machen. taken may be required. diffèrent des recommandations de
ce manuel.
Dies muss für jeden einzelnen Fall These must be carefully checked Ceci doit dans tous les cas être
sorgfältig überprüft werden. for each individual case. soigneusement vérifié.
Zusätzlich gilt: Supplementary note: De plus :

Neben dieser Erdungsempfehlung In addition to these grounding Outre les recommandations de mise à
gelten unsere Sicherheitshinweise, recommendations, our safety la terre, nous proposons dans une
die jeder Dokumentation als instructions which accompany all brochure séparée des
gesonderte Broschüre beiliegen. documentation in the form of a special recommandations de sécurité.
brochure are also to be considered.
2 Allgemeines 2 General 2 Généralités

Was bedeutet „Erden" What does „Grounding" Que signifie „mise à la
mean? terre "
Als "Erden" bezeichnet man im In general language usage the term La mise à la terre désigne tout
allgemeinen Sprachgebrauch jeden „grounding“ means any connection raccordement d’un conducteur à un
Anschluss an ein Bezugspotential through a so-called „ground“ to a potentiel de référence (voir le
(siehe Abschnitt 4), das über conductive earth point which provides paragraphe 4), qui est luimême
sogenannte "Erder" mit dem a reference potential (see section 4). directement relié électriquement à la
leitfähigen Erdreich verbunden ist. Grounds are conductive components terre.
Erder sind leitfähige Teile, die in which are electricaly in good contact
gutem elektrischen Kontakt mit dem with earth and whose connection point
Erdreich stehen und deren is mostly led from out of the earth.
Anschlusspunkte meist aus dem
Erdreich herausgeführt sind.
Erder können, je nach Funktion oder Grounds can be, depending on the Selon les conditions locales
örtlichen Gegebenheiten, verschieden site conditions, either provided by a d’exploitation, une „terre“ peut se
ausgeführt sein z.B. als Staberder, rod, a flat band or a plate. présenter sous différentes formes,
Banderder oder Platenerder. telles que : un piquet, une barre ou
bien une platine.

Warum „Erden"? Why is „grounding" Pourquoi une „mise à la

necessary? terre"?
Das Verbinden mit Erdpotential A connection to ground potential has Le raccordement d’un appareil à des
verfolgt unterschiedliche Ziele: various objectives: potentiels de référence permet
d’atteindre les buts suivants :
• das Erden als Schutzmaßnahme • A protective measure in acordance • Protection du personnel. Ce point
im Sinne der geltenden VDE- with the valid VDE prescriptions dépend des différentes exigences
Vorschriften (DIN VDE 0100) und (DIN VDE 0100) and low potential nationales
der Niederspannungsrichtlinien, guidelines whereby various
wobei diverse nationale national distinctions must be
Unterschiede zu beachten sind observed
• das Verhindern von Störein- • Prevention of disturbance • Compatibilité électromagnétique

strahlungen und Störausstrah- emmissions and immissions (CEM)
lungen im Sinne der EMV- according to the EMV guidelines
Richtlinien
• das für den Betrieb elektrischer • For the required determination of a • Détermination d’un „0 volt“
Geräte und Einrichtungen common reference potential for commun à toute une installation
erforderliche Festlegen eines operation of electrical instruments
gemeinsamen Bezugspotentials and equipment
• andere Ziele, die für diese • Other objectives, which may not be • Autres buts de moindre importance
Erdungsempfehlung jedoch nicht relevant for these grounding pour le présent exposé.
relevant sind recommendations
Bezeichnungen für Designations for reference Repérage des conducteurs

Bezugs- und Erdungsleiter and ground points de référence et de mise à
la terre
Für Bezugs und Erdungspunkte sind The following designations are Les pictogrammes suivants sont
die folgenden Bezeichnungen üblich: commonly used for reference and utilisés pour repérer les conducteurs
grounding points: de référence et de mise à la terre :
0 V/Masse - allgemein für das 0 V/ Ground - generally for the 0 V/masse - symbole général
Bezugspotential elektrischer reference potential of electrical d’un potentiel de référence
Schaltungen switching
0 VA - für Bezugsleiter 0 VA - for reference points in 0 VA - „0 volt“ analogique

innerhalb analoger Schaltkreise eines the analog circuits of instruments
Geräts
0 VD - für Bezugsleiter 0 VD - for reference points in 0 VD - „0 volt“ numérique

innerhalb digitaler Schaltkreise eines the digital circuits of instruments
Geräts
TE - für den Sternpunkt TE - for the star connection TE - point collecteur

(meist Sammelschiene), an dem 0 VA (mainly a bus-bar), to which the 0 VA (souvent une barre) du 0 VA et du
und 0 VD zusammengeführt sind. TE and 0 VD are connnected. TE is often 0 VD. TE est également désigné par
wird oft auch als "Elektronikerde" oder de-signated also as „Electronic „0V électronique“ ou bien „terre de
"Messerde" bezeichnet ground" or „Measurement ground". mesure“.

SE - Sternpunkt (meist SE - Star connection SE - point collecteur

Sammelschiene), an dem alle Kabel- (mainly a bus-bar), to which all the (souvent une barre) des blindages des
schirme z.B. in einem Gehäuse cable shields, e.g in an instrument câbles. SE est souvent relié à PE.
aufgelegt werden. SE ist oder wird housing, are connected. SE is
meist mit PE verbunden. normally or mostly connected with PE.
PE - für den Anschluss des PE - for connection of the PE - point collecteur des
grün-gelben Schutzleiters der Netzver- green/yellow protective ground cable conducteurs jaune/vert destinés à la
sorgung oder allgemeiner Schutz- of the power supply or a general protection du personnel.
erdungspunkt protective ground point.
TE und SE können mit PE verbunden TE and SE can be connected to PE TE et SE peuvent être raccordés à PE
werden, wenn PE störungsarm ist. Ist when PE is disturbance-free. If this is lorsque ce dernier est „propre“ au sens
das nicht der Fall, muss zumindest TE not the case TE must at least be électrique, c’est à dire exempt de
an eine getrennte, saubere (störungs- connected to a separate, clean parasites. Si tel n’est pas le cas, TE au
armen) Erde angeschlossen werden. (disturbance-free) ground point. moins doit être raccordé à une terre
spécialement préparée pour une telle
application.
FE - Betriebsstätten mit FE - Some operating FE - terre fonctionnelle.

konsequentem Erdungskonzept stellen plants which have a consistent Ce symbole supplémentaire peut
solche sogenannten Funktionserden grounding concept provide a so-called également exister dans certaines
FE zur Verfügung (z.B. in Schalt- „Functional ground“ FE , e.g. in control installations dont le concept de mise à
warten). rooms la terre a été particulièrement étudié.
3 Erdung als Schutz- 3 Grounding as a 3 Mise à la terre :

maßnahme bei protective measure on protection contre un
indirekter Berührung indirect contact with contact accidentel
von elektrischen electrical equipment
Betriebsmitteln
Elektrische Betriebsmittel besitzen Electrically operated equipment Les composants électriques

normalerweise einen oder mehrere normally consists of one or more so- possèdent généralement plusieurs
"Körper". called „bodies“. „corps“.
Körper sind nach DIN VDE 0100 Bodies“, according to DIN VDE 0100, Selon les normes, un „corps“ est une
berührbare leitfähige Teile, die im are contactable components which, in partie conductrice qui, contrairement
Gegensatz zu den "aktiven Teilen" contrast to „active“ components, can aux „parties actives“, ne peut se
des Betriebsmittels nur infolge eines only possess a potential in the case of trouver sous tension qu’à la suite d’un
Fehlers unter Spannung stehen a fault. Such potentials are designated défaut.
können. Solche Spannungen werden contact potentials and in case of Cette tension est alors appelée
als Berührungsspannungen indirect contact can cause currents „tension de contact“. Elle peut se
bezeichnet, die bei "indirektem which are dangerous to man. révéler dangereuse pour le personnel.
Berühren" gefährliche Körperströme
bei Mensch und Tier verursachen
können.
Beispiele für Körper sind Schalt- Examples of these so-called „bodies“ Exemples de „corps“ : armoires,
schränke, Gehäuse, Schaltgerüste, are cubicles, housings, contactor boîtiers, accessoires et platines de
Montageplatten usw. equipment, mounting panels, etc. montage.
Schutz vor Berührungsspannungen Protective grounding provides La mise à la terre est une protection
bietet die Schutzerdung. protection from contact potentials. contre un défaut accidentel.
Bei der Schutzerdung werden With protective grounding, conductive Elle est établie par le raccordement de
leitfähige Körper mit Erde verbunden bodies are connected to ground either ces „corps“ avec la terre, selon l’une
und zwar entweder des méthodes suivantes :

• mittels eines in der Netzversorgung • through a protective conductor • à l’aide du conducteur de

mitgeführten Schutzleiters oder supplied with the power supply or protection qui est acheminé dans
le câble d’alimentation, ou bien
• durch Anschluss an einen • through connection to a separate • à l’aide d’un conducteur séparé.
separaten lokalen Schutzerder local protective ground via their
mittels eines eigenen Schutzleiters. own protective conductor (ground
cable).
Diese Maßnahme bewirkt, dass im These measures have the effect that Cette mesure permet en cas de
Fehlerfall eine Schutzeinrichtung in the case of failure of the protective défaut, de couper l’alimentation, par
(Überstrom-, Fehlerstrom- oder equipment (over-voltage, incorrect- l’intermédiaire d’un dispositif adapté
Fehlerspannungsschutzeinrichtung) current or incorrect-voltage protective (fusible, disjoncteur, différentiel, ...)
das Betriebsmittel entweder voll- equipment) the operational ou bien de réduire l’intensité du
ständig vom Netz trennt oder die components are either completely courant à une valeur tolérable.
Berührungsspannung auf ein disconnected from power or the
zulässiges Maß reduziert. contact potential is reduced to a
permissible level.
Die zulässigen Berührungsspan- The permissible levels of contact Valeurs des tensions de contact
nungen betragen potentials are tolérables :
• bei Wechselspannung höchstens • Max. 50 Volts in the case of AC 50 V AC

50 Volt voltages ou
• bei Gleichspannung höchstens • Max. 120 Volts in the case of DC 120 V DC

120 Volt. voltages.
Höhere Berührungsspannungen Higher contact potentials cause Lorsque ces valeurs sont
verursachen gefährliche Körper- current levels which are extremely dépassées, un courant électrique
ströme, die zur Schädigung oder dangerous and can lead to injury or parcours le corps humain et peut
sogar zum Tode von Mensch und even death! conduire à de sévères lésions ou
Tier führen können! même à la mort.
Isolierte Schutzleiter sind in ihrem Insulated protective conductors must En règle générale, l’isolant d’un
ganzen Verlauf grün-gelb zu kenn- be identified with green/yellow conducteur de protection est bicolore
zeichnen. Die Anschlusspunkte der colouring over their entire length. The jaune/vert. Les points de
Schutzerdung sind mit „PE" (protective connection point to protective ground raccordement de ces conducteurs
must be marked with „PE" (protective doivent être repérés par "PE"
earth) oder dem Zeichen zu
(protective earth) ou par le
kennzeichnen. earth) or the identifying mark.
pictogramme .
Praktische Hinweise: Practical tips: Notes pratiques

• Der Schutzleiter ist auf dem • The protective conductor must be • Le conducteur de terre doit être le
kürzesten Weg auf einen dafür laid in the shortest possible path to plus court possible.
vorgesehenen zentralen Punkt des a central grounding point provided,
Betriebsmittels, z.B. auf einer e.g. a point on the mounting panel.
Montageplatte, aufzulegen. Dieser This point must be identified either
Punkt muss mit "PE" oder dem
with „PE“ or the identifying
Zeichen gekennzeichnet sein. mark.
• Da der Schutzleiter oft über • Because the protective conductor • Lorsque toutefois, le conducteur de
größere Entfernungen geführt wird, cable is sometimes laid over terre est long, il convient de tester
kann sein Erdpotential sich von considerable distances, its la différence de potentiel entre ses
einem lokalen Erdpotential potential can be different from the extrémités.
unterscheiden. Potentialverhält- local ground potential. Check for
nisse prüfen! potential differences!

• Die Anschlussstelle für den • The connection point for the • Les points de raccordement du
Schutzleiter muss eine gut leitende protective conductor to ground conducteur de terre doivent être
Verbindung gewährleisten. Lack, must guarantee good contact. particulièrement soignés et être
Schmutz, Korrosion und alle Paint, dirt, corrosion and any exempts de tout matériau (laque,
isolierenden Teile müssen sorg- insulation must be carefully salissures, corrosion) pouvant
fältig entfernt werden. Zu removed. Galvanised or stainless altérer la fonction de mise à la
empfehlen sind verzinkte Schraub- steel bolts and washers are terre. Il est recommandé d’utiliser
bolzen und Beilegescheiben. recommended. une visserie zinguée.
• PE kann, wenn keine getrennten • If there is no separate Function • Lorsqu’aucune autre terre n’est
Funktionserden vorhanden sind, ground is available, „PE“ can be prévue, PE peut également être
als Bezugspotential-Sternpunkt für used as the reference potential utilisée comme potentiel de
die Elektronik (Digitalerde und point for the electronics (digital référence pour l’électronique
Analogerde) und als Schirmauflage ground and analog ground) and for (0 VA et 0 VD), ainsi que comme
verwendet werden. Voraussetzung connection of the cable shielding. collecteur des blindages (SE).
dafür ist jedoch ein störungsarmer The prerequisite for this however is Ceci n’est bien entendu possible
Schutzleiter. an interference-free protective que si PE n’est pas parasitée.
conductor.
4 Elektromagnetische 4 Electromagnetic 4 Compatibilité

Verträglichkeit (EMV) compatibility (EMV) électromagnétique
(CEM)
4.1 Allgemeines 4.1 General 4.1 Généralités
Die europaweit geltende The Europe-wide legislation on Les lois européennes fixent les
Gesetzgebung über die elektro- electromagnetic compatibility (EMV) limites de la compatibilité électro-
magnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV) for electrically-operated instruments magnétique (CEM) des appareils et
elektrisch betriebener Geräte und and equipment sets limit values for des installations, aussi bien en ce qui
Einrichtungen legt Grenzwerte sowohl interference resistance and concerne l’émission que la réception.
für die Störfestigkeit als auch für die interference emission.
Störaussendung fest.
Die EMV-gerechte Ausführung von EMV-conforming design of instru- La conformité des appareils aux
Geräten beinhaltet, dass die Erzeu- ments requires that the emission and exigences de la CEM impose que
gung und Einwirkung elektromagne- immission of electromagnetic leurs émissions et leur réception sont
tischer Störungen soweit begrenzt interference must be limited so that, limitées de telle manière que:
wird,
• dass der bestimmungsgemäße • the operation of radio, • l’utilisation d’autres appareils (entre
Betrieb von Funk- und Telekommu- telecommunication and other autres, ceux servant aux
nikationsgeräten sowie sonstiger similar equipment is possible for télécommunications) soit possible
Geräte möglich ist und their designed purpose and sans précautions particulières
• dass die Geräte, Anlagen oder • the instruments, plant or systems • leur résistance aux ondes électro-
Systeme eine angemessene exhibit a resistance to magnétiques leur permettent de
Störfestigkeit gegen elektromagne- electromagnetic interference so fonctionner sans perturbations.
tische Störungen aufweisen, so that their designed intended
dass ein bestimmungsgemäßer operation is possible.
Betrieb möglich ist.
Auch wenn solche Geräte und However even when these instru- Même lorsqu’un appareil est
Einrichtungen die jeweiligen Forde- ments and equipment fulfill the conforme, et porte la marque ,
rungen erfüllen und die CE-Kenn- respective requirements and carry the il faut comprendre qu’il n’est pas
zeichnung tragen, bedeutet das nicht, CE designation, this does not entièrement hermétique aux ondes
dass sie absolut störfest und abstrah- necessarilty imply that they are électromagnétiques. Une étanchéité
lungsfrei sind. Um solche Qualitäten absolutely interference resistant and totale n’est, en effet, pas économi-
geräteseitig zu erreichen, müsste ein interference free. To attain this quement réalisable. C’est la raison
unwirtschaftlich hoher Aufwand absolute level of quality a prohibitive pour laquelle il convient de prendre
getrieben werden. manufacturing cost would be quelques précautions supplémentaires
necessary. qui aideront à réduire les effets des
ondes électro-magnétiques.

Deshalb müssen zusätzliche äussere Therefore some additional external En règle générale, il est indispensable
Maßnahmen getroffen werden, die measures must be taken to effectively de soigner l’exécution des entrées et
Störeinstrahlungen und Störabstrah- reduce the effective interference des sorties des appareils, mais
lungen wirksam reduzieren. Im emission and immission. Normally this également l’isolation ou la mise à la
wesentlichen betrifft das alle Zu- und includes all cables to and from the terre des „corps“ conducteurs tels que
Ableitungen, die an die Geräte instruments as well as the instruments les boîtiers ou les accessoires de
angeschlossen werden sowie leitende and housings connected to them. montage, car ceux-ci agissent comme
Geräteteile und Gehäuse. Sie können These items can act as active and des antennes actives ou passives qui
sowohl als aktive als auch als passive passive antenna which transmit and émettent des ondes
Antennen wirken, die elektromagne- receive electromagnetic interference. électromagnétiques ou les acheminent
tische Störsignale abstrahlen oder in à l’intérieur de l’appareil
Geräte einkoppeln.
Diese Störsignale werden eingeteilt in These interference signals are divided Les signaux perturbateurs sont
into classés en deux groupes :
• leitungsgebundene, wie sie z.B. • Receiver-associated, e.g. by • par conduction, comme par
von Leuchtstoffröhren, EDV- fluorescent tubes, EDV-plant, exemple ceux des tubes à néon,
Anlagen, Schützen, Schalthand- protective-devices, switching des systèmes informatiques et
lungen und vor allem Freqenz- actions and especially frequency surtout ceux des convertisseurs de
umrichter verursacht werden und in converters, and fréquence
• strahlungsgebundene, die z.B. von • Transmitter-associated,e.g. • par rayonnement, comme par

HF-Sendern (Funk, Fernsehen, created by HF transmitters (radio, exemple ceux des émetteurs à
Mobiltelefon usw.) erzeugt werden. television, cellular telephones etc.). haute fréquence (radios,
téléviseurs, téléphones portables).
Die eindeutige Zuordnung der Stör- A clear categorisation of interference Le classement des signaux
quellen ist dabei nicht immer möglich, sources is virtually impossible perturbateurs n’est cependant pas
da viele in beide Kategorien einge- because of the number involved, e.g. toujours aussi aisé car certains
ordnet werden können, wie z.B. protective devices. peuvent être rangés dans les deux
Schütze. catégories à la fois.
4.2 Äußere Maßnahmen für 4.2 External measures for 4.2 Précautions à prendre
die EMV-Sicherheit EMV security pour garantir la CEM
Nachfolgend werden Maßnahmen The following measures can be taken Ce chapitre décrit les précautions à
beschrieben, die dazu beitragen to contribute toward the reduction of prendre qui aident à réduire les
Störaussendung zu reduzieren und vor interference emission and prevention émissions et surtout à éviter la
allem Störeinstrahlungen zu of interference immission. These réception de perturbations électro-
verhindern. Im wesentlichen handelt measures are mainly magnétiques. Elles sont ordonnées
es sich dabei um dans les paragraphes suivants :
• Ableiten von Störungen • Diversion of interference • Elimination
• Abschirmen gegen Störungen • Shielding against interference • Blindage
• richtige Kabelwahl und -verlegung • Correct cable selection and • Choix des types de câbles et
installation modes de câblage
• richtige Wahl des • Correct selection of installation • Choix des accessoires

Installationszubehörs accessories d’installation
• Einsatz zusätzlicher Entstörgeräte • Additional interference • Mise en œuvre de dispositifs

sowie das suppression measures d’antiparasitage
• Beachten der Angaben in den • Observation of instructions in • Prise en compte de ces

jeweiligen Datenblättern respective data sheets renseignement dans les différentes
fiches techniques

4.2.1 Ableiten von Störungen 4.2.1 Diversion of 4.2.1 Elimination des

(EMV) interference (EMV) perturbations (CEM)
Alle leitfähigen Gehäuse und All conductive housings and Toutes les parties conductrices des
Geräteteile, die bestimmungsgemäß instrument components which produce boîtiers et des appareils qui sont
keine Betriebsspannungen führen, no operating voltages are potential sensées être hors tension en
stellen potentielle Antennen dar und antennas which transmit or receive fonctionnement normal, sont des
können somit Störungen abstrahlen interference. Good grounding of these antennes potentielles.
oder aufnehmen. Konsequentes Erden items diverts this interference
dieser Teile leitet solche Störungen extensively and renders them
weitgehend ab und macht sie damit harmless.
unschädlich.
Dies gilt für Schaltschränke, Gehäuse, This is valid also for cubicles, Elles peuvent émettre ou recevoir des
Gehäuseteile, Montageplatten, housings, housing components, perturbations. Leur mise à la terre, si
Baugruppenträger usw. mounting panels and instrumentation elle est effectuée dans les règles de
racks etc. l’art, permet de neutraliser les effets
de ces perturbations.
Normalerweise sind Teile innerhalb Normally components in the housings Normalement, tous les „corps“
eines Gehäuses werksseitig bereits are already in direct contact with conducteurs, installés à l’intérieur d’un
über direkten Kontakt (z.B. (through screws) or are internally appareil sont reliés entre eux, soit par
Verschraubung) oder durch grün-gelbe connected to the housing through vissage soit par un conducteur de
Leiter intern mit dem Gehäuse green/yellow ground cables so that couleur jaune/vert.
verbunden, sodass vor Ort nur noch only the housing itself must be locally Lors de la mise en route sur site, il
das Gehäuse selbst geerdet werden grounded. suffit alors de relier le boîtier externe à
muss. une terre de protection.
Die Erdverbindung muss möglichst The connection to ground must be Ceci se fait de préférence à l’aide d’un
großflächig, impedanzarm und auf large in cross-sectional area, low in conducteur de grosse section, de
kurzem Wege erfolgen. resistance and must be made over the faible impédance et de longueur faible.
shortest possible distance.
Der Anschluss des Schutzleiters der The ground cable of the power supply Le conducteur jaune/vert du câble
Netzversorgung (siehe Abschnitt 1) (see section 1) has purely a protective d’alimentation secteur (voir le
hat reine Schutzfunktion und reicht für function for the power supply and is paragraphe 1) a essentiellement une
die EMV-Sicherheit oftmals nicht aus. normally not sufficient for EMV fonction de protection du personnel et
security. ne suffit souvent pas à assurer une
bonne compatibilité électro-
magnétique.
Wichtige Hinweise: Important hints: Notes importantes :

• Die vorhandenen • The available ground connection • Les conducteurs internes à
Erdungsverbindungen innerhalb within housings or on mounting l’appareil qui relient le boîtier aux
von Gehäusen oder auf panels must not be altered and différentes platines de montage ne
Montageplatten dürfen nicht must be replaced in original doivent jamais être modifiés et
verändert und müssen nach condition after any repairs! doivent être réinstallés après une
Reparaturen wieder in den réparation.
Originalzustand versetzt werden!
• Nachträglich eingebaute Teile oder • Retro-fitted components or • Les modifications de câblage ou de

Veränderungen der Anordnung alterations in the arrangement or disposition des éléments entre eux,
oder der Verdrahtung von Geräten wiring of instruments can lower the les éléments qui sont installés a
können die EMV verschlechtern. EMV security of the system as a posteriori, peuvent détériorer les
Nachträglich eingebaute Teile whole. Retro-fitted components conditions de la compatibilité
müssen möglichst must be connected to a ground électromagnétique. Dans la
sternpunktmässig mit dem star-connection point of the mesure du possible, tous les
Gehäuse verbunden werden. housing. éléments d’un appareil doivent être
reliés en étoile au boîtier.

• Grundsätzlich können • Basically alterations can result in • Fondamentalement, toute modifi-

Veränderungen zum Verlust der loss of the CE conformity. The cation interne d’un appareil lui fait
CE-Konformität führen. Nach EMV security must be checked perdre de bénéfice du sigle .
Veränderungen muss die EMV neu after any alterations. Dans ce cas une nouvelle
überprüft werden. procédure d’agrément doit être
engagée.
• Es ist darauf zu achten, dass • Care should be taken that • Le boîtier d’un appareil doit
Gehäuse immer geschlossen housings are always kept closed. toujours être maintenu fermé. Une
gehalten werden. Schon kleine Even small openings in the ouverture, même de petite
Öffnungsschlitze können die EMV housing can result in a dimension, peut altérer les effets
erheblich verringern. considerable loss of EMV security. de la CEM.
• Schutzleiter und Erder für die • Protective conductors and grounds • Le conducteur de mise à la terre et
EMV-Sicherheit können Potential- for the EMV security can exhibit la terre elle-même peuvent être à
unterschiede aufweisen (siehe potential differences des potentiels différents (voir le
Abschnitt 4).Deshalb sind bereits (see section 4). Therefore local paragraphe 4). Il convient donc,
vor der Montage die lokalen potential differences must be avant toute mise en service, de
Erdverhältnisse zu prüfen. checked before an installation. vérifier les conditions locales de la
mise à la terre.
• Die Auflagepunkte für Erdleiter • The connection point for the • Les points de raccordement du
müssen frei von Schmutz und Lack ground cable must be free of dirt conducteur de terre doivent être
sein. and paint. exempts de tout matériau (laque,
salissures, corrosion) pouvant
altérer la fonction de mise à la
terre.
• Bezugs- und Erdleiter müssen • Reference and grounding cables • Les conducteurs de référence et
ausreichend niederohmig und must be sufficiently low in de mise à la terre doivent posséder
induktivitätsarm sein (großer resistance, and free of inductance une impédance et une capacité
Querschnitt, kurze Wege, flächige (large cross-sectional area, faibles (section importante,
Ankopplung). Sie sollten immer shortest path, flat connection). longueur faible, raccordement
sternpunktförmig verbunden They should always be connected plat). Ils doivent toujours être
werden (Sammelschienen, in a star shape (bus-bars, ring- raccordés en étoile (barre
Ringleiter usw.) und dürfen nie circuit etc.) and may not be fed collectrice par exemple). Dans la
durch Geräte oder Schaltkreise through the instrument or switching mesure du possible, ils ne doivent
hindurch weiterverbunden werden. circuits to further connection pas traverser d’autres appareils, ni
points. des circuits de puissance ou de
commutation.
• Benutzte Erder müssen • Grounds which are used must be • Pour être réellement efficaces, les
regelmäßig auf ihre Wirksamkeit regularly checked for their points de mise à la terre doivent
(Widerstand nach Erde) überprüft efficiency (resistance to ground). être contrôlés régulièrement
werden. (résistance par rapport à la terre).
• Beachten Sie auch unsere • Observe our Security • Nous engageons les opérateurs à
Sicherheitshinweise, die jeder Instructions which accompany all lire attentivement les recomman-
technischen Dokumentation als technical documentation we issue dations de sécurité. Que nous
gesonderte Druckschrift beiliegen. in the form of a separate brochure. joignons à chacune de nos docu-
mentations.

4.2.2 Abschirmen gegen 4.2.2 Shielding against 4.2.2 Blindage contre les
Störungen (EMV) interference (EMV) perturbations (CEM)
Erd- und Potentialver- Check ground and potential Vérification de la différence
hältnisse prüfen ! differences! de potentiel entre la terre et
l’appareil
Bevor Kabelschirme aufgelegt Before cable shields are connected Avant d’effectuer le câblage d’un
werden, müssen die örtlichen Erd- the local ground and potential appareil, il est vivement conseillé
und Potentialverhältnisse beider differences at the ends of the de vérifier les différents potentiels
Auflagestellen geprüft werden. installation must be checked. If de référence.
Werden dabei kritische Potential- critical potential differences are Si ces valeurs ne sont pas
unterschiede festgestellt (siehe found (see section 4) sutiable admissibles (voir le paragraphe 4),
Abschnitt 4), müssen betreiberseitig measures must be undertaken on l’exploitant devra mettre en œuvre
geeignete Maßnahmen im Sinne the part of the end-user regarding les mesures nécessaires au
dieser Erdungsempfehlung these grounding recommendations. rétablissement d’une situation
getroffen werden. normale.
Welches Schirmmaterial? What type of shielding Les différents blindages

material to use?
2
1
Abbildung 1: Figure 1: Fig. 1: Les différents blindages
Wirksame Kabelabschirmungen Efficient cable shielding should if Le blindage d’un câble doit être
sollten möglichst aus gut leitendem possible consist of good conductive constitué d’un matériau particulière-
Material bestehen, wie z.B. verzinntes material, such as tinned or nickel- ment conducteur, tel qu’une tresse de
oder vernickeltes Kupfergeflecht coated copper foil and/or aluminium cuivre zingué ou nickelé et/ou un
und/oder Aluminiumfolie. Stahlgeflecht foil. Steel foil normally serves only for feuillard d’aluminium. Une tresse
dient üblicherweise nur der Armierung mechanical protection of the cable. d’acier sert généralement plutôt à
bzw. dem mechanischen Schutz. assurer la protection mécanique du
câble.
Zu empfehlen sind doppelt abge- Double-shielded cable is Il est recommandé d’utiliser un double
schirmte Kabel also z.B. mit einem recommended, e.g. with an overall blindage : individuel par tresse de
Gesamtschirm (1) aus Kupfergeflecht shield (1) of copper foil and individual cuivre ou feuillard (2) pour un
und Einzelschirmen (2) aus Kupfer- shields (2) of copper or aluminium foil conducteur, une paire, une tierce ou
geflecht oder Folien (see Figure 1). une quarte ; plus un blindage
(siehe Abbildung 1). général (1) en tresse de cuivre.
In besonders kritischen Fällen können In especially critical cases further Dans les cas les plus critiques, des
weitere Verbesserungen erreicht improvements can be made by: précaution supplémentaires peuvent
werden durch: être prises :

• HF-dichte Schutzgehäuse • HF-resistant protective housings • boîtier étanche aux hautes

fréquences (HF)
• abgeschirmte Metallschutz- • Shielded metal protective conduit • gaines métalliques blindées

schläuche mit besonderen with special characteristics in spécialement conçues à cet usage.
Eigenschaften mit denen die which the cable is laid. Metallic Une gaine métallique blindée doit
Verbindungskabel überzogen protective conduit must be être considérée comme un écran à
werden. Metallschutzschläuche regarded as shielding connected at chacune de ses extrémités!
sind wie beidseitig aufgelegte both ends!
Schirme zu sehen!
• Verwenden leitfähiger HF-Dicht- • Use of conductive HF-seals at • presse-étoupes étanches aux

ungen bei Gehäuseeinführungen cable entries to the housing hautes fréquences (HF)
Kabelschirme und Stahl- Must cable shields and Mise à la terre à une ou à
schutzschläuche einseitig protective conduit be deux extrémités ?
oder beidseitig auflegen? connected at one or both
ends?
Kabelschirme und Stahlschutz- Shields and protective conduit must, if Lorsque cela est possible, les
schläuche sollen, wenn möglich possible, be connected to ground at blindages et les gaines de protection
beidseitig aufgelegt werden. both ends. doivent être mis à la terre à chacune
de leurs extrémités.
Früher galt die Regel, Kabelschirme In earlier times the general rule was Jadis, la règle était de ne relier un
nur einseitig aufzulegen, um that shields should be connected only blindage qu’à une seule de ses
Ausgleichsströme (Erdschleifen) zu at one end to avoid equalisation extrémités, afin d’éviter de laisser
vermeiden. currents (ground loops). circuler des courants de compensation
dus à des boucles de terre.
Heute erfordert die elektromagne- Today the requirement for electro- Aujourd’hui, la CEM impose le
tische Verträglichkeit (EMV) meist das magnetic compatibility (EMV) is the contraire dans la plupart des cas !
Gegenteil, also das beidseitige contrary, i.e. connection at both ends.
Auflegen.
Deshalb müssen Ausgleichsströme, Therefore equalisation currents, Dans ces conditions, il faut prendre
verursacht durch örtliche Potential- caused by local potential differences des dispositions visant à neutraliser,
unterschiede, die Schirm, Kabel und which can interfere with the shield, ou tout au moins à limiter les courants
Elektronik zerstören könnten, durch cable and electronics, must be de compensation qui peuvent
geeignete Maßnahmen verhindert eliminated or reduced to small levels perturber les électroniques de mesure.
oder klein gehalten werden. by suitable measures.
Ausgleichströme, die über Abschir- Equalisation currents which flow Les règles suivantes doivent être
mungen fließen, sollten möglichst through shielding must be elimi-nated observées :
vermieden werden. Folgendes ist as far as possible. The following must
unbedingt zu beachten: be unconditionally observed:
• Bei Kabellängen unter 25 m kann • With cable lengths under 25 m this • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble est
dies normalerweise ohne beson- can normally be achieved without inférieure à 25 mètres, aucune
dere Maßnahmen erfolgen, weil bei any special measures since there disposition particulière ne doit
solch kurzen Entfernungen keine will normally not be significant généralement être prise.
erheblichen Potentialunterschiede potential differences over such
zwischen den Auflagepunkten zu short distances.
erwarten sind.
• Bei Kabellängen über 25 m sind • With cable lengths over 25 m the • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble est
die örtlichen Erd- und Potential- local ground and potential supérieure à 25 mètres, la
verhältnisse zu prüfen. Werden differences should be checked. If différence de potentiel entre la
dabei Potentialunterschiede significant potential differences are terre et l’appareil doit être vérifiée.
festgestellt, die Ausgleichsströme found the resultant equalisation Si cette valeur n’est pas voisine de
verursachen können, sind folgende currents can be attenuated using zéro, un courant de compensation
Maßnahmen abzuwägen: the following measures: apparaîtra très vraisemblablement.
Les dispositions suivantes doivent
alors être prises :

• Stromtragfähigkeit des Schirms • Check the current capacity of • vérifier ou calculer la capacité
überprüfen, d.h. durch the shield, i.e. to determine by du blindage à supporter le
Messungen und Berechnungen measurement and calculation courant de compensation ; c’est
feststellen, ob der zu erwar- whether the expected à dire si ce dernier ne risque
tende Ausgleichsstrom Schirm equalisation current will pas d’endommager le blindage
und Kabel schädigen könnte. damage the shield and cable. ou l’un des conducteurs.
• Ist der zu erwartende • If the expected equalisation • si le courant de compensation
Ausgleichsstrom zu groß, um current is too large to be est trop important, il convient :
über den Schirm abgeleitet zu absorbed by the shield, either
werden, muss entweder
• zwischen den unterschiedlichen • an equalisation cable able to carry • soit d’installer un câble
Potentialen eine stromtragfähige the expected current must be d’égalisation des potentiels
Ausgleichsleitung verlegt werden connected between the difference
oder potentials, or
• eine Seite des Kabelschirms nicht • one end of the shield must be • soit raccorder l’une des extrémité
direkt aufgelegt, sondern kapazitiv coupled, not directly but du blindage au travers d’un
(10 ... 100 nF bipolar) an den capacitively (10 … 10 nF bipolar) condensateur(10 à 100 nF
Schirmauflagepunkt angekoppelt to the shield connection point. bipolaire).
werden.
Die Wirksamkeit dieser Maßnahme The effectiveness of this measure L’efficacité de cette méthode doit
muss jedoch überprüft werden. must however be checked before être très sérieusement vérifiée
permanently adopting it. pour chaque cas d’espèce.
Achtung: Note: Attention:

Diese Maßnahme ist in explosions- These measures are not Ces dispositions ne doivent en
gefährdeten Bereichen nicht permissible in explosive areas! aucun cas être mises en œuvre
zulässig! dans le cas d’une installation en
zone explosive !!!
Praktische Hinweise zum Practical hints for Raccordement d’un blindage

Auflegen von Schirmen connecting the shields
Abbildung 2: Figure 2: Figure 2 : Raccordement d’un

blindage

• Schirme sollten nach dem • Shields must be connected to • Un blindage doit être raccordé par
Einführen in ein Gehäuse auf dem ground via the shortest possible le chemin le plus court possible,
kürzesten Weg aufgelegt werden. path immediately after entering the après sont entrée dans un boîtier.
Die vom Schirm nicht überdeckten housing. Individual cable ends La partie des conducteurs qui n’est
Einzeladern an den Kabelenden which are not shielded must be pas recouverte par le blindage doit
sollten so kurz wie irgend möglich kept as short as possible. For être la plus courte possible.
gehalten werden. Für doppelt double-shielded cables this means Lorsque le blindage est double,
geschirmte Kabel bedeutet das, that the overall shield must be celui qui se trouve à l’extérieur doit
dass der aussenliegende Schirm connected by special screws to a être raccordé au boîtier par
direkt beim Eintritt in das Gehäuse, point immediately near the housing l’intermédiaire de presse-étoupes
z.B. über spezielle Verschrau- entry point and the inner shields spécialement adaptés ; celui ou
bungen, und der oder die must be connected to the shield ceux qui se trouvent à l’intérieur
innenliegenden Schirme möglichst connection point as close as doivent cheminer le plus loin
bis zu der Auflagestelle der possible to the cable connection possible sur les conducteurs.
Kabeladern mitgeführt wird. points.
• Schirme sind möglichst großflächig • Shields, which must be as flat and • Le raccordement d’un blindage doit
und impedanzarm, z.B. mittels as resistant-free as possible, must se faire sur une surface importante
Rohrschellen (4) oder Feder- be connected to the grounded bus- et avec une impédance
klammern (3) auf geerdeten bar or mounting panel (1) using négligeable, par exemple en
Sammel-schienen oder Montage- staple brackets (4) or spring serrant une bride (3 ou 4) sur une
platten (1) aufzulegen. Dadurch clamps (3). In this way the shield platine ou une barre collectrice (1).
wird der Schirm (2) ohne Unter- (2) can be fed without a break Ce principe permet de laisser le
brechung weitergeführt bis zur close to the connection point of the blindage (2) recouvrir les
Anschlussstelle des Kabels und die cable and the unshielded portion of conducteurs (5) jusqu'à leur point
unbedeckten Überstände (5) des the cable can be kept extremely de raccordement (voir la figure 2).
Kabels können extrem kurz short (see Fig. 2).
gehalten werden
(siehe Abbildung 2).
• Zusammengedrillte Schirmenden • Shield ends which are twisted • La torsion, l’étamage ou le

sowie angelötete oder angepresste together and cable strands which raccordement de la tresse à un fil
Litzen reduzieren den wirksamen are soldered or pressed together unique réduit très sensiblement la
Querschnitt des Gesamtschirms reduce the effective cross- section du blindage et par là même
auf den eines Einzeldrahtes und sectional area of the total shields son efficacité.
vermindern die Schirmqualität and thus considerably reduce the
erheblich. shield quality.
• Wenn ein Kabelschirm nur einseitig • When a cable shield is to be • Lorsque le blindage ne doit être
aufgelegt werden soll, so muss connected at only one end, care raccordé qu’à une seule de ses
darauf geachtet werden, dass der must be taken that the shield at the extrémités, l’autre extrémité doit
Schirm am anderen Kabelende other end of the cable is not être correctement isolée afin
nicht versehentlich über das inadvertently connected to ground d’éviter tout contact involontaire
Steckergehäuse doch geerdet through a plug housing. The shield avec une masse. Le blindage ne
wird. Der Schirm muss vom must be isolated from the plug doit pas être raccordé à la borne
Steckergehäuse isoliert werden. housing. de mise à la terre d’un boîtier.
• Abschirmende Metallschutz- • Protective metal conduit must be • Une gaine métallique blindée doit
schläuche müssen an beiden connected to the housing concisely être raccordée à chacune de ses
Enden bündig, also ohne Spalten, with suitable screws without any extrémités directement aux boîtiers
mit den Gehäusen durch dazu gap. desquels elle entre ou sort. Ce
passende Verschrau-bungen raccordement se fait par l’intermé-
verbunden werden. diaire de raccords spécialement
adaptés à cet usage.

4.2.3 Richtige Kabelwahl und 4.2.3 Correct cable selection 4.2.3 Choix des types de
-verlegung and installation câbles et modes de câblage
Für den Anschluss von Messwert- For connection of measurement Pour le raccordement des capteurs,
sensoren empfehlen wir sensors we recommend exclusively nous recommandons l’usage exclusif
ausschliesslich unsere doppelt our double-shielded AC-112 de nos câbles AC-112 (4 x 0,5 mm²)
geschirmten Signalkabel AC-112 (4 x 0.5 mm²) for single sensors, or ou AC - 113 (6 x 4 x 0,5 mm²) qui
(4 x 0,5 mm²) für einen, oder AC - 113 our AC-113 (6 x 4 x 0.5 mm²) for up to possèdent un double blindage.
(6 x 4 x 0,5 mm²) für bis zu sechs six sensors.
Sensoren zu verwenden.
Beim Verlegen der Kabel muss auf When connecting the cables the Les points suivants doivent être pris
folgende Punkte geachtet werden: following points must be observed: en compte :
• Signal- und Datenkabel müssen • Signal and data cables must • les câbles transportant des signaux
immer getrennt von Energie- und always be laid seperately or at ou des données ne doivent jamais
Steuerleitungen oder in ausrei- least seperated by sufficient cheminer avec des câbles de
chendem Abstand davon verlegt distance from power or switching puissance ou de commutation. Une
werden. Unvermeidbare cables. Unavoidable crossing of distance suffisante doit toujours
Kreuzungen zwischen diesen these types of cables must always être respectée. Lorsqu’il n’est pas
müssen im rechten Winkel be done at right-angles. possible de procéder autrement, le
verlaufen. croisement des câbles doit toujours
se faire à angle droit.
• Alle nicht benutzten Adern eines • All unused cables must be • tous les conducteurs qui ne sont
Kabels sind einseitig zu erden. grounded at one end. pas utilisés doivent être mis à la
terre à une seule de leurs
extrémités.
• Das Verlegen aller Kabel sollten • All cables must be laid via the • tous les câbles doivent être aussi
auf dem kürzesten Weg unter shortest possible path to prevent courts que possible et éviter de
Vermeidung von Schleifenbildung the formation of loops. former des boucles.
erfolgen.
• Leiter gleichen Potentials sollten • Cables with the same potential • tous les conducteurs qui sont au
möglichst sternförmig, also an must be coupled together in a même potentiel doivent toujours
einem gemeinsamen Punkt star-formation to a common être raccordés en étoile.
miteinander verbunden werden. connection point.
Vierleitertechnik Four-wire technique La technique „4 fils“

Unsere berührungslosen Our non-contacting displacement Nos capteurs sans contact et certains
Wegsensoren und Beschleunigungs- sensors and accelerometers require de nos accéléromètres nécessitent
Sensoren benötigen eine power to operate. Each sensor has une alimentation. Ils possèdent tous
Versorgungsspannung. Sie haben je three connections: trois conducteurs :
drei Anschlüsse:
SIG für das Messsignal, SIG for the measured signal, SIG signal
-24 V für die Spannungsversorgung -24 V for the power requirement -24 V alimentation
und
COM als gemeinsamer Bezugspunkt COM as a common reference point COM commun pour le signal et
für das Messsignal und die for the measured signal and l’alimentation
Spannungsversorgung the power supply.

Der Anschluss an die Messelektronik Nevertheless connection to the Leur raccordement à une électronique
erfolgt jedoch mit einem vieradrigen measurement electronics is made de mesure se fait cependant par un
Kabel (z.B. Typ AC-112). Dabei using a four-wire cable (e.g. type câble à 4 conducteurs (par exemple
werden, wie Abbildung 2-3 zeigt, AC-112). As shown in Figure 2-3 the AC-112). Le signal et l’alimentation
Versorgungsspannung und Mess- power and the measured signal are sont acheminés dans des paires
signal über je ein Adernpaar von der therefore each fed by a separate pair différentes (voir la figure 3) de
Messelektronik bis zur letzten of wires from the measurement l’électronique de mesure vers
Anschlussstelle vor dem Sensor electronics to the last connection point l’oscillateur ou la boîte de jonction.
(Oszillator oder Klemmenschutz- before the sensor (oscillator or Alors seulement, le 0 V de
gehäuse) geführt. Erst dort werden die terminal housing). Only at this point l’alimentation et le 0 V du signal
0V der Versorgung und die 0V für das are the 0V for the power and the 0V (COM) sont reliés ensemble.
Messsignal (COM) miteinander for the measured signal (COM)
verbunden. connected together.
Dies hat den Vorteil, dass durch die This has the advantage that only the Ceci présente l’avantage de séparer le
Signalrückleitung nur der sehr geringe very small signal current flows through circuit du signal dans lequel circule un
Signalstrom fliesst und nicht der the signal pair of wires and not the courant extrêmement réduit, du circuit
wesentlich höhere Rückstrom der considerably higher return current of d’alimentation, dans lequel circule un
Versorgung, wodurch kein signal- the power supply, thus eliminating courant plus important (quelques
verfälschender Spannungsabfall falsification of the measured signal dizaines de milliampères).
entsteht. through a power voltage drop.
Wegsensor Oszillator Eingang Messgerät

Displacement Sensor Oscillator Input measuring instrument
Capteur sans contact Oscillateur Electronique de mesure
SIG SIG
COM COM
Koax -24 V -24 V
0V(GND)
SE
Beschleuigungs-Sensor Klemmenschutzgehäuse Eingang Messgerät

Acceleration Sensor Terminal protective housing Input measuring instrument
Accéléromètre Boîtier de jonction Electronique de mesure
SIG SIG
COM COM
-24 V -24 V
0V(GND)
SE
AUFNEHM1 (060410)
Abb. 3 Vierleitertechnik bei Fig. 3: Four-wire technique with Fig. 3: technique de câblage „4 fils“
berührungslosen Weg- non-contacting displacement pour un capteur sans contact
sensoren (oben) und bei sensor (top) and (en haut) et pour un
Beschleunigungs- accelerometers (bottom) accéléromètre (en bas)
sensoren (unten)
4.2.4 Zusätzliche Entstör- 4.2.4 Additional interference- 4.2.4 Mise en œuvre de

maßnahmen suppression measures dispositifs d’antiparasitage
Wenn am Montageort Störeinflüsse When the influence of interference is Lorsqu‘une installation est parasitée
herrschen, die die vom Gesetzgeber so predominant that the limit values au delà des limites admises par la loi
vorgeschriebenen Grenzwerte prescribed by the authorities are comme par exemple pour une
überschreiten, z.B. bei Altanlagen, exceeded, e.g. in old plants, additional installation ancienne, l’exploitant doit
müssen evtl. betreiberseitig interference-suppression measures prévoir des moyens supplémentaires
zusätzliche Entstörmaßnahmen an der must be undertaken on the part of the d’antiparasitage.
Störquelle getroffen werden. end-user at the source of the
interference.
Ist dies nicht möglich, können weitere If this is not possible further En voici quelques exemples :
Entstörmaßnahmen getroffen werden. interference-suppression measures
Nachfolgend einige Beispiele: can be introduced. The following are
some examples:

• HF-Entstörfilter (Tiefpassfilter) oder • HF-interference filters (low-pass) • HF filtres haute fréquence (passe-
Entstördrosseln zur Dämpfung or interference chokes for damping bas) ou self d’antiparasitage pour
strahlungs- oder leitungsgebun- transmitted or received HF- atténuer l’effet des perturbations
dener HF-Störungen. interference. hautes fréquences qui peuvent
agir par conduction ou par
rayonnement.
• Ferritkerne (Klammerfilter aus • Ferrite cores (Ferrite filters) of • noyaux de ferrite possédant
Ferrit) verschiedener Frequenz- various frequency bands, as a diverses bandes passantes et
bänder, als einfache Alternative zu simple alternative to HF-filters. pouvant être utilisés comme une
HF-Filtern. alternative au filtre haute
fréquence.
• Netzfilter bei Störungen auf der • Power filters for interference on the • filtres secteur, dans le cas où
Netzleitung power supply l’alimentation est parasitée
Die o.a. Geräte sind möglichst nahe The above-mentioned devices must
an der Signalquelle- bzw. Senke zu be installed as close as possible to the
installieren. signal source.
• Funkenlöschbeschaltungen bei • Spark-suppression equipment in • dispositifs anti-étincellle dans le

geschalteten Induktivitäten. the case of inductive switching. cas de charges inductives comme
un relais ou un commutateur.
Sie müssen möglichst nahe an der This must be installed as close as Ces différents dispositifs doivent
Störquelle installiert werden (z.B. possible to the source of the être installés le plus près possible
nahe an Relais, Schaltvorgängen interference (e.g. close to relays, de la source des parasites.
auf Netzleitungen usw.). contactors for power switching
etc.).
5 Verbinden von 0V- 5 Connection of 0V 5 Raccordement du

Bezugspotentialen reference potentials potentiel de référence
(0V)
Im Gegensatz zum vorherigen In contrast to the previous section this Ce chapitre décrit les mesures à
Abschnitt geht es hier nicht um das section deals not with the elimination prendre pour éviter la détérioration des
Verhindern von Störein- und - of interference emission and câbles et des circuits électroniques.
ausstrahlung, also um die EMV- immission, or EMV compatibility, but
Festigkeit, sondern in erster Linie um first of all with elimination of damage
das Vermeiden von Schäden an to cables and circuits.
Kabeln und Schaltkreisen.
Die (0V-) Bezugspotentiale elektri- The 0V reference potential of electrical Les potentiels de référence (0V) de
scher Geräte, die Mess-, Steuer- oder instruments which exchange différents appareils électroniques qui
Datensignale austauschen, müssen measurement, control or data signals échangent des signaux de mesure ou
funktionsbedingt miteinander must be functionally connected with de commande et/ou des données
verbunden werden. one another. doivent être reliés entre eux.
Dabei können örtliche Potentialunter- Local potential differences which Lorsque ces potentiels de référence
schiede unerwünschte Ausgleichs- cause undesirable equalisation présentent des différences, ils
ströme verursachen, die zu Signal- currents can cause falsification of the génèrent des courants de compen-
verfälschung oder im Extremfall zur signals or, in extreme cases, lead to sation qui peuvent perturber les
Zerstörung von Kabeln und damage of cables and circuits. signaux ou, dans certains cas
Schaltkreisen führen können. extrêmes, peuvent détériorer les
câbles et les circuits électroniques.
Folgende Fälle sind zu unterscheiden: The following cases must be Il convient de distinguer les cas
distinguished: suivants :

Potentialfreie Verbindungen Potential-free connection Potentiel flottant

• Die Signalein- bzw. -ausgänge der • The signal inputs or outputs of the • Le potentiel d’un signal est flottant
zu verbindenden Geräte sind instrument are potential-free, i.e. lorsqu’il n’a pas de relation fixe
potentialfrei, also galvanisch von galvanically separate from fixed avec un potentiel de référence.
festen Potentialen getrennt (z.B. potentials (e.g. through C’est le cas lorsque les signaux
durch Optokoppler, Übertrager): optocouplers, transfer device): sont galvaniquement isolés, par
exemple par un optocoupleur ou
un convertisseur.
Hier sind keine besonderen In this case no special measures • Aucune disposition particulière ne
Maßnahmen erforderlich. Dies gilt are necessary. This is also valid if doit généralement être prise. Ceci
auch dann, wenn eines der one of the associated instruments est également vrai lorsque le
beteiligten Geräte nicht is not potential-free. potentiel du signal de l’un des
potentialfrei ist. appareils est référencé
Nicht potentialfreie Non potential-free Potentiel référencé

Verbindungen connection
• Die Signalein- bzw. -ausgänge der • The signal inputs or outputs of the • Le potentiel d’un signal est
Geräte sind nicht potentialfrei, instrument are non potential-free, référencé lorsqu’il a une relation
d.h. die Bezugspotentiale der i.e. the reference potential of the fixe avec un potentiel de référence
Geräte sind mit dem Erdpotential instrument is connected to the local ou bien avec sa tension
ihres jeweiligen Montageortes oder ground potential of the respective d’alimentation. Les règles
der örtlichen Spannungs- mounting location or the local suivantes doivent être observées :
versorgung verbunden. Hier gilt: power supply.
• Bei Kabellängen unter 25 m • With cable lengths under 25 m • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble
kann dies normalerweise ohne this can normally be done est inférieure à 25 mètres,
besondere Maßnahmen without any special measures aucune disposition particulière
erfolgen, weil bei solch kurzen because with such short ne doit être prise car il ne peut
Entfern-ungen normalerweise distances no damaging généralement pas exister de
keine schädigenden Potential- potential differences between différence de potentiel
unterschiede zwischen den the connection points are suffisamment importante pour
Auflagepunkten zu erwarten expected. Nevertheless we endommager les câbles ou les
sind. Trotzdem empfehlen wir recommend that the ground circuits. Il est cependant
sicherheitshalber die Erd- und and potential differences be toujours recommandé de
Potentialverhältnisse zu checked for safety reasons. vérifier à titre préventif la
überprüfen. différence de potentiel entre la
terre et l’appareil.
• Bei Kabellängen über 25 m • With cable lengths of over • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble
sind auf jeden Fall die örtlichen 25 m the ground and potential est supérieure à 25 mètres, la
Erd- und Potentialverhältnisse differences should always be différence de potentiel entre la
zu prüfen. Werden dabei checked. If potential diffe- terre et l’appareil doit être
Potentialunterschiede rences are found which will vérifiée dans tous les cas. Si
festgestellt, die verfälschende cause falsification or damaging cette valeur n’est pas voisine
bzw. schädigende Ausgleich- equalisation currents, the de zéro, un courant de
ströme verursachen können, following measures should be compensation apparaîtra très
sind folgende Maßnahmen initiated: vraisemblablement:
abzuwägen: Il convient alors :
• Zwischen den unterschiedlichen • A potential equalisation bar or • soit d’installer un câble

Potentialen muss eine Potential- cable of sufficient current carrying d’égalisation des potentiels ; ce
ausgleichschiene (PAS) oder - capacity, must be chosen and câble aura alors une section
leitung von ausreichender Strom- must be installed between the suffisante pour absorber sans
tragfähigkeit verlegt werden, d.h. different potentials, i.e. the cross- dommage le courant de
der Querschnitt der Ausgleichs- sectional area of the conductor compensation
leitung muss so gewählt werden, must be chosen so that the
dass der zu erwartende expected equalisation current can
Ausgleichsstrom sicher aufge- be carried with safety, or
nommen wird oder

• die Schaltkreise müssen mittels • The circuits must be coupled using • soit d’installer un convertisseur sur
Trennverstärker o.ä. entkoppelt differential amplifiers. la ligne de mesure.
werden.
• Manche Geräte haben Bezugs- • Some instruments have a • Certains appareils possèdent un
potentiale die angehoben, also reference potential which is not potentiel de référence flottant, c’est
nicht auf das lokale Erdpotential referenced to the local ground à dire qu’il n’est pas relié à la
bezogen sind. Sie dürfen nicht mit potential. These instruments must terre. Dans ce cas, il est impératif
Erdpotential verbunden werden! In not be coupled with the ground de mettre un convertisseur en
diesem Fall muss mittels Trenn- potential! In these cases œuvre.
verstärker entkoppelt werden differential amplifiers must be
used for the coupling!
6 Potential und 6 Potential and 6 „Potentiel“ et

Bezugspotential reference potential „potentiel de
référence“
Was versteht man unter What is electrical Potentiel électrique
elektrischem Potential? potential?
Bei allen elektrischen Einrichtungen, With all electrical equipment, on the La notion de „potentiel“ est fonda-
sowohl auf der Erzeugungs- als auch generation and also the user side and mentale pour traiter des liaisons entre
auf der Verbraucherseite und auch bei all associated equipment coupled with appareils électriques ou électroniques
allen mit diesen leitend verbundenen these the concept of „Potential“ plays Elle est particulièrement importante
Einrichtungen spielt der Begriff an important role. This is especially pour assurer la sécurité de
"Potential" eine wichtige Rolle. Dies true in the interest of safety. l’installation..
gilt im besonderen für die Belange der
Sicherheit.
Die exakte mathematisch-physika- The exact mathematical and physical La définition physique (et
lische Definition des Begriffs Potential definition of the concept of potential is mathématique) de la notion de
ist schwerverständlich und für die difficult to understand and, as far as it „potentiel“ sort du cadre de cette
Betrachtung im Rahmen dieser is concerned within the framework of documentation.
Erdungsempfehlung eher ungeeignet. this grounding recommendation, not
appropriate.
Einfacher und ausreichend ist es, It is simpler and also sufficient to Un „potentiel“ doit être considéré
Potentiale als elektrische Zustände understand potential as the electrical comme un état électrique d’un point de
verschiedener Raumpunkte zu condition of different locations which is l’espace. La tension est une grandeur
verstehen, die die Ursache für the cause for an electrical voltage to définissant la différence entre les
elektrische Spannungen zwischen exist between them. The voltage is potentiels de deux points.
diesen sind. Die Spannung wiederum then a measure of the difference in
ist dann ein Maß für den Potential- potential which exists between two
unterschied zwischen zwei Punkten. points.

Was ist ein What is a reference Potentiel de référence

Bezugspotential? potential?
Wie der o.a. Definition zu entnehmen As can be deduced from the above Le paragraphe précédent décrit le
ist, ist das elektrische Potential eines description, the electrical potential of a „potentiel“ d’un point comme étant une
Punktes eine relative Größe. point is a relative value. grandeur relative.
Um eine absolute Aussage machen zu To be able to make a definitive Pour pouvoir donner une valeur
können, muss ein Bezugspotential statement a reference potential which absolue, il faut définir au préalable un
definiert werden, auf das dann alle is to be the reference for all other „potentiel dit de référence“ auquel les
anderen bezogen werden. Normaler- potentials must be defined. Under potentiels de tous les autres points
weise wird das Potential eines normal circumstances the potential of pourront être comparés. En règle
geerdeten Punktes gewählt, das den a grounded point is selected and is générale, le potentiel de la terre est
Wert Null (Volt) erhält. given the value „zero“ (volt). pris comme référence. On lui donne la
valeur „0 V“.
Die Rückleiter (Nulleiter) aller The return line (neutral line) of all Tous les conducteurs de référence
Verbraucher in einem Versorgungs- users in the supply network is then des appareils d’une installation sont
netz sind dann an dieses Bezugs- connected to this reference potential. généralement reliés à ce potentiel de
potential angeschlossen. référence.
Warum können Bezugs- Why can reference potentials Pourquoi des potentiels de
potentiale unterschiedlich differ? référence peuvent-ils être
sein? différents ?
Im allgemeinen wird nicht nur der In general not only the central En règle générale, on désigne par
zentrale Bezugspunkt, also z.B. der reference point, e.g. the ground point « potentiel de référence », non
Erdungspunkt an einer Transformator- in a transformer station, is designated seulement le point central de mise à la
station, als Bezugspotential as the reference potential, but terre, mais également tous les
bezeichnet, sondern auch alle mit everything connected with the same conducteurs qui lui sont reliés, ainsi
diesem direkt verbundenen Rückleiter return line and bus-bar, as well as que les autres points qui ont été mis
und Sammelschienen, sowie additionally established grounds. directement à la terre.
zusätzlich eingerichtete Erder.
Da alle diese Verbindungen - auch die Because all these connections - Etant donné que ces conducteurs,
Erde - sowohl ohmschen, induktiven including the earth - possess ohmic, mais également la terre, présentent
als auch kapazitiven Widerstand induc-tive or capacitive resistance, une impédance ohmique, inductive et
besitzen und normalerweise die Rück- and normally the return current from capacitive qui dépend de leur
ströme der Verbraucher hin zur the users is fed back to the supply, longueur, on doit considérer qu’ils
Versorgung führen, kommt es auf ihrer this results in a voltage drop over the créent une chute de tension et donc
gesamten Länge zu Spannungsfällen, entire length of the network which is de potentiel. Les valeurs des
die einem Potentialgefälle gleichzu- equivalent to the potential drop. The potentiels locaux de référence, par
setzen sind. Die Abweichung des difference in potential between the rapport au point central de mise à la
lokalen Bezugspotentials vom local reference potential and the terre dépend donc du courant de
zentralen Bezugspunkt hängt also von central reference point is dependent compensation et de l’impédance des
der Stromstärke und dem Widerstand therefore on the strength of the current conducteurs.
des jeweiligen Rückleiters ab. and the resistance of the respective
return line.
Abbildung 4 zeigt an einem einfachen Figure 4 illustrates an example of the La figure 4 montre sur un exemple
Beispiel die oben beschriebenen above described relationship in the simple, la relation qui existe entre des
Zusammenhänge bei der Verwendung case of a reference potential bus-bar. potentiels locaux de référence
einer Bezugspotential-Sammel- Figure 5 shows the corresponding lorsqu’ils sont reliés par un
schiene. Abbildung 5 zeigt die diagram when the earth is used as the conducteur. La figure 5 montre le
entsprechende Darstellung, wenn als return line. même exemple lorsque les potentiels
Rückleiter die Erde benutzt wird. locaux de référence sont seulement
reliés à la terre.

Abb. 4 Beispiel für das Gefälle des Fig. 4: Example for the drop in Fig.e 4: Potentiels locaux de
Bezugspotentials reference potential référence lorsqu’ils sont reliés par un
conducteur
Das dargestellte Netz besteht aus The network illustrated above consists Le circuit qui est représenté sur la
einer Transformatorstation als of a transformer station as the power figure 4 est constitué d’un
Stromversorger an dem Ort (0) und supply at location (0) and two users at transformateur qui génère un courant
zwei Verbrauchern an den Orten (A) locations (A) and (B). électrique au point (0) et de deux
und (B). récepteurs (A) et (B).
Der Einfachheit halber ist eine A single-pole diagram is selected for Pour simplifier l’explication, on ne
einpolige Darstellung gewählt. the sake of simplicity. prend en compte ici qu’un seul
conducteur.
Der Stromrückleiter ist eine Sammel- The currrent return is a bus-bar which Les impédances ohmiques, inductives
schiene, die gleichzeitig das Bezugs- shows at the same time the reference et capacitives de ligne sont désignées
potential darstellt. Stellvertretend für potential. The resistances RL1 and par RL1 entre (0) et (A) et par RL2
den ohmschen, induktiven und RL2 represent the ohmic, inductive entre (A) et (B). Les courants de
kapazitiven Widerstand der Sammel- and capacitive resistance of the bus- compensation correspondants sont
schiene sind die Widerstände RL1 und bar and also designate the sections désignés par I1+I2 entre (0) et (A)
RL2 der beiden Teilabschnitte von of the circuit from (0) to (A) and from et I2 entre (A) et (B).
(0) bis (A) und von (A) bis (B) (A) to (B).
eingezeichnet.
Die Rückströme I1+I2 und I2 verur- The return currents I1+I2 and I2 cause Les différences de potentiel corres-
sachen an diesen Widerständen voltage drops at these resistances, pondantes sont désignées par
Spannungsfälle, die zur Anhebung des and this leads to an increase in the δUA = [(I1+I2) x RL1] pour le point (A)
Bezugspotentials um den Wert reference potential by a value et δUB = [(I1+I2) x RL1 + I2 x RL2] pour
δUA = (I1+I2) x RL1 am Punkt (A) und δUA = (I1+I2) x RL1 at point (A) and le point (B).
δUB = (I1+I2) x RL1 + I2 x RL2 am δUB = (I1+I2) x RL1 + I2 x RL2 at
Punkt (B) führen. point (B).
Das darunter liegende Diagramm zeigt The diagram below illustrates the Le diagramme montre les relations qui
die Verhältnisse als grafische relationships graphically. existent entre les potentiels.
Darstellung.

Abb. 5 Im Unterschied zu Abb. 4 Fig. 5: In contrast to Figure 4 here Fig. 5 Potentiels locaux de
wird hier die Erde als Rückleiter the earth is used as the return line. référence lorsqu’ils sont reliés
benutzt. Die eingezeichneten The resistances RE symbolise the directement à la terre. RE1 et RE2
Widerstände RE symbolisieren den respective earth resistance. Here symbolisent les impédances entre les
jeweiligen Erdwiderstand. Auch hier again this results in an increase in the différents points de mise à la terre. Il
kommt es zu Anhebungen des reference potential, which however is existe bien ici des différences de
Bezugspotentials, dessen Verlauf not linear here as in the case of Fig. 4, potentiels entre les différents points,
jedoch, bedingt z.B. durch die because of the spatial distribution of mais elle ne sont pas réparties de
räumliche Widerstandsverteilung der resistance of the earth. manière linéaire comme dans le cas
Erde, nicht linear ist, wie im Beispiel de la figure 4.
der Abbildung 4.
Was bewirken What influence does Effets d’une différence de

Potentialunterschiede? potential difference have? potentiel
Werden zwei Punkte verschiedenen If two points having a potential Lorsque deux points qui présentent
Potentials miteinander leitend difference are connected together an une différence de potentiel sont reliés
verbunden, so fliesst ein elektrischer electrical current flows from the point entre eux, il existe un courant
Strom vom höheren zum niedrigeren with the higher potential to the point électrique qui circule du potentiel le
Potential. Die dabei auftretende with the lower potential. The strength plus haut vers le potentiel le plus bas.
Stromstärke hängt von der Höhe des of this resultant current depends on L’intensité de ce courant dépend de la
Potentialunterschieds (Spannung), von the magnitude of the potential différence de potentiel, de la
der Leitfähigkeit der Verbindung, und difference between the two points conductibilité des conducteurs et de la
vom Innenwiderstand der mit den (voltage), the current-carrying capacity résistance interne des différents
Punkten verbundenen Einrichtungen of the connection between them and appareils qui sont raccordés.
ab. the internal resistance of the
equipment connecting the two points.
Man unterscheidet zwischen gewollten A differentiation is made between Ces différences de potentiel peuvent
und ungewollten Potentialunter- forced and unforced potential être volontaires ou involontaires :
schieden: differences:
• Gewollte Potentialunterschiede, • Forced potential differences, such • volontaires : sont créées par des
also nutzbare elektrische Span- as usable electrical voltage, is générateurs ou des batteries
nungen, werden von Generatoren created by batteries and d’accumulateurs, dans le but
und Batterien zur Bereitstellung generators in the preparation of d’alimenter les circuits électriques
elektrischer Energie erzeugt. electrical energy.
• Die ungewollten Potentialunter- • Unforced potential differences, • involontaires : sont créées soit
schiede, wie statische Aufladungen such as static electricity and, as par l’accumulation de charges
und vor allem die für unsere discussed in this article, the électriques statiques, soit, dans le
Betrachtung relevanten Verschie- relevant displacement of the cadre de cet exposé, par des
bungen von Bezugspotentialen reference potential by voltage impédances de ligne qui génèrent
durch Spannungsfälle in strom- drops in return lines in which des courants de compensation qui
durchflossenen Rückleitern, current is flowing, can lead to peuvent endommager les
können dagegen zu Störungen interference and also damage to installations.
oder sogar zur Zerstörung von cables and circuits.
Leitungen und Schaltkreisen
führen.

Diese Seite wurde für eigene Notizen frei gelassen.

This page is left blank for your notes.
Notes personnelles.

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360
13.7 Erection drawing

A-297432-0
A-297433-0

Ausführen Anlage Plannummer Abteilung Zeichnung Nr.
Stückliste Blatt
1/6 A-297433-0
bill of material Page
manufacture plant number department drawing number
Komm. Nr / Kunde Projekt Zeichnungs Benennung Änderungsstand
12298295/10 Mounting- and rotor unit HRV 40X-1000 / K 0

Colconcretos S.A. Sogamoso Montage- und Läufereinheit HRV 40X-1000 / K
Boyacá, Kolumbien drawing discription revision
Änderung / revision bearbeitet / prepared
order no. / purchaser project Zeile Rev. Datum Name geprüft Datum / date Name / name
ges. Masse line rev. date name checked
( kg ) 03.09.2015 LAS
total weight geprüft / checked
Datum / date Name / name
9135
28.09.2015 SUN
Lieferung bei
Pos. Nr. supplied by Rev. Menge Benennung / Gegenstand / BxHxL Masse Werkstoff / Norm Bemerkung/ id. Nr.
( kg )
Oelde
Client
pos. no. rev. Quant. designation / subject / BxHxL weight material / norm remarks/ id. Nr.
Venti
Disconnect terminal anchor 0,40

10 X 5 HAS-RTZ M16x125/30-A2 SS316 46839
Ankerstange . 2,00
Capsule adhesive anchors
20 X 5 HVU-TZ M16 41268
Verbundankerpatrone
Stone bolt 3,40
30 X 6 M30x630 Cs/galv. 72374
Steinschraube . 20,40 DIN 529/B
Stone bolt 3,40
35 X 10 M30x500 Cs/galv. 72277
Steinschraube . 34,00 DIN 529/B
Washer 0,05
40 X 16 B30 Cs/galv. 2189
Scheibe . 0,86 ISO 7090
Hexagon nut 0,22
50 X 32 M30-8. Cs/galv. 2091
Sechskantmutter . 7,14 ISO 4032
Padding plate 12,00
60 X 16 pl.30x200x305 1.0038
Auflageblech . 192,00 A-240832-4
Padding plate 4,70
70 X 16 pl.10x200x305 1.0038
Auflageblech . 75,20 A-244569-4
set Filling plates 11,90
80 X 16 200x305 1.0038
Satz Ausgleichsbleche . 190,40 A-219423-4
Fan casing 3324,10

90 1 B x H x L = 1850 x 4300 x 3590 1.0038 _2DN
Ventilatorgehäuse . 3324,10 A-297577-0
Fan casing part 1
90.1 X 1 B x H x L = 1650 x 2400 x 3575 1.0038 _0KA
Ventilatorgehäuse Teil 1
Fan casing part 2
90.2 X 1 B x H x L = 1520 x 2080 x 2830 1.0038 _0K9
Fan casing part 3
90.3 X 1 B x H x L = 1520 x 1550 x 1955 1.0038 _0K8
Hexagon head screw 0,64
100 X 2 M30x80-8.8 Cs/galv. 66378
Sechskantschraube . 1,27 ISO 4017
Bearing support 455,00
110 X 1 B x H x L = 930 x 313 x 1430 1.0038 _550
Lagerbock . 455,00 A-297563-1
Montagestückliste A-297433-0.xlsx
Stückliste Blatt
2/6 A-297433-0

( kg ) 03.09.2015 LAS
9135
28.09.2015 SUN
Lieferung bei
( kg )
Oelde
Client
Venti
Motor base plate 427,60

120 1 B x H x L = 1060 x 1260 x 130 1.0038 _05S
Motorsohlplatte . 427,60 A-298030-
130 X 4 M30x80-8.8 Cs/galv. 66378
Rotor unit 1705,00

140 X 1 D= 2290 x 2090 lg. _09D
Läufereinheit . 1705,00
Screw connection - rotor unit
Verschraubung - Läufereinheit
set Filling plates - VOF 222 7,60 1.0038
150 X 1 185 x 530 VWN-A63 _17L
Satz Ausgleichsbleche - VOF 222 . 7,60 no.11
Mounting plate - VOF 222 0,15 1.0038
160 X 4 pl.8x50x60 VWN-A117 57080
Montageplatte - VOF 222 . 0,62 no.11
170 X 4 M24x180-8.8 Cs/galv. 66078
Washer 0,03
180 X 4 B 24 Cs/galv. 2187
Hexagon nut 0,11
190 X 8 M24-8. Cs/galv. 2090
set Filling plates - VOF 228 9,00 1.0038
200 X 1 195 x590 VWN-A63 _17K
Satz Ausgleichsbleche - VOF 228 . 9,00 no.17
Mounting plate - GOF 236 0,15 1.0038
210 X 4 pl.8x50x60 VWN-A117 57081
Montageplatte - GOF 236 . 0,62 no.17
220 X 4 M30x180-8.8 Cs/galv. 25110
Washer 0,05
230 X 4 B 30 Cs/galv. 2189
Hexagon nut 0,22
240 X 8 M30-8. Cs/galv. 2091
250 X 6 M20x110-8. Cs/galv. 37602
Stückliste Blatt
3/6 A-297433-0

( kg ) 03.09.2015 LAS
9135
28.09.2015 SUN
Lieferung bei
( kg )
Oelde
Client
Venti
Hexagon nut 0,06

260 X 6 M20-8. Cs/galv. 2089
Sealing for all flange connection
Dichtung für alle Flanschverbindungen

meter Sealing cord 0,03 Isoglas braided
270 X 55 d=8 mm cord 41901
Meter Dichtschnur . 1,43 Isoglas Strickgefl.
Screw connection - fan casing division
Verschraubung - Ventilatorgehäuseteilung
280 X 83 M20x65-8.8 Cs/galv. 25421
Washer 0,02
290 X 166 B 20 Cs/galv. 2186
Hexagon nut 0,06
300 X 83 M20-8. Cs/galv. 2089
Inlet socket 16,00

310 X 1 D= 1107/1007x64 lg. 1.0038 _54Y
Einströmstutzen . 16,00 A-297551-3
Inlet nozzle 15,00
320 X 1 D= 995/881x149 lg. 1.8974 _0YA
Einströmdüse . 15,00 A-297552-3
Screw connection - inlet socket
Verschraubung - Einströmstutzen
330 X 12 M12x35-8.8 Cs/galv. 236
Washer 0,02
340 X 12 A 13 Cs/galv. 2163
Shaft passage 0° 35,90

350 X 1 D= 710 1.0038 45244
Wellendurchführung 0° . 35,90 A-216892-2
Stückliste Blatt
4/6 A-297433-0

( kg ) 03.09.2015 LAS
9135
28.09.2015 SUN
Lieferung bei
( kg )
Oelde
Client
Venti
Screw connection - shaft passage
Verschraubung - Wellendurchführung
Washer 0,02
360 X 32 A13 Cs/galv. 2163
Hexagon nut 0,02
370 X 36 M12-8. Cs/galv. 2087
380 X 4 M12x35-8.8 Cs/galv. 236
Washer 0,01
390 X 4 B 12 Cs/galv. 2184
Screw connection - shaft gasket
Verschraubung - Wellendichtung
400 X 4 M12x50-8.8 Cs/galv. 238
Washer 0,01
410 X 4 B 12 Cs/galv. 2184
Motor 2147,00
420 X 1
Motor . 2147,00
Screw connection - motor
Verschraubung - Motor
set Filling plates - motor 0,00
430 X 4 1.0038 _17J
Satz Ausgleichsbleche - Motor . 0,00 A-298099-4
440 X 4 M24x110-8.8 Cs/galv. 9067
Washer 0,00
450 X 4 M24-8. Cs/galv. 2187
Stückliste Blatt
5/6 A-297433-0

( kg ) 03.09.2015 LAS
9135
28.09.2015 SUN
Lieferung bei
( kg )
Oelde
Client
Venti

460 X 8 M20x100-8.8 Cs/galv. 9060
Hexagon nut 0,06
470 X 8 M20-8. Cs/galv. 2089
Resistance thermometer 0,80

480 X 2 PT-100 (Omnigrad T Tr24) ML= 120 mm _06X
Widerstandsthermometer . 1,60
Vibration velocity transducer 0,50
490 X 2 VS-068 51547
Schwinggeschwindigkeitsaufnehmer . 1,00
Cooling vane guard 9,70

500 X 1 D= 682/420x420x165 Zincor 46781
Kühlflügelschutz . 9,70 A-221358-3
Screw connection - cooling vane guard
Verschraubung - Kühlflügelschutz
510 X 4 M12x20-8.8 Cs/galv. 233
Washer 0,01
520 X 4 B 12 Cs/galv. 2184
530 X 10 M8x20-8.8 Cs/galv. 222
Washer 0,00
540 X 20 B8 Cs/galv. 2182
Hexagon nut 0,01
550 X 10 M8-8. Cs/galv. 2085
Shaft protection hood 7,70

560 X 1 B x H x L = 350 x 364 x 520 1.0226 _0QG
Wellenschutzhaube . 7,70 A-297560-4
Coupling protection hood 12,10
570 X 1 B x H x L = 510 x 497 x 350 1.0226 _17J
Kupplungsschutzhaube . 12,10 A-297565-3
Stückliste Blatt
6/6 A-297433-0

( kg ) 03.09.2015 LAS
9135
28.09.2015 SUN
Lieferung bei
( kg )
Oelde
Client
Venti
Screw connection - protection hoods
Verschraubung - Schutzhauben
580 X 8 M8x20-8.8 Cs/galv. 222
Washer 0,00
590 X 12 B8 Cs/galv. 2182
Hexagon nut 0,01
600 X 4 M8-8. Cs/galv. 2085
Louver damper with Auma actuator 384,00

610 X 1 Gr.1000-350 SAR07.2-32/GF100.3/VZ4.3 _01S
Regelklappe mit Auma Antrieb . 384,00
Screw connection - louver damper
Verschraubung - Regelklappe
620 X 28 M16x45-8.8 Cs/galv. 247
Washer 0,01
630 X 56 B 16 Cs/galv. 2185
Hexagon nut 0,03
640 X 28 M16-8. Cs/galv. 2088

Assembly and Operating Instructions: Cement Mill Filter Fan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Assembly and Operating Instructions: Cement Mill Filter Fan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cement Mill Filter Fan

HRV 40X-1000 / K CW 270 ST 360

Assembly and Operating instructions

Cement Mill Filter Fan

Project: VMR Sogamoso - CO

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 1

1 Fundamental safety instructions ...................................................................3

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 2

1 Fundamental safety instructions

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 3

1.1 Special Safety Information

Caution, hot surfaces!

Warning of danger. Be sure to read and observe this information first.

Useful information and supplementary information

Attention! Electrical voltage

Attention! Automatic start of rotating parts

Attention! Hot surfaces

Secure against reactivation during repair

Information on explosion protection.

Observe the operating instructions!

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 4

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 5

3 Area of Application and Correct Use

Restriction of the permissible service environment

Limitation of the permissible rotating speed range

Rotating speed range Limitation

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 6

4 Design and Method

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 7

Use only hoists with adequate lifting capacity!

General storage conditions for machines and machine parts

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 8

 Check the place of installation for

Rotate the impeller several times by hand.

Locking- and regulating flap

 Tighten the flanged screws evenly in order to avoid stresses.

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 9

6.1 Electrical Connection

When connecting the electric components, please observe the following:

 Regulations according to VDE (Association of German Electro-Engineers) Guidelines 0100.

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 10

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 11

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 12

7.1 Checklist for maintenance, servicing and commissioning

Legend: √ = checked and correct; / = N/A; f = fault (action necessary) 

Bearing temperature measured on the bearing outside ring:

Vibration measurements on the bearings

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 13

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 14

8.1 Switching the fan on

Throttling by the system mechanisms can likewise

8.2 Switching off the fan

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 15

If hot or cold gases are flowing through the fan when it

When the fan is switched on, unbalance vibrations can

The effect of temperature

The vibrations on the fan can have following causes:

T:\AUFTRAG\12298XXX\12298295\KDOKU\VORBEREITUNG\POS_0010\12298295_10_HRV_40X-1000_K_CW_270_ST_360_EN.DOCX; Date: 26.10.2015 16

Increased care is required when:

 the permissible bearing temperature is exceeded,

Evaluation of the vibrations / limit values for roller bearing

shaft output > 300 kW

applied standard ISO 10816-3